TI AM1806BZCED3 Am1806 arm microprocessor Datasheet

AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
Check for Samples: AM1806
1 AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
1.1
Features
• Highlights
– 375/456-MHz ARM926EJ-S™ RISC Core
– ARM9 Memory Architecture
– Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem
– Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access Controller
3 (EDMA3)
– Two External Memory Interfaces
– Three Configurable 16550 type UART
Modules
– Two Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPI)
– Multimedia Card (MMC)/Secure Digital (SD)
Card Interface with Secure Data I/O (SDIO)
– Two Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit
– USB 2.0 OTG Port With Integrated PHY
– One Multichannel Audio Serial Port
– Three 64-Bit General-Purpose Timers
– One 64-bit General-Purpose/Watchdog Timer
– TwoEnhanced Pulse Width Modulators
– Three 32-Bit Enhanced Capture Modules
• 375/456-MHz ARM926EJ-S™ RISC MPU
• Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access Controller 3
(EDMA3):
– 2 Channel Controllers
– 3 Transfer Controllers
– 64 Independent DMA Channels
– 16 Quick DMA Channels
– Programmable Transfer Burst Size
• 1.8V or 3.3V LVCMOS IOs (except for USB and
DDR2 interfaces)
• Two External Memory Interfaces:
– EMIFA
• NOR (8-/16-Bit-Wide Data)
• NAND (8-/16-Bit-Wide Data)
• 16-Bit SDRAM With 128 MB Address
Space
– DDR2/Mobile DDR Memory Controller
• 16-Bit DDR2 SDRAM With 512 MB
Address Space or
• 16-Bit mDDR SDRAM With 256 MB
Address Space
• Three Configurable 16550 type UART Modules:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– With Modem Control Signals
– 16-byte FIFO
– 16x or 13x Oversampling Option
Two Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPI) Each
With Multiple Chip-Selects
Two Multimedia Card (MMC)/Secure Digital (SD)
Card Interface with Secure Data I/O (SDIO)
Interfaces
Two Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C
Bus™)
One Host-Port Interface (HPI) With 16-Bit-Wide
Muxed Address/Data Bus For High Bandwidth
Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem
(PRUSS)
– Two Independent Programmable Realtime
Unit (PRU) Cores
• 32-Bit Load/Store RISC architecture
• 4K Byte instruction RAM per core
• 512 Bytes data RAM per core
• PRU Subsystem (PRUSS) can be disabled
via software to save power
• Register 30 of each PRU is exported from
the subsystem in addition to the normal
R31 output of the PRU cores.
– Standard power management mechanism
• Clock gating
• Entire subsystem under a single PSC
clock gating domain
– Dedicated interrupt controller
– Dedicated switched central resource
USB 2.0 OTG Port With Integrated PHY (USB0)
– USB 2.0 High-/Full-Speed Client
– USB 2.0 High-/Full-/Low-Speed Host
– End Point 0 (Control)
– End Points 1,2,3,4 (Control, Bulk, Interrupt or
ISOC) Rx and Tx
One Multichannel Audio Serial Port:
– Transmit/Receive Clocks
– Two Clock Zones and 16 Serial Data Pins
– Supports TDM, I2S, and Similar Formats
– DIT-Capable
– FIFO buffers for Transmit and Receive
1
2
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
ARM926EJ-S is a trademark of ARM Limited.
ADVANCE INFORMATION concerns new products in the sampling
or preproduction phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
12
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
ADVANCE INFORMATION
• Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports:
– Transmit/Receive Clocks
– Two Clock Zones and 16 Serial Data Pins
– Supports TDM, I2S, and Similar Formats
– AC97 Audio Codec Interface
– Telecom Interfaces (ST-Bus, H100)
– 128-channel TDM
– FIFO buffers for Transmit and Receive
• Video Port Interface (VPIF):
– Two 8-bit SD (BT.656), Single 16-bit or Single
Raw (8-/10-/12-bit) Video Capture Channels
– Two 8-bit SD (BT.656), Single 16-bit Video
Display Channels
• Universal Parallel Port (uPP):
– High-Speed Parallel Interface to FPGAs and
Data Converters
– Data Width on Each of Two Channels is 8- to
16-bit Inclusive
– Single Data Rate or Dual Data Rate Transfers
– Supports Multiple Interfaces with START,
ENABLE and WAIT Controls
• Real-Time Clock With 32 KHz Oscillator and
Separate Power Rail
• Three One 64-Bit General-Purpose Timers
(Configurable as Two 32-Bit Timers)
2
• One 64-bit General-Purpose/Watchdog Timer
(Configurable as Two 32-bit General-Purpose
Timers)
• Two Enhanced Pulse Width Modulators
(eHRPWM):
– Dedicated 16-Bit Time-Base Counter With
Period And Frequency Control
– 6 Single Edge, 6 Dual Edge Symmetric or 3
Dual Edge Asymmetric Outputs
– Dead-Band Generation
– PWM Chopping by High-Frequency Carrier
– Trip Zone Input
• Three 32-Bit Enhanced Capture Modules
(eCAP):
– Configurable as 3 Capture Inputs or 3
Auxiliary Pulse Width Modulator (APWM)
outputs
– Single Shot Capture of up to Four Event
Time-Stamps
• 361-Ball Pb-Free Plastic Ball Grid Array (PBGA)
[ZCE Suffix], 0.65-mm Ball Pitch
• Commercial or Extended Temperature
• Community Resources
– TI E2E Community
– TI Embedded Processors Wiki
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
1.2
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Trademarks
ADVANCE INFORMATION
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
3
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
1.3
www.ti.com
Description
The device is a Low-power applications processor based on ARM926EJ-S™.
The device enables OEMs and ODMs to quickly bring to market devices featuring robust operating
systems support, rich user interfaces, and high processing performance life through the maximum
flexibility of a fully integrated mixed processor solution.
The ARM926EJ-S is a 32-bit RISC processor core that performs 32-bit or 16-bit instructions and
processes 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit data. The core uses pipelining so that all parts of the processor and
memory system can operate continuously.
The ARM core has a coprocessor 15 (CP15), protection module, and Data and program Memory
Management Units (MMUs) with table look-aside buffers. It has separate 16K-byte instruction and
16K-byte data caches. Both are four-way associative with virtual index virtual tag (VIVT). The ARM core
also has a 8KB RAM (Vector Table) and 64KB ROM.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The peripheral set includes: one USB2.0 OTG interface; two inter-integrated circuit (I2C) Bus interfaces;
one multichannel audio serial port (McASP) with 16 serializers and FIFO buffers; two multichannel
buffered serial ports (McBSP) with FIFO buffers; two SPI interfaces with multiple chip selects; four 64-bit
general-purpose timers each configurable (one configurable as watchdog); a configurable 16-bit host port
interface (HPI) ; up to 9 banks of 16 pins of general-purpose input/output (GPIO) with programmable
interrupt/event generation modes, multiplexed with other peripherals; three UART interfaces (each with
RTS and CTS); two enhanced high-resolution pulse width modulator (eHRPWM) peripherals; 3 32-bit
enhanced capture (eCAP) module peripherals which can be configured as 3 capture inputs or 3 auxiliary
pulse width modulator (APWM) outputs; and 2 external memory interfaces: an asynchronous and SDRAM
external memory interface (EMIFA) for slower memories or peripherals, and a higher speed DDR2/Mobile
DDR controller.
The Universal Parallel Port (uPP) provides a high-speed interface to many types of data converters,
FPGAs or other parallel devices. The UPP supports programmable data widths between 8- to 16-bits on
each of two channels. Single-date rate and double-data rate transfers are supported as well as START,
ENABLE and WAIT signals to provide control for a variety of data converters.
A Video Port Interface (VPIF) is included providing a flexible video input/output port.
The rich peripheral set provides the ability to control external peripheral devices and communicate with
external processors. For details on each of the peripherals, see the related sections later in this document
and the associated peripheral reference guides.
The device has a complete set of development tools for the ARM . These include C compilers, and
scheduling, and a Windows™ debugger interface for visibility into source code execution.
4
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
1.4
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Functional Block Diagram
JTAG Interface
ARM Subsystem
System Control
ARM926EJ-S CPU
With MMU
PLL/Clock
Generator
w/OSC
Input
Clock(s)
4KB ETB
GeneralPurpose
Timer (x3)
16KB
16KB
I-Cache D-Cache
Power/Sleep
Controller
RTC/
32-kHz
OSC
8KB RAM
(Vector Table)
Pin
Multiplexing
64KB ROM
Switched Central Resource (SCR)
Peripherals
Audio Ports
EDMA3
(x2)
McASP
w/FIFO
Serial Interfaces
McBSP
(x2)
I2C
(x2)
SPI
(x2)
(1)
eCAP
(x3)
Video
LCD
Ctlr
VPIF
Connectivity
Control Timers
ePWM
(x2)
UART
(x3)
Display
USB2.0
OTG Ctlr
PHY
HPI
Parallel Port Internal Memory Customizable Interface
uPP
128KB
RAM
PRU Subsystem
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DMA
External Memory Interfaces
MMC/SD
(8b)
(x2)
EMIFA(8b/16B)
NAND/Flash
16b SDRAM
DDR2/MDDR
Controller
Note: Not all peripherals are available at the same time due to multiplexing.
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
5
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
1
2
3
4
ADVANCE INFORMATION
5
www.ti.com
........................ 1
1.1
Features .............................................. 1
1.2
Trademarks .......................................... 3
1.3
Description ........................................... 4
1.4
Functional Block Diagram ............................ 5
Revision History ......................................... 7
Device Overview ........................................ 8
3.1
Device Characteristics ............................... 8
3.2
Device Compatibility ................................. 9
3.3
ARM Subsystem ..................................... 9
3.4
Memory Map Summary ............................. 12
3.5
Pin Assignments .................................... 15
3.6
Pin Multiplexing Control ............................ 18
3.7
Terminal Functions ................................. 19
Device Configuration ................................. 56
4.1
Boot Modes ......................................... 56
4.2
SYSCFG Module ................................... 56
4.3
Pullup/Pulldown Resistors .......................... 59
Device Operating Conditions ....................... 60
AM1806 ARM Microprocessor
6.7
Interrupts ............................................ 75
6.8
................. 81
EDMA ............................................... 86
External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) ............. 92
DDR2/mDDR Controller ........................... 102
Memory Protection Units .......................... 115
MMC / SD / SDIO (MMCSD0, MMCSD1) ......... 118
Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) .......... 121
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) ....... 130
Serial Peripheral Interface Ports (SPI0, SPI1) .... 140
Inter-Integrated Circuit Serial Ports (I2C) ......... 163
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
LCD Controller (LCDC) ............................ 176
6.21
Host-Port Interface (UHPI)
191
6.22
Universal Parallel Port (uPP)
199
6.24
6.25
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
Peripheral Information and Electrical
Specifications .......................................... 64
6.1
6.2
Parameter Information .............................. 64
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ............................................ 65
6.3
Power Supplies
65
6.4
Reset
66
6.5
6.6
6
Recommended Operating Conditions .............. 61
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Junction
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ............ 63
.....................................
...............................................
Crystal Oscillator or External Clock Input ..........
Clock PLLs .........................................
204
210
Enhanced High-Resolution Pulse-Width Modulator
(eHRPWM) ........................................ 213
.............................................
...........................
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............
Timers
218
6.27
Real Time Clock (RTC)
220
6.28
6.29
223
Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS)
..................................................... 227
...................................
.............
Device Support ....................................
Documentation Support ...........................
Emulation Logic
230
Device and Documentation Support
236
7.1
236
7.2
8
........................
......................
Video Port Interface (VPIF) .......................
Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Peripheral ............
6.26
6.30
7
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) ............................................ 167
Universal Serial Bus OTG Controller (USB0)
[USB2.0 OTG] ..................................... 169
6.20
6.23
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating
Junction Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) ................................. 60
Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
236
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable
Information ............................................ 237
8.1
Device and Development-Support Tool
Nomenclature ..................................... 237
69
8.2
Thermal Data for ZCE Package
70
8.3
Thermal Data for ZWT Package
Contents
...................
..................
238
239
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
2 Revision History
This data manual revision history highlights the changes made to the SPRS658A device-specific data
manual to make it an SPRS658B revision.
Table 2-1. Revision History
ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Deleted "10/100 Mb/s Ethernet MAC (EMAC)" from "Highlights" in Section 1.1
Revision History
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
7
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3 Device Overview
3.1
Device Characteristics
provides an overview of the device. The table shows significant features of the device, including the
capacity of on-chip RAM, peripherals, and the package type with pin count.
Table 3-1. Characteristics of the device
HARDWARE FEATURES
AM1806
DDR2, 16-bit bus width, up to 150 MHz
Mobile DDR, 16-bit bus width, up to 133 MHz
DDR2/mDDR Controller
Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width) RAM, Flash,
16-bit SDRAM, NOR, NAND
EMIFA
Flash Card Interface
MMC and SD cards supported.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EDMA3
64 independent channels, 16 QDMA channels,
2 channel controllers, 3 transfer controllers
Timers
4 64-Bit General Purpose (configurable as 2 separate 32-bit
timers, 1 configurable as Watch Dog)
UART
3 (each with RTS and CTS flow control)
SPI
2 (Each with one hardware chip select)
I2C
2 (both Master/Slave)
Multichannel Audio Serial Port [McASP]
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port [McBSP]
1 (each with transmit/receive, FIFO buffer, 16 serializers)
2 (each with transmit/receive, FIFO buffer, 16)
Peripherals
eHRPWM
Not all peripherals pins
are available at the
USB 2.0 (USB0)
same time (for more
General-Purpose Input/Output Port
detail, see the Device
Configurations section). LCD Controller
4 Single Edge, 4 Dual Edge Symmetric, or
2 Dual Edge Asymmetric Outputs
High-Speed OTG Controller with on-chip OTG PHY
9 banks of 16-bit
1
Universal Parallel Port (uPP)
1
Video Port Interface (VPIF)
1 (video in and video out)
PRU Subsystem (PRUSS)
On-Chip Memory
2 Programmable PRU Cores
Size (Bytes)
168KB RAM, 1088KB Boot ROM
Organization
ARM
16KB I-Cache
16KB D-Cache
8KB RAM (Vector Table)
64KB ROM
ADDITIONAL MEMORY
128KB RAM
C674x CPU ID + CPU
Rev ID
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
0x1400
C674x Megamodule
Revision
Revision ID Register (MM_REVID[15:0])
0x0000
JTAG BSDL_ID
DEVIDR0 Register
CPU Frequency
MHz
Voltage
0x0B7D_102F
ARM926 375 MHz (1.2V) or 456 MHz (1.3V)
1.2 V nominal for 375 MHz verion
1.3 V nominal for 456 MHz verion
Core (V)
I/O (V)
Packages
Product Status (1)
(1)
8
1.8V or 3.3 V
13 mm x 13 mm, 361-Ball 0.65 mm pitch, PBGA (ZCE)
16 mm x 16 mm, 361-Ball 0.80 mm pitch, PBGA (ZWT)
Product Preview (PP),
Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
AI
ADVANCE INFORMATION concerns new products in the sampling or preproduction phase of development. Characteristic data and
other specifications are subject to change without notice.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.2
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Device Compatibility
The ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU is compatible with other ARM9 CPUs from ARM Holdings plc.
3.3
ARM Subsystem
3.3.1
ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU
The ARM Subsystem integrates the ARM926EJ-S processor. The ARM926EJ-S processor is a member of
ARM9 family of general-purpose microprocessors. This processor is targeted at multi-tasking applications
where full memory management, high performance, low die size, and low power are all important. The
ARM926EJ-S processor supports the 32-bit ARM and 16 bit THUMB instruction sets, enabling the user to
trade off between high performance and high code density. Specifically, the ARM926EJ-S processor
supports the ARMv5TEJ instruction set, which includes features for efficient execution of Java byte codes,
providing Java performance similar to Just in Time (JIT) Java interpreter, but without associated code
overhead.
The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic to assist in both
hardware and software debug. The ARM926EJ-S processor has a Harvard architecture and provides a
complete high performance subsystem, including:
• ARM926EJ -S integer core
• CP15 system control coprocessor
• Memory Management Unit (MMU)
• Separate instruction and data caches
• Write buffer
• Separate instruction and data (internal RAM) interfaces
• Separate instruction and data AHB bus interfaces
• Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
For more complete details on the ARM9, refer to the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, available
at http://www.arm.com
3.3.2
CP15
The ARM926EJ-S system control coprocessor (CP15) is used to configure and control instruction and
data caches, Memory Management Unit (MMU), and other ARM subsystem functions. The CP15 registers
are programmed using the MRC and MCR ARM instructions, when the ARM in a privileged mode such as
supervisor or system mode.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
9
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The ARM Subsystem includes the following features:
• ARM926EJ-S RISC processor
• ARMv5TEJ (32/16-bit) instruction set
• Little endian
• System Control Co-Processor 15 (CP15)
• MMU
• 16KB Instruction cache
• 16KB Data cache
• Write Buffer
• Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
• ARM Interrupt controller
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.3.3
www.ti.com
MMU
ADVANCE INFORMATION
A single set of two level page tables stored in main memory is used to control the address translation,
permission checks and memory region attributes for both data and instruction accesses. The MMU uses a
single unified Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB) to cache the information held in the page tables. The
MMU features are:
• Standard ARM architecture v4 and v5 MMU mapping sizes, domains and access protection scheme.
• Mapping sizes are:
– 1MB (sections)
– 64KB (large pages)
– 4KB (small pages)
– 1KB (tiny pages)
• Access permissions for large pages and small pages can be specified separately for each quarter of
the page (subpage permissions)
• Hardware page table walks
• Invalidate entire TLB, using CP15 register 8
• Invalidate TLB entry, selected by MVA, using CP15 register 8
• Lockdown of TLB entries, using CP15 register 10
3.3.4
Caches and Write Buffer
The size of the Instruction cache is 16KB, Data cache is 16KB. Additionally, the caches have the following
features:
• Virtual index, virtual tag, and addressed using the Modified Virtual Address (MVA)
• Four-way set associative, with a cache line length of eight words per line (32-bytes per line) and with
two dirty bits in the Dcache
• Dcache supports write-through and write-back (or copy back) cache operation, selected by memory
region using the C and B bits in the MMU translation tables
• Critical-word first cache refilling
• Cache lockdown registers enable control over which cache ways are used for allocation on a line fill,
providing a mechanism for both lockdown, and controlling cache corruption
• Dcache stores the Physical Address TAG (PA TAG) corresponding to each Dcache entry in the TAG
RAM for use during the cache line write-backs, in addition to the Virtual Address TAG stored in the
TAG RAM. This means that the MMU is not involved in Dcache write-back operations, removing the
possibility of TLB misses related to the write-back address.
• Cache maintenance operations provide efficient invalidation of, the entire Dcache or Icache, regions of
the Dcache or Icache, and regions of virtual memory.
The write buffer is used for all writes to a noncachable bufferable region, write-through region and write
misses to a write-back region. A separate buffer is incorporated in the Dcache for holding write-back for
cache line evictions or cleaning of dirty cache lines. The main write buffer has 16-word data buffer and a
four-address buffer. The Dcache write-back has eight data word entries and a single address entry.
3.3.5
Advanced High-Performance Bus (AHB)
The ARM Subsystem uses the AHB port of the ARM926EJ-S to connect the ARM to the Config bus and
the external memories. Arbiters are employed to arbitrate access to the separate D-AHB and I-AHB by the
Config Bus and the external memories bus.
3.3.6
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB)
To support real-time trace, the ARM926EJ-S processor provides an interface to enable connection of an
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM). The ARM926ES-J Subsystem in the AM1808 also includes the
Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB). The ETM consists of two parts:
10
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
•
•
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Trace Port provides real-time trace capability for the ARM9.
Triggering facilities provide trigger resources, which include address and data comparators, counter,
and sequencers.
The AM1808 trace port is not pinned out and is instead only connected to the Embedded Trace Buffer.
The ETB has a 4KB buffer memory. ETB enabled debug tools are required to read/interpret the captured
trace data.
3.3.7
ARM Memory Mapping
By default the ARM has access to most on and off chip memory areas, including EMIFA, DDR2, and the
additional 128K byte on chip SRAM. Likewise almost all of the on chip peripherals are accessible to the
ARM by default.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
See Table 3-2 for a detailed top level device memory map that includes the ARM memory space.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
11
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.4
www.ti.com
Memory Map Summary
Table 3-2. AM1808 Top Level Memory Map
Start Address
End Address
Size
0x0000 0000
0x0000 0FFF
4K
ARM Mem Map
EDMA Mem Map
PRUSS Mem
Map
LCDC
Mem
Map
PRUSS Local
Address
Space
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x0000 1000
0x01BB FFFF
0x01BC 0000
0x01BC 0FFF
4K
ARM ETB
memory
0x01BC 1000
0x01BC 17FF
2K
ARM ETB reg
0x01BC 1800
0x01BC 18FF
256
ARM Ice
Crusher
0x01BC 1900
0x01BF FFFF
0x01C0 0000
0x01C0 7FFF
32K
EDMA3 CC
0x01C0 8000
0x01C0 83FF
1K
EDMA3 TC0
0x01C0 8400
0x01C0 87FF
1K
EDMA3 TC1
0x01C0 8800
0x01C0 FFFF
0x01C1 0000
0x01C1 0FFF
4K
PSC 0
0x01C1 1000
0x01C1 1FFF
4K
PLL Controller 0
0x01C1 2000
0x01C1 3FFF
4K
SYSCFG0
0x01C1 4000
0x01C1 4FFF
0x01C1 5000
0x01C1 FFFF
0x01C2 0000
0x01C2 0FFF
4K
Timer0
0x01C2 1000
0x01C2 1FFF
4K
Timer1
0x01C2 2000
0x01C2 2FFF
4K
I2C 0
0x01C2 3000
0x01C2 3FFF
4K
RTC
0x01C2 4000
0x01C3 FFFF
0x01C4 0000
0x01C4 0FFF
4K
MMC/SD 0
0x01C4 1000
0x01C4 1FFF
4K
SPI 0
0x01C4 2000
0x01C4 2FFF
4K
UART 0
0x01C4 3000
0x01CF FFFF
0x01D0 0000
0x01D0 0FFF
4K
McASP 0 Control
0x01D0 1000
0x01D0 1FFF
4K
McASP 0 AFIFO Ctrl
0x01D0 2000
0x01D0 2FFF
4K
McASP 0 Data
0x01D0 3000
0x01D0 BFFF
0x01D0 C000
0x01D0 CFFF
4K
UART 1
0x01D0 D000
0x01D0 DFFF
4K
UART 2
0x01D0 E000
0x01D0 FFFF
0x01D1 0000
0x01D1 07FF
2K
McBSP0
0x01D1 0800
0x01D1 0FFF
2K
McBSP0 FIFO Ctrl
0x01D1 1000
0x01D1 17FF
2K
McBSP1
0x01D1 1800
0x01D1 1FFF
2K
McBSP1 FIFO Ctrl
0x01D1 2000
0x01DF FFFF
0x01E0 0000
0x01E0 FFFF
64K
USB0
0x01E1 0000
0x01E1 0FFF
4K
UHPI
0x01E1 1000
0x01E1 2FFF
0x01E1 3000
0x01E1 3FFF
4K
LCD Controller
0x01E1 4000
0x01E1 4FFF
4K
Memory Protection Unit 1 (MPU 1)
12
Master
Peripheral
Mem Map
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-2. AM1808 Top Level Memory Map (continued)
Start Address
End Address
Size
ARM Mem Map
EDMA Mem Map
0x01E1 5000
0x01E1 5FFF
4K
0x01E1 6000
0x01E1 6FFF
4K
UPP
0x01E1 7000
0x01E1 7FFF
4K
VPIF
PRUSS Mem
Map
Master
Peripheral
Mem Map
LCDC
Mem
Map
0x01E1 8000
0x01E1 9FFF
0x01E1 A000
0x01E1 AFFF
4K
PLL Controller 1
4K
MMCSD1
0x01E1 B000
0x01E1 BFFF
0x01E1 C000
0x01E1 FFFF
0x01E2 0000
0x01E2 1FFF
0x01E2 2000
0x01E2 2FFF
0x01E2 3000
0x01E2 3FFF
0x01E2 4000
0x01E2 4FFF
0x01E2 5000
0x01E2 5FFF
0x01E2 6000
0x01E2 6FFF
4K
GPIO
0x01E2 7000
0x01E2 7FFF
4K
PSC 1
0x01E2 8000
0x01E2 8FFF
4K
I2C 1
4K
SYSCFG1
0x01E2 9000
0x01E2 BFFF
0x01E2 C000
0x01E2 CFFF
0x01E2 D000
0x01E2 FFFF
0x01E3 0000
0x01E3 7FFF
32K
EDMA3 CC1
0x01E3 8000
0x01E3 83FF
1K
EDMA3 TC2
0x01E3 8400
0x01EF FFFF
0x01F0 0000
0x01F0 0FFF
4K
eHRPWM 0
0x01F0 1000
0x01F0 1FFF
4K
HRPWM 0
0x01F0 2000
0x01F0 2FFF
4K
eHRPWM 1
0x01F0 3000
0x01F0 3FFF
4K
HRPWM 1
0x01F0 4000
0x01F0 5FFF
0x01F0 6000
0x01F0 6FFF
4K
ECAP 0
0x01F0 7000
0x01F0 7FFF
4K
ECAP 1
0x01F0 8000
0x01F0 8FFF
4K
ECAP 2
0x01F0 9000
0x01F0 BFFF
0x01F0 C000
0x01F0 CFFF
4K
Timer2
0x01F0 D000
0x01F0 DFFF
4K
Timer3
0x01F0 E000
0x01F0 EFFF
4K
SPI1
0x01F0 F000
0x01F0 FFFF
0x01F1 0000
0x01F1 0FFF
4K
McBSP0 FIFO Data
0x01F1 1000
0x01F1 1FFF
4K
McBSP1 FIFO Data
0x01F1 2000
0x3FFF FFFF
0x4000 0000
0x5FFF FFFF
512M
EMIFA SDRAM data (CS0)
0x6000 0000
0x61FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA async data (CS2)
0x6200 0000
0x63FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA async data (CS3)
0x6400 0000
0x65FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA async data (CS4)
0x6600 0000
0x67FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA async data (CS5)
0x6800 0000
0x6800 7FFF
32K
EMIFA Control Regs
0x6800 8000
0x7FFF FFFF
0x8000 0000
0x8001 FFFF
128K
On-chip RAM
0x8002 0000
0xAFFF FFFF
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Memory Protection Unit 2 (MPU 2)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
13
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-2. AM1808 Top Level Memory Map (continued)
Start Address
End Address
Size
0xB000 0000
0xB000 7FFF
32K
DDR2 Control Regs
512M
DDR2 Data
0xB000 8000
0xBFFF FFFF
0xC000 0000
0xDFFF FFFF
0xE000 0000
0xFFFC FFFF
0xFFFD 0000
0xFFFD FFFF
ARM Mem Map
64K
ARM local
ROM
0xFFFE 0000
0xFFFE DFFF
0xFFFE E000
0xFFFE FFFF
8K
ARM Interrupt
Controller
0xFFFF 0000
0xFFFF 1FFF
8K
ARM local
RAM
0xFFFF 2000
0xFFFF FFFF
EDMA Mem Map
PRUSS Mem
Map
Master
Peripheral
Mem Map
LCDC
Mem
Map
ARM Local
RAM (PRU0
only)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.5
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Pin Assignments
Extensive use of pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in
the smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using a combination of hardware
configuration at device reset and software programmable register settings.
3.5.1
Pin Map (Bottom View)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
VP_DOUT[0]/
LCD_D[0]/
UPP_XD[8]/
GP7[8]/
PRU1_R31[8]
VP_DOUT[1]/
LCD_D[1]/
UPP_XD[9]/
GP7[9]/
PRU1_R31[9]
VP_DOUT[2]/
LCD_D[2]/
UPP_XD[10]/
GP7[10]/
PRU1_R31[10]
DDR_A[10]
DDR_A[6]
DDR_A[2]
DDR_CLKN
DDR_CLKP
DDR_RAS
DDR_D[15]
W
V
VP_DOUT[3]/
LCD_D[3]/
UPP_XD[11]/
GP7[11]/
PRU1_R31[11]
VP_DOUT[4]/
LCD_D[4]/
UPP_XD[12]/
GP7[12]/
PRU1_R31[12]
VP_DOUT[5]/
LCD_D[5]/
UPP_XD[13]/
GP7[13]/
PRU1_R31[13]
DDR_A[12]
DDR_A[5]
DDR_A[3]
DDR_CKE
DDR_BA[0]
DDR_CS
DDR_D[13]
V
U
VP_DOUT[6]/
LCD_D[6]/
UPP_XD[14]/
GP7[14]/
PRU1_R31[14]
VP_DOUT[7]/
LCD_D[7]/
UPP_XD[15]/
GP7[15]/
PRU1_R31[15]
VP_DOUT[8]/
LCD_D[8]/
UPP_XD[0]/
GP7[0]/
BOOT[0]
DDR_A[8]
DDR_A[4]
DDR_A[7]
DDR_A[0]
DDR_BA[2]
DDR_CAS
DDR_D[12]
U
T
VP_DOUT[9]/
LCD_D[9]/
UPP_XD[1]/
GP7[1]/
BOOT[1]
VP_DOUT[10]/
LCD_D[10]/
UPP_XD[2]/
GP7[2]/
BOOT[2]
VP_DOUT[11]/
LCD_D[11]/
UPP_XD[3]/
GP7[3]/
BOOT[3]
DDR_A[11]
DDR_A[13]
DDR_A[9]
DDR_A[1]
DDR_WE
DDR_BA[1]
DDR_D[10]
T
R
VP_DOUT[12]/
LCD_D[12]/
UPP_XD[4]/
GP7[4]/
BOOT[4]
VP_DOUT[13]/
LCD_D[13]/
UPP_XD[5]/
GP7[5]/
BOOT[5]
VP_DOUT[14]/
LCD_D[14]/
UPP_XD[6]/
GP7[6]/
BOOT[6]
DVDD3318_C
LCD_AC_ENB_CS/
GP6[0]/
PRU1_R31[28]
DDR_VREF
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DQM[1]
R
P
NC
NC
NC
VP_DOUT[15]/
LCD_D[15]/
UPP_XD[7]/
GP7[7]/
BOOT[7]
DVDD3318_C
DVDD3318_C
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
P
N
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
DDR_DVDD18
RVDD
CVDD
DDR_DVDD18
DDR_DVDD18
N
M
VSS
NC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
M
L
NC
NC
VSS
DVDD3318_C
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
L
K
VSS
VSS
VP_CLKOUT2/
MMCSD1_DAT[2]/
PRU1_R30[2]/
GP6[3]/
PRU1_R31[3]
VP_CLKOUT3/
PRU1_R30[0]/
GP6[1]/
PRU1_R31[1]
DVDD18
CVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NC
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The following graphics show the bottom view of the ZCE and ZWT packages pin assignments in four
quadrants (A, B, C, and D). The pin assignments for both packages are identical.
Figure 3-1. Pin Map (Quad A)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
15
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
ADVANCE INFORMATION
11
12
13
14
15
W
DDR_D[7]
DDR_D[6]
DDR_DQM[0]
VP_CLKIN0/
UHPI_HCS/
PRU1_R30[10]/
GP6[7]/
UPP_2xTXCLK
PRU0_R30[28]/
UHPI_HCNTL1/
UPP_CHA_START/
GP6[10]
V
DDR_DQS[1]
DDR_D[5]
DDR_D[4]
DDR_D[2]
U
DDR_D[14]
DDR_ZP
DDR_D[3]
DDR_D[1]
T
DDR_D[9]
DDR_D[11]
DDR_D[8]
DDR_DQS[0]
R
DDR_DQGATE0
DDR_DQGATE1
DVDD18
VP_DIN[5]/
UHPI_HD[13]/
UPP_D[13]/
PRU0_R31[27]
P
VSS
DVDD3318_C
DVDD18
N
VSS
VSS
M
VSS
L
K
VP_CLKIN1/
UHPI_HDS1/
PRU1_R30[9]/
GP6[6]/
PRU1_R31[16]
DDR_D[0]
16
17
18
19
VP_DIN[4]/
UHPI_HD[12]/
UPP_D[12]/
PRU0_R31[26]
VP_DIN[2]/
UHPI_HD[10]/
UPP_D[10]/
PRU0_R31[24]
VP_DIN[1]/
UHPI_HD[9]/
UPP_D[9]/
PRU0_R31[23]
VP_DIN[0]/
UHPI_HD[8]/
UPP_D[8]/
PRU1_R31[29]
VP_DIN[6]/
UHPI_HD[14]/
UPP_D[14]/
PRU0_R31[28]
VP_DIN[3]/
UHPI_HD[11]/
UPP_D[11]/
PRU0_R31[25]
VP_DIN[15]_
VSYNC/
UHPI_HD[7]/
UPP_D[7]/
PRU0_R30[15]/
PRU0_R31[15]
VP_DIN[14]_
HSYNC/
UHPI_HD[6]/
UPP_D[6]/
PRU0_R30[14]/
PRU0_R31[14]
VP_DIN[7]/
UHPI_HD[15]/
UPP_D[15]/
PRU0_R31[29]
VP_DIN[13]_
FIELD/
UHPI_HD[5]/
UPP_D[5]/
PRU0_R30[13]/
PRU0_R31[13]
PRU0_R30[29]/
PRU0_R30[27]/
UHPI_HCNTL0/
UHPI_HHWIL/
UPP_CHA_ENABLE/ UPP_CHA_CLOCK/
GP6[11]
GP6[9]
W
V
U
PRU0_R30[26]/
UHPI_HRW/
UPP_CHA_WAIT/
GP6[8]/
PRU1_R31[17]
VP_DIN[12]/
UHPI_HD[4]/
UPP_D[4]/
PRU0_R30[12]/
PRU0_R31[12]
RESETOUT/
UHPI_HAS/
PRU1_R30[14]/
GP6[15]
CLKOUT/
UHPI_HDS2/
PRU1_R30[13]/
GP6[14]
VP_DIN[9]/
UHPI_HD[1]/
UPP_D[1]/
PRU0_R30[9]/
PRU0_R31[9]
PRU0_R30[30] /
UHPI_HINT/
PRU1_R30[11]/
GP6[12]
PRU0_R30[31]/
UHPI_HRDY/
PRU1_R30[12]
GP6[13]
VP_DIN[11]/
UHPI_HD[3]/
UPP_D[3]/
PRU0_R30[11]/
PRU0_R31[11]
VP_DIN[10]/
UHPI_HD[2]/
UPP_D[2]/
PRU0_R30[10]/
PRU0_R31[10]
NC
NC
USB0_ID
NC
NC
P
DVDD3318_C
USB0_VDDA18
PLL1_VDDA
NC
USB0_VDDA12
USB0_VDDA33
USB0_VBUS
N
NC
DVDD3318_C
NC
PLL1_VSSA
TDI
PLL0_VSSA
USB0_DM
USB0_DP
M
VSS
CVDD
DVDD3318_C
PLL0_VDDA
TMS
TRST
OSCVSS
OSCIN
L
VSS
CVDD
DVDD3318_C
RESET
DVDD3318_B
EMU1
RTCK/
GP8[0]
USB0_DRVVBUS
OSCOUT
K
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
RTC_CVDD
VP_DIN[8]/
UHPI_HD[0]/
UPP_D[0]/
GP6[5]/
PRU1_R31[0]
RSV2
T
R
Figure 3-2. Pin Map (Quad B)
16
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
J
VSS
CVDD
DVDD18
DVDD3318_B
TCK
EMU0
RSVDN
TDO
RTC_XI
J
H
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
RVDD
VSS
SPI1_ENA/
GP2[12]
SPI1_SOMI/
GP2[11]
RTC_VSS
RTC_XO
H
G
DVDD18
DVDD18
CVDD
DVDD3318_A
DVDD3318_A
SPI1_SCS[7]/
I2C0_SCL/
TM64P2_OUT12/
GP1[15]
SPI1_SIMO/
GP2[10]
SPI1_SCS[6]/
I2C0_SDA/
TM64P3_OUT12/
GP1[4]
SPI1_CLK/
GP2[13]
G
F
DVDD3318_B
DVDD3318_B
DVDD3318_B
DVDD18
DVDD3318_A
SPI1_SCS[4]/
UART2_TXD/
I2C1_SDA/
GP1[2]
SPI1_SCS[5]/
UART2_RXD/
I2C1_SCL/
GP1[3]
SPI1_SCS[1]/
EPWM1A/
PRU0_R30[7]/
GP2[15]/
TM64P2_IN12
SPI1_SCS[2]/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[0]
F
EMA_A[18]/
MMCSD0_DAT[3]/
PRU1_R30[26]/
GP4[2]/
PRU1_R31[18]
EMA_A[16]/
MMCSD0_DAT[5]/
PRU1_R30[24]/
GP4[0]
EMA_A[6]/
GP5[6]
DVDD3318_B
CVDD
SPI0_SCS[1]/
TM64P0_OUT12/
GP1[7]/
TM64P0_IN12
SPI0_SCS[3]/
UART0_CTS/
GP8[2]
SPI1_SCS[3]/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[1]
SPI1_SCS[0]/
EPWM1B/
PRU0_R30[8]/
GP2[14]/
TM64P3_IN12
EMA_A[13]/
PRU0_R30[21]/
PRU1_R30[21]
GP5[13]
EMA_A[9]/
PRU1_R30[17]/
GP5[9]
EMA_A[12]/
PRU1_R30[20]/
GP5[12]
EMA_A[3]/
GP5[3]
EMA_A[1]/
GP5[1]
SPI0_SCS[2]/
UART0_RTS/
GP8[1]
SPI0_SCS[0]/
TM64P1_OUT12/
GP1[6]/
TM64P1_IN12
SPI0_SCS[4]/
UART0_TXD/
GP8[3]
SPI0_CLK/
EPWM0A/
GP1[8]
D
EMA_A[5]/
GP5[5]
EMA_A[0]/
GP5[0]
EMA_BA[0]/
GP2[8]
SPI0_SOMI/
EPWMSYNCI/
GP8[6]
SPI0_SIMO/
EPWMSYNCO/
GP8[5]
SPI0_SCS[5]/
UART0_RXD/
GP8[4]
C
E
D
SPI0_ENA/
EPWM0B/
PRU0_R30[6]
C
EMA_A[15]/
MMCSD0_DAT[6]/
PRU1_R30[23]/
GP5[15]
B
EMA_A[17]/
MMCSD0_DAT[4]/
PRU1_R30[25]
GP4[1]
EMA_A[11]/
PRU1_R30[19]/
GP5[11]
EMA_A7/
PRU1_R30[15]/
GP5[7]
EMA_A[2]/
GP5[2]
EMA_OE/
GP3[10]
EMA_CS[5]/
GP3[12]
EMA_CS[2]/
GP3[15]
EMA_WAIT[0]/
PRU0_R30[0]/
GP3[8]/
PRU0_R31[0]
EMA_WAIT[1]/
PRU0_R30[1]/
GP2[1]/
PRU0_R31[1]
EMA_A[20]/
MMCSD0_DAT[1]/
PRU1_R30[28]/
GP4[4]/
PRU1_R31[20]
EMA_A[14]/
MMCSD0_DAT[7]/
PRU1_R30[22]/
GP5[14]
EMA_A[8]/
PRU1_R30[16]/
GP5[8]
EMA_A[4]/
GP5[4]
EMA_BA[1]/
GP2[9]
EMA_RAS/
PRU0_R30[3]/
GP2[5]/
PRU0_R31[3]
EMA_CS[3]/
GP3[14]
EMA_CS[0]/
GP2[0]
VSS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A
EMA_A[10]/
PRU1_R30[18]/
GP5[10]
ADVANCE INFORMATION
www.ti.com
E
B
A
Figure 3-3. Pin Map (Quad C)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
17
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
1
2
J
NC
NC
H
VSS
VSS
PRU0_R30[25]/
MMCSD1_DAT[0]/
UPP_CHB_CLOCK/
GP8[15]/
PRU1_R31[27]
PRU0_R30[24]/
MMCSD1_CLK/
UPP_CHB_START/
GP8[14]/
PRU1_R31[26]
MMCSD1_DAT[7]/
LCD_PCLK/
PRU1_R30[7]/
GP8[11]
MMCSD1_DAT[6]/
LCD_MCLK/
PRU1_R30[6]/
GP8[10]/
PRU1_R31[7]
E
AXR1/
DX0/
GP1[9]
AXR2/
DR0/
GP1[10]
D
AXR4/
FSR0/
GP1[12]
G
F
ADVANCE INFORMATION
C
B
A
AXR6/
CLKR0/
GP1[14]/
PRU0_R31[6]
ACLKX/
PRU0_R30[19]/
GP0[14]/
PRU0_R31[21]
AXR7/
EPWM1TZ[0]/
PRU0_R30[17]
GP1[15]/
PRU0_R31[7]
AFSR/
GP0[13]/
PRU0_R31[20]
AFSX/
GP0[12]/
PRU0_R31[19]
ACLKR/
PRU0_R30[20]/
GP0[15]/
PRU0_R31[22]
AHCLKR/
PRU0_R30[18]/
UART1_RTS/
GP0[11]/
PRU0_R31[18]
1
2
www.ti.com
3
4
VP_CLKIN3/
MMCSD1_DAT[1]/
PRU1_R30[1]/
GP6[2]/
PRU1_R31[2]
PRU0_R30[23]/
MMCSD1_CMD/
UPP_CHB_ENABLE/
GP8[13]/
PRU1_R31[25]
VP_CLKIN2/
MMCSD1_DAT[3]/
PRU1_R30[3]/
GP6[4]/
PRU1_R31[4]
MMCSD1_DAT[5]/
LCD_HSYNC/
PRU1_R30[5]/
GP8[9]/
PRU1_R31[6]
PRU0_R30[22]/
PRU1_R30[8]/
UPP_CHB_WAIT/
GP8[12]/
PRU1_R31[24]
MMCSD1_DAT[4]/
LCD_VSYNC/
PRU1_R30[4]/
GP8[8]/
PRU1_R31[5]
5
6
7
8
9
10
DVDD3318_C
CVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
J
DVDD3318_A
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
VSS
CVDD
H
DVDD3318_A
DVDD18
CVDD
CVDD
DVDD3318_B
DVDD18
G
EMA_CS[4]/
GP3[13]
DVDD3318_B
F
EMA_D[8]/
GP3[0]
E
AXR0/
ECAP0_APWM0/
GP8[7]/
CLKS0
RTC_ALARM/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[8]/
DEEPSLEEP
DVDD3318_A
DVDD3318_B
DVDD3318_B
DVDD3318_B
AXR3/
FSX0/
GP1[11]
AXR8/
CLKS1/
ECAP1_APWM1/
GP0[0]/
PRU0_R31[8]
RVDD
EMA_D[15]/
GP3[7]
EMA_D[5]/
GP4[13]
EMA_D[3]/
GP4[11]
EMA_D[11]/
GP3[3]
EMA_D[7]/
GP4[15]
EMA_SDCKE/
PRU0_R30[4]/
GP2[6]/
PRU0_R31[4]
EMA_D[9]/
GP3[1]
AXR5/
CLKX0/
GP1[13]
EMA_A[23]/
MMCSD0_CLK/
PRU1_R30[31]/
GP4[7]/
PRU1_R31[23]
AXR10/
DR1/
GP0[2]
AMUTE/
PRU0_R30[16]/
UART2_RTS/
GP0[9]/
PRU0_R31[16]
AXR9/
DX1/
GP0[1]
AXR12/
FSR1/
GP0[4]
AXR11/
FSX1/
GP0[3]
EMA_D[6]/
GP4[14]
EMA_D[14]/
GP3[6]
EMA_WEN_DQM[0]/
GP2[3]
EMA_D[0]/
GP4[8]
AXR13/
CLKX1/
GP0[5]
AXR14/
CLKR1/
GP0[6]
EMA_D[4]/
GP4[12]
EMA_D[13]/
GP3[5]
EMA_CLK/
PRU0_R30[5]/
GP2[7]/
PRU0_R31[5]
EMA_D[2]/
GP4[10]
EMA_WE/
GP3[11]
AHCLKX/
USB_REFCLKIN/
UART1_CTS/
GP0[10]/
PRU0_R31[17]
AXR15/
EPWM0TZ[0]/
ECAP2_APWM2/
GP0[7]
EMA_WEN_DQM[1]/
GP2[2]
EMA_D[12]/
GP3[4]
EMA_D[10]/
GP3[2]
EMA_D[1]/
GP4[9]
EMA_CAS/
PRU0_R30[2]/
GP2[4]/
PRU0_R31[2]
EMA_A[22]/
MMCSD0_CMD/
PRU1_R30[30]/
GP4[6]/
PRU1_R31[22]
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EMA_A_RW/
GP3[9]
EMA_A[19]/
MMCSD0_DAT[2]/
PRU1_R30[27]/
GP4[3]/
PRU1_R31[19]
EMA_A[21]/
MMCSD0_DAT[0]/
PRU1_R30[29]/
GP4[5]/
PRU1_R31[21]
D
C
B
A
Figure 3-4. Pin Map (Quad D)
3.6
Pin Multiplexing Control
Device level pin multiplexing is controlled by registers PINMUX0 - PINMUX19 in the SYSCFG module.
For the device family, pin multiplexing can be controlled on a pin-by-pin basis. Each pin that is multiplexed
with several different functions has a corresponding 4-bit field in one of the PINMUX registers.
Pin multiplexing selects which of several peripheral pin functions controls the pin's IO buffer output data
and output enable values only. The default pin multiplexing control for almost every pin is to select 'none'
of the peripheral functions in which case the pin's IO buffer is held tri-stated.
Note that the input from each pin is always routed to all of the peripherals that share the pin; the PINMUX
registers have no effect on input from a pin.
18
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Terminal Functions
Table 3-3 to Table 3-27 identify the external signal names, the associated pin/ball numbers along with the
mechanical package designator, the pin type (I, O, IO, OZ, or PWR), whether the pin/ball has any internal
pullup/pulldown resistors, whether the pin/ball is configurable as an IO in GPIO mode, and a functional pin
description.
3.7.1
Device Reset and JTAG
Table 3-3. Reset and JTAG Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
RESET
RESET
K14
I
RESETOUT / UHPI_HAS / PRU1_R30[14] /
GP6[15]
T17
O
(4)
IPU
B
Device reset input
CP[21]
C
Reset output
TMS
L16
I
TDI
M16
I
IPU
B
JTAG test mode select
IPU
B
TDO
J18
JTAG test data input
O
IPU
B
JTAG test data output
TCK
TRST
J15
I
IPU
B
JTAG test clock
L17
I
IPD
B
EMU0
JTAG test reset
J16
I/O
IPU
B
Emulation pin
K16
I/O
IPU
B
Emulation pin
K17
I/O
IPD
B
JTAG Test Clock Return Clock Output
EMU1
RTCK/ GP8[0]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(5)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: For multiplexed pins where functions have different types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for
that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor, IPU = Internal Pullup resistor. CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Open drain mode for RESETOUT function.
GP8[0] is initially configured as a reserved function after reset and will not be in a predictable state. This signal will only be stable after
the GPIO configuration for this pin has been completed. Users should carefully consider the system implications of this pin being in an
unknown state after reset.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
19
ADVANCE INFORMATION
JTAG
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.2
www.ti.com
High-Frequency Oscillator and PLL
Table 3-4. High-Frequency Oscillator and PLL Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
CP[22]
C
DESCRIPTION
CLKOUT / UHPI_HDS2 /
PRU1_R30[13] / GP6[14]
T18
O
OSCIN
L19
I
—
—
Oscillator input
OSCOUT
K19
O
—
—
Oscillator output
OSCVSS
L18
GND
—
—
Oscillator ground (for filter only)
—
—
PLL analog VDD (1.2-V filtered supply)
—
—
PLL analog VSS (for filter)
PLL Observation Clock
1.2-V OSCILLATOR
1.2-V PLL0
PLL0_VDDA
L15
PWR
PLL0_VSSA
M17
GND
1.2-V PLL1
PLL1_VDDA
N15
PWR
—
—
PLL analog VDD (1.2-V filtered supply)
PLL1_VSSA
M15
GND
—
—
PLL analog VSS (for filter)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
(2)
(3)
20
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: For multiplexed pins where functions have different types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for
that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.3
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Real-Time Clock and 32-kHz Oscillator
Table 3-5. Real-Time Clock (RTC) and 1.2-V, 32-kHz Oscillator Terminal Functions
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
RTC_XI
J19
I
—
—
RTC 32-kHz oscillator input
RTC_XO
H19
O
—
—
RTC 32-kHz oscillator output
RTC_ALARM / UART2_CTS / GP0[8] / DEEPSLEEP
F4
O
CP[0]
A
RTC Alarm
RTC_CVDD
L14
PWR
—
—
RTC module core power
(isolated from chip CVDD)
RTC_Vss
H18
GND
—
—
Oscillator ground (for filter)
(1)
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: For multiplexed pins where functions have different types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for
that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
3.7.4
DEEPSLEEP Power Control
Table 3-6. DEEPSLEEP Power Control Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
RTC_ALARM / UART2_CTS / GP0[8] / DEEPSLEEP
(1)
(2)
(3)
NO.
F4
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
I
CP[0]
A
DESCRIPTION
DEEPSLEEP power control output
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: For multiplexed pins where functions have different types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for
that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
21
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.5
www.ti.com
External Memory Interface A (EMIFA)
Table 3-7. External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_D[15] / GP3[7]
E6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[14] / GP3[6]
C7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[13] / GP3[5]
B6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[12] / GP3[4]
A6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[11] / GP3[3]
D6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[10] / GP3[2]
A7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[9] / GP3[1]
D9
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[8] / GP3[0]
E10
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[7] / GP4[15]
D7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[6] / GP4[14]
C6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[5] / GP4[13]
E7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[4] / GP4[12]
B5
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[3] / GP4[11]
E8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[2] / GP4[10]
B8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[1] / GP4[9]
A8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[0] / GP4[8]
C9
I/O
CP[17]
B
(1)
(2)
(3)
22
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA data bus
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-7. External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
A10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[21] / MMCSD0_DAT[0] /
PRU1_R30[29] / GP4[5] / PRU1_R31[21]
B10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[20] / MMCSD0_DAT[1] /
PRU1_R30[28] / GP4[4] / PRU1_R31[20]
A11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[19] / MMCSD0_DAT[2] /
PRU1_R30[27] / GP4[3] / PRU1_R31[19]
C10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[18] / MMCSD0_DAT[3] /
PRU1_R30[26] / GP4[2] / PRU1_R31[18]
E11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[17] / MMCSD0_DAT[4] /
PRU1_R30[25] / GP4[1]
B11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[16] / MMCSD0_DAT[5] /
PRU1_R30[24] / GP4[0]
E12
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[15] / MMCSD0_DAT[6] /
PRU1_R30[23] / GP5[15]
C11
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[14] / MMCSD0_DAT[7] /
PRU1_R30[22] / GP5[14]
A12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[13] /PRU0_R30[21] / PRU1_R30[21]
/ GP5[13]
D11
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[12] / PRU1_R30[20] / GP5[12]
D13
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[11] / PRU1_R30[19] / GP5[11]
B12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[10] / PRU1_R30[18] / GP5[10]
C12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[9] / PRU1_R30[17] / GP5[9]
D12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[8] / PRU1_R30[16] / GP5[8]
A13
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[7] / PRU1_R30[15] / GP5[7]
B13
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[6] / GP5[6]
E13
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[5] / GP5[5]
C13
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[4] / GP5[4]
A14
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[3] / GP5[3]
D14
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[2] / GP5[2]
B14
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[1] / GP5[1]
D15
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[0] / GP5[0]
C14
O
CP[20]
B
EMA_BA[0] / GP2[8]
C15
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_BA[1] / GP2[9]
A15
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CLK / PRU0_R30[5] / GP2[7] /
PRU0_R31[5]
B7
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA clock
EMA_SDCKE / PRU0_R30[4] / GP2[6] /
PRU0_R31[4]
D8
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA SDRAM clock enable
EMA_RAS / PRU0_R30[3] / GP2[5] /
PRU0_R31[3]
A16
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA SDRAM row address strobe
EMA_CAS / PRU0_R30[2] / GP2[4] /
PRU0_R31[2]
A9
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA SDRAM column address strobe
EMA_CS[0] / GP2[0]
A18
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA SDRAM Chip Select
EMA_CS[2] / GP3[15]
B17
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[3] / GP3[14]
A17
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[4] / GP3[13]
F9
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[5] / GP3[12]
B16
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_A_RW / GP3[9]
D10
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA Async Read/Write control
B9
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA SDRAM write enable
EMA_WE / GP3[11]
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_A[22] / MMCSD0_CMD /
PRU1_R30[30] / GP4[6] / PRU1_R31[22]
EMIFA address bus
EMIFA bank address
EMIFA Async Chip Select
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
23
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-7. External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
A5
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA write enable/data mask for
EMA_D[15:8]
EMA_WEN_DQM[0] / GP2[3]
C8
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA write enable/data mask for EMA_D[7:0]
EMA_OE / GP3[10]
B15
O
CP[16]
B
EMIFA output enable
EMA_WAIT[0] / PRU0_R30[0] / GP3[8] /
PRU0_R31[0]
B18
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[1] / PRU0_R30[1] / GP2[1] /
PRU0_R31[1]
B19
I
CP[16]
B
NAME
EMA_WEN_DQM[1] / GP2[2]
NO.
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA wait input/interrupt
ADVANCE INFORMATION
24
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.6
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
DDR2 Controller (DDR2)
Table 3-8. DDR2 Controller (DDR2) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
DESCRIPTION
DDR_D[15]
W10
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[14]
U11
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[13]
V10
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[12]
U10
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[11]
T12
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[10]
T10
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[9]
T11
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[8]
T13
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[7]
W11
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[6]
W12
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[5]
V12
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[4]
V13
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[3]
U13
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[2]
V14
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[1]
U14
I/O
IPD
DDR_D[0]
U15
I/O
IPD
DDR_A[13]
T5
O
IPD
DDR_A[12]
V4
O
IPD
DDR_A[11]
T4
O
IPD
DDR_A[10]
W4
O
IPD
DDR_A[9]
T6
O
IPD
DDR_A[8]
U4
O
IPD
DDR_A[7]
U6
O
IPD
DDR_A[6]
W5
O
IPD
DDR_A[5]
V5
O
IPD
DDR_A[4]
U5
O
IPD
DDR_A[3]
V6
O
IPD
DDR_A[2]
W6
O
IPD
DDR_A[1]
T7
O
IPD
DDR_A[0]
U7
O
IPD
DDR_CLKP
W8
O
IPD
DDR2 clock (positive)
DDR_CLKN
W7
O
IPD
DDR2 clock (negative)
DDR_CKE
V7
O
IPD
DDR2 clock enable
DDR_WE
T8
O
IPD
DDR2 write enable
DDR_RAS
W9
O
IPD
DDR2 row address strobe
DDR_CAS
U9
O
IPD
DDR2 column address strobe
DDR_CS
V9
O
IPD
DDR2 chip select
DDR_DQM[0]
W13
O
IPD
DDR_DQM[1]
R10
O
IPD
(1)
(2)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DDR2 SDRAM data bus
DDR2 row/column address
DDR2 data mask outputs
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
25
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-8. DDR2 Controller (DDR2) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DDR_DQS[0]
T14
I/O
IPD
DDR_DQS[1]
V11
I/O
IPD
DDR_BA[2]
U8
O
IPD
DDR_BA[1]
T9
O
IPD
DDR_BA[0]
V8
O
IPD
DDR_DQGATE0
R11
O
IPD
DDR2 loopback signal for external DQS gating.
Route to DDR and back to DDR_DQGATE1 with
same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.
DDR_DQGATE1
R12
I
IPD
DDR2 loopback signal for external DQS gating.
Route to DDR and back to DDR_DQGATE0 with
same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.
DDR_ZP
U12
O
—
DDR2 reference output for drive strength calibration
of N and P channel outputs. Tie to ground via 50
ohm resistor @ 0.5% tolerance.
DDR_VREF
R6
I
—
DDR voltage input for the DDR2/mDDR I/O buffers.
Note even in the case of mDDR an external resistor
divider connected to this pin is necessary.
N10, P10, N9,
P9, R9, P8,
R8, P7, R7,
N6
PWR
—
DDR PHY 1.8V power supply pins
DDR_DVDD18
26
Device Overview
DDR2 data strobe inputs/outputs
DDR2 SDRAM bank address
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.7
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Serial Peripheral Interface Modules (SPI)
Table 3-9. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
CP[7]
A
SPI0 clock
SPI0 enable
DESCRIPTION
SPI0
SPI0_CLK / EPWM0A / GP1[8]
D19
I/O
SPI0_ENA / EPWM0B / PRU0_R30[6]
C17
I/O
CP[7]
A
SPI0_SCS[0] / TM64P1_OUT12 / GP1[6] / TM64P1_IN12
D17
I/O
CP[10]
A
SPI0_SCS[1] / TM64P0_OUT12 / GP1[7] / TM64P0_IN12
E16
I/O
CP[10]
A
SPI0_SCS[2] / UART0_RTS / GP8[1]
D16
I/O
CP[9]
A
SPI0_SCS[3] / UART0_CTS / GP8[2]
E17
I/O
CP[9]
A
SPI0_SCS[4] / UART0_TXD / GP8[3]
D18
I/O
CP[8]
A
SPI0_SCS[5] / UART0_RXD / GP8[4]
C19
I/O
CP[8]
A
SPI0_SIMO / EPWMSYNCO / GP8[5]
C18
I/O/Z
CP[7]
A
SPI0 data
slave-in-master-out
SPI0_SOMI / EPWMSYNCI / GP8[6]
C16
I/O/Z
CP[7]
A
SPI0 data
slave-out-master-in
SPI1
SPI1_CLK / GP2[13]
G19
I/O
CP[15]
A
SPI1 clock
SPI1_ENA / GP2[12]
H16
I/O
CP[15]
A
SPI1 enable
SPI1_SCS[0] / EPWM1B / PRU0_R30[8] / GP2[14] / TM64P3_IN12
E19
I/O
CP[14]
A
SPI1_SCS[1] / EPWM1A / PRU0_R30[7] / GP2[15] / TM64P2_IN12
F18
I/O
CP[14]
A
SPI1_SCS[2] / UART1_TXD / GP1[0]
F19
I/O
CP[13]
A
SPI1_SCS[3] / UART1_RXD / GP1[1]
E18
I/O
CP[13]
A
SPI1_SCS[4] / UART2_TXD / I2C1_SDA /GP1[2]
F16
I/O
CP[12]
A
SPI1_SCS[5] / UART2_RXD / I2C1_SCL /GP1[3]
F17
I/O
CP[12]
A
SPI1_SCS[6] / I2C0_SDA / TM64P3_OUT12 / GP1[4]
G18
I/O
CP[11]
A
SPI1_SCS[7] / I2C0_SCL / TM64P2_OUT12 / GP1[5]
G16
I/O
CP[11]
A
SPI1_SIMO / GP2[10]
G17
I/O/Z
CP[15]
A
SPI1 data
slave-in-master-out
SPI1_SOMI / GP2[11]
H17
I/O/Z
CP[15]
A
SPI1 data
slave-out-master-in
(1)
(2)
(3)
SPI1 chip selects
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
27
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SPI0 chip selects
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.8
www.ti.com
Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU)
Table 3-10. Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
PRU0 Output Signals
(1)
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
28
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-10. Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) Terminal Functions (continued)
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
PRU0_R30[31] / UHPI_HRDY / PRU1_R30[12] / GP6[13]
R17
O
CP[23]
C
PRU0_R30[30] / UHPI_HINT / PRU1_R30[11] / GP6[12]
R16
O
CP[23]
C
PRU0_R30[29] / UHPI_HCNTL0 / UPP_CHA_CLOCK / GP6[11]
U17
O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[28] / UHPI_HCNTL1 / UPP_CHA_START / GP6[10]
W15
O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[27] / UHPI_HHWIL / UPP_CHA_ENABLE / GP6[9]
U16
O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[26] / UHPI_HRW / UPP_CHA_WAIT / GP6[8] /
PRU1_R31[17]
T15
O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[25] / MMCSD1_DAT[0] / UPP_CHB_CLOCK / GP8[15] /
PRU1_R31[27]
G1
O
CP30]
C
PRU0_R30[24] / MMCSD1_CLK / UPP_CHB_START / GP8[14] /
PRU1_R31[26]
G2
O
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[23] / MMCSD1_CMD / UPP_CHB_ENABLE / GP8[13] /
PRU1_R31[25]
J4
O
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[22] / PRU1_R30[8] / UPP_CHB_WAIT / GP8[12] /
PRU1_R31[24]
G3
O
CP[30]
C
EMA_A[13] / PRU0_R30[21] / PRU1_R30[21] / GP5[13]
D11
O
CP[19]
B
ACLKR / PRU0_R30[20] / GP0[15] / PRU0_R31[22]
A1
O
CP[0]
A
ACLKX / PRU0_R30[19] / GP0[14] / PRU0_R31[21]
B1
O
CP[0]
A
AHCLKR / PRU0_R30[18] / UART1_RTS / GP0[11] / PRU0_R31[18]
A2
O
CP[0]
A
AXR7 / EPWM1TZ[0] / PRU0_R30[17] / GP1[15] / PRU0_R31[7]
D2
O
CP[4]
A
AMUTE / PRU0_R30[16] / UART2_RTS / GP0[9] / PRU0_R31[16]
D5
O
CP[0]
A
VP_DIN[15]_VSYNC / UHPI_HD[7] / UPP_D[7] / PRU0_R30[15] /
PRU0_R31[15]
V18
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[14]_HSYNC / UHPI_HD[6] / UPP_D[6] / PRU0_R30[14] /
PRU0_R31[14]
V19
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[13]_FIELD / UHPI_HD[5] / UPP_D[5] / PRU0_R30[13] /
PRU0_R31[13]
U19
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[12] / UHPI_HD[4] / UPP_D[4] / PRU0_R30[12] /
PRU0_R31[12]
T16
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[11] / UHPI_HD[3] / UPP_D[3] / PRU0_R30[11] /
PRU0_R31[11]
R18
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[10] / UHPI_HD[2] / UPP_D[2] / PRU0_R30[10] /
PRU0_R31[10]
R19
O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[9] / UHPI_HD[1] / UPP_D[1] / PRU0_R30[9] / PRU0_R31[9] R15
O
CP[27]
C
SPI1_SCS[0] / EPWM1B / PRU0_R30[8] / GP2[14] / TM64P3_IN12
E19
O
CP[14]
A
SPI1_SCS[1] / EPWM1A / PRU0_R30[7] / GP2[15] / TM64P2_IN12
F18
O
CP[14]
A
SPI0_ENA / EPWM0B / PRU0_R30[6]
C17
O
CP[7]
A
EMA_CLK / PRU0_R30[5] / GP2[7] / PRU0_R31[5]
B7
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_SDCKE / PRU0_R30[4] / GP2[6] / PRU0_R31[4]
D8
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_RAS / PRU0_R30[3] / GP2[5] / PRU0_R31[3]
A16
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CAS / PRU0_R30[2] / GP2[4] / PRU0_R31[2]
A9
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[1] / PRU0_R30[1] / GP2[1] / PRU0_R31[1]
B19
O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[0] / PRU0_R30[0] / GP3[8] / PRU0_R31[0]
B18
O
CP[16]
B
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
PRU0 Output Signals
PRU0 Input Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
29
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-10. Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VP_DIN[7] / UHPI_HD[15] / UPP_D[15] / PRU0_R31[29]
U18
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[6] / UHPI_HD[14] / UPP_D[14] / PRU0_R31[28]
V16
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[5] / UHPI_HD[13] / UPP_D[13] / PRU0_R31[27]
R14
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[4] / UHPI_HD[12] / UPP_D[12] / PRU0_R31[26]
W16
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[3] / UHPI_HD[11] / UPP_D[11] / PRU0_R31[25]
V17
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[2] / UHPI_HD[10] / UPP_D[10] / PRU0_R31[24]
W17
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[1] / UHPI_HD[9] / UPP_D[9] / PRU0_R31[23]
W18
I
CP[26]
C
ACLKR / PRU0_R30[20] / GP0[15] / PRU0_R31[22]
A1
I
CP[0]
A
ACLKX / PRU0_R30[19] / GP0[14] / PRU0_R31[21]
B1
I
CP[0]
A
AFSR / GP0[13] / PRU0_R31[20]
C2
I
CP[0]
A
AFSX / GP0[12] / PRU0_R31[19]
B2
I
CP[0]
A
AHCLKR / PRU0_R30[18] / UART1_RTS / GP0[11] / PRU0_R31[18]
A2
I
CP[0]
A
AHCLKX / USB_REFCLKIN / UART1_CTS / GP0[10] /
PRU0_R31[17]
A3
I
CP[0]
A
AMUTE / PRU0_R30[16] / UART2_RTS / GP0[9] / PRU0_R31[16]
D5
I
CP[0]
A
VP_DIN[15]_VSYNC / UHPI_HD[7] / UPP_D[7] / PRU0_R30[15] /
PRU0_R31[15]
V18
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[14]_HSYNC / UHPI_HD[6] / UPP_D[6] / PRU0_R30[14] /
PRU0_R31[14]
V19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[13]_FIELD / UHPI_HD[5] / UPP_D[5] / PRU0_R30[13] /
PRU0_R31[13]
U19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[12] / UHPI_HD[4] / UPP_D[4] / PRU0_R30[12] /
PRU0_R31[12]
T16
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[11] / UHPI_HD[3] / UPP_D[3] / PRU0_R30[11] /
PRU0_R31[11]
R18
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[10] / UHPI_HD[2] / UPP_D[2] / PRU0_R30[10] /
PRU0_R31[10]
R19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[9] / UHPI_HD[1] / UPP_D[1] / PRU0_R30[9] / PRU0_R31[9] R15
I
CP[27]
C
AXR8 / CLKS1 / ECAP1_APWM1 / GP0[0] / PRU0_R31[8]
E4
I
CP[3]
A
AXR7 / EPWM1TZ[0] / PRU0_R30[17] / GP1[15] / PRU0_R31[7]
D2
I
CP[4]
A
AXR6 / CLKR0 / GP1[14] / PRU0_R31[6]
C1
I
CP[5]
A
EMA_CLK / PRU0_R30[5] / GP2[7] / PRU0_R31[5]
B7
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_SDCKE / PRU0_R30[4] / GP2[6] / PRU0_R31[4]
D8
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_RAS / PRU0_R30[3] / GP2[5] / PRU0_R31[3]
A16
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_CAS / PRU0_R30[2] / GP2[4] / PRU0_R31[2]
A9
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[1] / PRU0_R30[1] / GP2[1] / PRU0_R31[1]
B19
I
CP[16]
B
B18
I
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[0] / PRU0_R30[0] / GP3[8] / PRU0_R31[0]
DESCRIPTION
PRU0 Input Signals
PRU1 Output Signals
30
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-10. Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) Terminal Functions (continued)
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
MMCSD0_CLK / PRU1_R30[31] /GP4[7] / PRU1_R31[23]
E9
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[22] / MMCSD0_CMD / PRU1_R30[30] / GP4[6] /
PRU1_R31[22]
A10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[21] / MMCSD0_DAT[0] / PRU1_R30[29] / GP4[5] /
PRU1_R31[21]
B10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[20] / MMCSD0_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[28] / GP4[4] /
PRU1_R31[20]
A11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[19] / MMCSD0_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[27] / GP4[3] /
PRU1_R31[19]
C10
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[18] / MMCSD0_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[26] / GP4[2] /
PRU1_R31[18]
E11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[17] / MMCSD0_DAT[4] / PRU1_R30[25] / GP4[1]
B11
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[16] / MMCSD0_DAT[5] / PRU1_R30[24] / GP4[0]
E12
O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[15] / MMCSD0_DAT[6] / PRU1_R30[23] / GP5[15]
C11
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[14] / MMCSD0_DAT[7] / PRU1_R30[22] / GP5[14]
A12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[13] / PRU0_R30[21] / PRU1_R30[21] / GP5[13]
D11
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[12] / PRU1_R30[20] / GP5[12]
D13
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[11] / PRU1_R30[19] / GP5[11]
B12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[10] / PRU1_R30[18] / GP5[10]
C12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[9] / PRU1_R30[17] / GP5[9]
D12
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[8] / PRU1_R30[16] / GP5[8]
A13
O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[7] / PRU1_R30[15] / GP5[7]
B13
O
CP[20]
B
RESETOUT / UHPI_HAS / PRU1_R30[14] / GP6[15]
T17
O
CP[21]
C
CLKOUT / UHPI_HDS2 / PRU1_R30[13] / GP6[14]
T18
O
CP[22]
C
PRU0_R30[31] / UHPI_HRDY / PRU1_R30[12] / GP6[13]
R17
O
CP[23]
C
PRU0_R30[30] / UHPI_HINT / PRU1_R30[11] / GP6[12]
R16
O
CP[23]
C
VP_CLKIN0 / UHPI_HCS / PRU1_R30[10] / GP6[7] /
UPP_2xTXCLK
W14
O
CP[25]
C
VP_CLKIN1 / UHPI_HDS1 / PRU1_R30[9] / GP6[6] / PRU1_R31[16] V15
O
CP[25]
C
PRU0_R30[22] / PRU1_R30[8] / UPP_CHB_WAIT / GP8[12] /
PRU1_R31[24]
G3
O
CP[30]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[7] / LCD_PCLK / PRU1_R30[7] / GP8[11]
F1
O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[6] / LCD_MCLK / PRU1_R30[6] / GP8[10] /
PRU1_R31[7]
F2
O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[5] / LCD_HSYNC / PRU1_R30[5] / GP8[9] /
PRU1_R31[6]
H4
O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[4] / LCD_VSYNC / PRU1_R30[4] / GP8[8] /
PRU1_R31[5]
G4
O
CP[31]
C
VP_CLKIN2 / MMCSD1_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[3] / GP6[4] /
PRU1_R31[4]
H3
O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT2 / MMCSD1_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[2] / GP6[3] /
PRU1_R31[3]
K3
O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKIN3 / MMCSD1_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[1] / GP6[2] /
PRU1_R31[2]
J3
O
CP[30]
C
K4
O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT3 / PRU1_R30[0] / GP6[1] / PRU1_R31[1]
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
PRU1 Output Signals
PRU1 Input Signals
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
31
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-10. Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
VP_DIN[0] / UHPI_HD[8] / UPP_D[8] / PRU1_R31[29]
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
W19
I
CP[26]
C
LCD_AC_ENB_CS / GP6[0] / PRU1_R31[28]
R5
I
CP[31]
C
PRU0_R30[25] / MMCSD1_DAT[0] / UPP_CHB_CLOCK / GP8[15] /
PRU1_R31[27]
G1
I
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[24] / MMCSD1_CLK / UPP_CHB_START / GP8[14] /
PRU1_R31[26]
G2
I
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[23] / MMCSD1_CMD / UPP_CHB_ENABLE / GP8[13] /
PRU1_R31[25]
J4
I
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[22] / PRU1_R30[8] / UPP_CHB_WAIT / GP8[12] /
PRU1_R31[24]
G3
I
CP[30]
C
MMCSD0_CLK / PRU1_R30[31] /GP4[7] / PRU1_R31[23]
E9
I
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[22] / MMCSD0_CMD / PRU1_R30[30] / GP4[6] /
PRU1_R31[22]
A10
I
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[21] / MMCSD0_DAT[0] / PRU1_R30[29] / GP4[5] /
PRU1_R31[21]
B10
I
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[20] / MMCSD0_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[28] / GP4[4] /
PRU1_R31[20]
A11
I
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[19] / MMCSD0_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[27] / GP4[3] /
PRU1_R31[19]
C10
I
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[18] / MMCSD0_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[26] / GP4[2] /
PRU1_R31[18]
E11
I
CP[18]
B
PRU0_R30[26] / UHPI_HRW / UPP_CHA_WAIT / GP6[8] /
PRU1_R31[17]
T15
I
CP[24]
C
VP_CLKIN1 / UHPI_HDS1 / PRU1_R30[9] / GP6[6] / PRU1_R31[16] V15
I
CP[25]
C
VP_DOUT[7] / LCD_D[7] / UPP_XD[15] / GP7[15] / PRU1_R31[15]
U2
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[6] / LCD_D[6] / UPP_XD[14] / GP7[14] / PRU1_R31[14]
U1
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[5] / LCD_D[5] / UPP_XD[13] / GP7[13] / PRU1_R31[13]
V3
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[4] / LCD_D[4] / UPP_XD[12] / GP7[12] / PRU1_R31[12]
V2
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[3] / LCD_D[3] / UPP_XD[11] / GP7[11] / PRU1_R31[11]
V1
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[2] / LCD_D[2] / UPP_XD[10] / GP7[10] / PRU1_R31[10]
W3
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[1] / LCD_D[1] / UPP_XD[9] / GP7[9] / PRU1_R31[9]
W2
I
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[0] / LCD_D[0] / UPP_XD[8] / GP7[8] / PRU1_R31[8]
W1
I
CP[28]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[6] / LCD_MCLK / PRU1_R30[6] / GP8[10] /
PRU1_R31[7]
F2
I
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[5] / LCD_HSYNC / PRU1_R30[5] / GP8[9] /
PRU1_R31[6]
H4
I
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[4] / LCD_VSYNC / PRU1_R30[4] / GP8[8] /
PRU1_R31[5]
G4
I
CP[31]
C
VP_CLKIN2 / MMCSD1_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[3] / GP6[4] /
PRU1_R31[4]
H3
I
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT2 / MMCSD1_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[2] / GP6[3] /
PRU1_R31[3]
K3
I
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKIN3 / MMCSD1_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[1] / GP6[2] /
PRU1_R31[2]
J3
I
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT3 / PRU1_R30[0] / GP6[1] / PRU1_R31[1]
K4
I
CP[30]
C
VP_DIN[8] / UHPI_HD[0] / UPP_D[0] / GP6[5] / PRU1_R31[0]
P17
I
CP[27]
C
32
Device Overview
DESCRIPTION
PRU1 Input Signals
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.9
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Enhanced Capture/Auxiliary PWM Modules (eCAP0)
The eCAP Module pins function as either input captures or auxiliary PWM 32-bit outputs, depending upon
how the eCAP module is programmed.
Table 3-11. Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
CP[6]
A
enhanced capture 0 input or
auxiliary PWM 0 output
CP[3]
A
enhanced capture 1 input or
auxiliary PWM 1 output
CP[1]
A
enhanced capture 2 input or
auxiliary PWM 2 output
DESCRIPTION
eCAP0
AXR0 / ECAP0_APWM0 / GP8[7] / CLKS0
F3
I/O
eCAP1
AXR8 / CLKS1 / ECAP1_APWM1 / GP0[0] / PRU0_R31[8]
E4
I/O
AXR15 / EPWM0TZ[0] / ECAP2_APWM2 / GP0[7]
(1)
(2)
(3)
A4
I/O
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
33
ADVANCE INFORMATION
eCAP2
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.10
www.ti.com
Enhanced Pulse Width Modulators (eHRPWM)
Table 3-12. Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (eHRPWM) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
eHRPWM0
SPI0_CLK / EPWM0A / GP1[8]
D19
I/O
CP[7]
A
eHRPWM0 A output
(with high-resolution)
SPI0_ENA / EPWM0B / PRU0_R30[6]
C17
I/O
CP[7]
A
eHRPWM0 B output
A4
I/O
CP[1]
A
eHRPWM0 trip zone input
SPI0_SOMI / EPWMSYNCI / GP8[6]
C16
I/O
CP[7]
A
eHRPWM0 sync input
SPI0_SIMO / EPWMSYNCO / GP8[5]
C18
I/O
CP[7]
A
eHRPWM0 sync output
AXR15 / EPWM0TZ[0] / ECAP2_APWM2 / GP0[7]
eHRPWM1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SPI1_SCS[1] / EPWM1A / PRU0_R30[7] / GP2[15] /
TM64P2_IN12
F18
I/O
CP[14]
A
eHRPWM1 A output
(with high-resolution)
SPI1_SCS[0] / EPWM1B / PRU0_R30[8] / GP2[14] /
TM64P3_IN12
E19
I/O
CP[14]
A
eHRPWM1 B output
AXR7 / EPWM1TZ[0] / PRU0_R30[17] / GP1[15] /
PRU0_R31[7]
D2
I/O
CP[4]
A
eHRPWM1 trip zone input
(1)
(2)
(3)
34
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.11
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Boot
Table 3-13. Boot Mode Selection Terminal Functions (1)
NAME
NO.
TYPE (2)
PULL (3)
POWER
GROUP (4)
VP_DOUT[15/]/ LCD_D[15]/ UPP_XD[7] /GP7[7] / BOOT[7]
P4
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[14] / LCD_D[14] / UPP_XD[6] /GP7[6] / BOOT[6]
R3
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[13] / LCD_D[13] / UPP_XD[5] /GP7[5] / BOOT[5]
R2
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[12] / LCD_D[12] / UPP_XD[4] / GP7[4] / BOOT[4]
R1
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[11] / LCD_D[11] / UPP_XD[3] /GP7[3] / BOOT[3]
T3
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[10] / LCD_D[10] / UPP_XD[2] /GP7[2] / BOOT[2]
T2
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[9] / LCD_D[9] / UPP_XD[1] /GP7[1] / BOOT[1]
T1
I
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[8] / LCD_D[8] / UPP_XD[0] /GP7[0] / BOOT[0]
U3
I
CP[29]
C
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Boot Mode Selection Pins
Boot decoding is defined in the bootloader application report.
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
35
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3.7.12 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitters (UART0, UART1, UART2)
Table 3-14. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
UART0
SPI0_SCS[5] / UART0_RXD / GP8[4]
C19
I
CP[8]
A
UART0 receive data
SPI0_SCS[4] / UART0_TXD / GP8[3]
D18
O
CP[8]
A
UART0 transmit data
SPI0_SCS[2] / UART0_RTS / GP8[1]
D16
O
CP[9]
A
UART0 ready-to-send output
SPI0_SCS[3] / UART0_CTS / GP8[2]
E17
I
CP[9]
A
UART0 clear-to-send input
SPI1_SCS[3] / UART1_RXD / GP1[1]
E18
I
CP[13]
A
UART1 receive data
SPI1_SCS[2] / UART1_TXD / GP1[0]
F19
O
CP[13]
A
UART1 transmit data
AHCLKR / PRU0_R30[18] / UART1_RTS /GP0[11] /
PRU0_R31[18]
A2
O
CP[0]
A
UART1 ready-to-send output
AHCLKX / USB_REFCLKIN / UART1_CTS / GP0[10] /
PRU0_R31[17]
A3
I
CP[0]
A
UART1 clear-to-send input
SPI1_SCS[5] / UART2_RXD / I2C1_SCL /GP1[3]
F17
I
CP[12]
A
UART2 receive data
SPI1_SCS[4] / UART2_TXD / I2C1_SDA /GP1[2]
F16
O
CP[12]
A
UART2 transmit data
AMUTE / PRU0_R30[16] / UART2_RTS / GP0[9] /
PRU0_R31[16]
D5
O
CP[0]
A
UART2 ready-to-send output
RTC_ALARM / UART2_CTS / GP0[8] / DEEPSLEEP
F4
I
CP[0]
A
UART2 clear-to-send input
UART1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
UART2
(1)
(2)
(3)
36
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module.The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.13 Inter-Integrated Circuit Modules(I2C0, I2C1)
Table 3-15. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
G18
I/O
CP[11]
A
I2C0 serial data
G16
I/O
CP[11]
A
I2C0 serial clock
NO.
DESCRIPTION
I2C0
SPI1_SCS[6] / I2C0_SDA / TM64P3_OUT12 / GP1[4]
SPI1_SCS[7] / I2C0_SCL / TM64P2_OUT12 / GP1[5]
SPI1_SCS[4] / UART2_TXD / I2C1_SDA / GP1[2]
F16
I/O
CP[12]
A
I2C1 serial data
SPI1_SCS[5] / UART2_RXD / I2C1_SCL / GP1[3]
F17
I/O
CP[12]
A
I2C1 serial clock
(1)
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module.The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
37
ADVANCE INFORMATION
I2C1
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3.7.14 Timers
Table 3-16. Timers Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
TIMER0
SPI0_SCS[1] /TM64P0_OUT12 / GP1[7] / TM64P0_IN12
E16
I
CP[10]
A
Timer0 lower input.
SPI0_SCS[1] / TM64P0_OUT12 / GP1[7] / TM64P0_IN12
E16
O
CP[10]
A
Timer0 lower
output
TIMER1 (Watchdog)
SPI0_SCS[0] /TM64P1_OUT12 / GP1[6] / TM64P1_IN12
D17
I
CP[10]
A
Timer1 lower input.
SPI0_SCS[0] / TM64P1_OUT12 / GP1[6] / TM64P1_IN12
D17
O
CP[10]
A
Timer1 lower
output
SPI1_SCS[1] / EPWM1A / PRU0_R30[7] / GP2[15] / TM64P2_IN12
F18
I
CP[14]
A
Timer2 lower input.
SPI1_SCS[7] / I2C0_SCL / TM64P2_OUT12 / GP1[5]
G16
O
CP[11]
A
Timer2 lower
output
SPI1_SCS[0] / EPWM1B / PRU0_R30[8] / GP2[14] / TM64P3_IN12
E19
I
CP[14]
A
Timer3 lower input.
SPI1_SCS[6] / I2C0_SDA / TM64P3_OUT12 / GP1[4]
G18
O
CP[11]
A
Timer3 lower
output
TIMER2
ADVANCE INFORMATION
TIMER3
(1)
(2)
(3)
38
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.15 Multichannel Audio Serial Ports (McASP)
Table 3-17. Multichannel Audio Serial Ports Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
McASP0
AXR15 / EPWM0TZ[0] / ECAP2_APWM2 / GP0[7]
A4
I/O
CP[1]
A
AXR14 / CLKR1 / GP0[6]
B4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR13 / CLKX1 / GP0[5]
B3
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR12 / FSR1 / GP0[4]
C4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR11 / FSX1 / GP0[3]
C5
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR10 / DR1 / GP0[2]
D4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR9 / DX1 / GP0[1]
C3
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR8 / CLKS1 / ECAP1_APWM1 / GP0[0] / PRU0_R31[8]
E4
I/O
CP[3]
A
AXR7 / EPWM1TZ[0] / PRU0_R30[17] / GP1[15] /
PRU0_R31[7]
D2
I/O
CP[4]
A
AXR6 / CLKR0 / GP1[14] / PRU0_R31[6]
C1
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR5 / CLKX0 / GP1[13]
D3
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR4 / FSR0 / GP1[12]
D1
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR3 / FSX0 / GP1[11]
E3
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR2 / DR0 / GP1[10]
E2
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR1 / DX0 / GP1[9]
E1
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR0 / ECAP0_APWM0 / GP8[7] / CLKS0
F3
I/O
CP[6]
A
AHCLKX / USB_REFCLKIN / UART1_CTS / GP0[10] /
PRU0_R31[17]
A3
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 transmit master clock
ACLKX / PRU0_R30[19]/ GP0[14]/ PRU0_R31[21]
B1
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 transmit bit clock
AFSX / GP0[12] / PRU0_R31[19]
B2
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 transmit frame sync
AHCLKR / PRU0_R30[18] / UART1_RTS /GP0[11] /
PRU0_R31[18]
A2
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 receive master clock
ACLKR / PRU0_R30[20] / GP0[15] / PRU0_R31[22]
A1
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 receive bit clock
AFSR / GP0[13] / PRU0_R31[20]
C2
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 receive frame sync
AMUTE / PRU0_R30[16] / UART2_RTS / GP0[9] /
PRU0_R31[16]
D5
I/O
CP[0]
A
McASP0 mute output
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
39
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
McASP0 serial data
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3.7.16 Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports (McBSP)
Table 3-18. Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports (McBSPs) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
McBSP0
AXR0 / ECAP0_APWM0 / GP8[7] /CLKS0
F3
I
CP[6]
A
McBSP0 sample rate generator clock input
AXR6 / CLKR0 / GP1[14] / PRU0_R31[6]
C1
I/O
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 receive clock
AXR4 / FSR0 / GP1[12] /
D1
I/O
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 receive frame sync
AXR2 / DR0 / GP1[10] /
E2
I
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 receive data
AXR5 / CLKX0 / GP1[13] /
D3
I/O
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 transmit clock
AXR3 / FSX0 / GP1[11]
E3
I/O
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 transmit frame sync
AXR1 / DX0 / GP1[9]
E1
O
CP[5]
A
McBSP0 transmit data
McBSP1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AXR8 / CLKS1 / ECAP1_APWM1 / GP0[0] /
PRU0_R31[8]
E4
I
CP[3]
A
McBSP1 sample rate generator clock input
AXR14 / CLKR1 / GP0[6]
B4
I/O
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 receive clock
AXR12 / FSR1 / GP0[4]
C4
I/O
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 receive frame sync
AXR10 / DR1 / GP0[2]
D4
I
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 receive data
AXR13 / CLKX1 / GP0[5]
B3
I/O
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 transmit clock
AXR11 / FSX1 / GP0[3]
C5
I/O
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 transmit frame sync
AXR9 / DX1 / GP0[1]
C3
O
CP[2]
A
McBSP1 transmit data
(1)
(2)
(3)
40
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.17 Universal Serial Bus Modules (USB0)
Table 3-19. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
M18
A
IPD
—
USB0 PHY data minus
USB0_DP
USB0_VDDA33
M19
A
IPD
—
USB0 PHY data plus
N18
PWR
—
—
USB0 PHY 3.3-V supply
USB0_ID
P16
A
—
—
USB0 PHY identification
(mini-A or mini-B plug)
USB0_VBUS
N19
A
—
—
USB0 bus voltage
USB0_DRVVBUS
K18
0
IPD
B
USB0 controller VBUS control output.
AHCLKX / USB_REFCLKIN / UART1_CTS /
GP0[10] / PRU0_R31[17]
A3
I
CP[0]
A
USB_REFCLKIN. Optional clock input
USB0_VDDA18
N14
PWR
—
—
USB0 PHY 1.8-V supply input
USB0_VDDA12
N17
A
—
—
USB0 PHY 1.2-V LDO output for bypass cap
USB_CVDD
M12
PWR
—
—
USB0 core logic 1.2-V supply input
(1)
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
41
ADVANCE INFORMATION
USB0 2.0 OTG (USB0)
USB0_DM
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3.7.18 Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)
Table 3-20. Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
MMCSD0
ADVANCE INFORMATION
MMCSD0_CLK / PRU1_R30[31] /GP4[7] / PRU1_R31[23]
E9
O
CP[18]
B
MMCSD0 Clock
EMA_A[22] / MMCSD0_CMD / PRU1_R30[30] / GP4[6] /
PRU1_R31[22]
A10
I/O
CP[18]
B
MMCSD0 Command
EMA_A[14] / MMCSD0_DAT[7] / PRU1_R30[22] / GP5[14]
A12
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[15] / MMCSD0_DAT[6] / PRU1_R30[23] / GP5[15]
C11
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[16] / MMCSD0_DAT[5] / PRU1_R30[24] / GP4[0]
E12
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[17] / MMCSD0_DAT[4] / PRU1_R30[25] / GP4[1]
B11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[18] / MMCSD0_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[26] / GP4[2] /
PRU1_R31[18]
E11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[19] / MMCSD0_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[27] / GP4[3] /
PRU1_R31[19]
C10
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[20] / MMCSD0_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[28] / GP4[4] /
PRU1_R31[20]
A11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[21] / MMCSD0_DAT[0] / PRU1_R30[29] / GP4[5] /
PRU1_R31[21]
B10
I/O
CP[18]
B
MMC/SD0 data
MMCSD1
PRU0_R30[24] /MMCSD1_CLK / UPP_CHB_START /
GP8[14]/PRU1_R31[26]/
G2
O
CP[30]
C
MMCSD1 Clock
PRU0_R30[23] /MMCSD1_CMD / UPP_CHB_ENABLE /
GP8[13]/PRU1_R31[25]
J4
I/O
CP[30]
C
MMCSD1 Command
MMCSD1_DAT[7] / LCD_PCLK / PRU1_R30[7] / GP8[11]
F1
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[6] / LCD_MCLK /PRU1_R30[6] / GP8[10] /
PRU1_R31[7]
F2
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[5] / LCD_HSYNC /PRU1_R30[5] / GP8[9] /
PRU1_R31[6]
H4
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[4] / LCD_VSYNC /PRU1_R30[4] / GP8[8] /
PRU1_R31[5]
G4
I/O
CP[31]
C
VP_CLKIN2 / MMCSD1_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[3] / GP6[4] /
PRU1_R31[4]
H3
I/O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT2 / MMCSD1_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[2] / GP6[3] /
PRU1_R31[3]
K3
I/O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKIN3 / MMCSD1_DAT[1]/ PRU1_R30[1] / GP6[2] /
PRU1_R31[2]
J3
I/O
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[25] / MMCSD1_DAT[0] / UPP_CHB_CLOCK / GP8[15]/
PRU1_R31[27]
G1
I/O
CP[30]
C
(1)
(2)
(3)
42
MMC/SD1 data
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.19
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Liquid Crystal Display Controller(LCD)
Table 3-21. Liquid Crystal Display Controller (LCD) Terminal Functions
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
VP_DOUT[15] / LCD_D[15] / UPP_XD[7] / GP7[7] / BOOT[7]
P4
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[14] / LCD_D[14] / UPP_XD[6] / GP7[6] / BOOT[6]
R3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[13] / LCD_D[13] / UPP_XD[5] / GP7[5] / BOOT[5]
R2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[12] / LCD_D[12] / UPP_XD[4] / GP7[4] / BOOT[4]
R1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[11] / LCD_D[11] / UPP_XD[3] / GP7[3] / BOOT[3]
T3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[10] / LCD_D[10] / UPP_XD[2] / GP7[2] / BOOT[2]
T2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[9] / LCD_D[9] / UPP_XD[1] / GP7[1] / BOOT[1]
T1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[8] / LCD_D[8] / UPP_XD[0] / GP7[0] / BOOT[0]
U3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[7] / LCD_D[7] / UPP_XD[15] / GP7[15] /
PRU1_R31[15]
U2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[6] / LCD_D[6] / UPP_XD[14] / GP7[14] /
PRU1_R31[14]
U1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[5] / LCD_D[5] / UPP_XD[13] / GP7[13] /
PRU1_R31[13]
V3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[4] / LCD_D[4] / UPP_XD[12] / GP7[12] /
PRU1_R31[12]
V2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[3] / LCD_D[3] / UPP_XD[11] / GP7[11] /
PRU1_R31[11]
V1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[2] / LCD_D[2] / UPP_XD[10] / GP7[10] /
PRU1_R31[10]
W3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[1] / LCD_D[1] / UPP_XD[9] / GP7[9] / PRU1_R31[9]
W2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[0] / LCD_D[0] / UPP_XD[8] / GP7[8] / PRU1_R31[8]
W1
I/O
CP[28]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[7] / LCD_PCLK / PRU1_R30[7] / GP8[11]
F1
O
CP[31]
C
LCD pixel clock
MMCSD1_DAT[5] / LCD_HSYNC / PRU1_R30[5] / GP8[9] /
PRU1_R31[6]
H4
O
CP[31]
C
LCD horizontal sync
MMCSD1_DAT[4] / LCD_VSYNC / PRU1_R30[4] / GP8[8] /
PRU1_R31[5]
G4
O
CP[31]
C
LCD vertical sync
LCD_AC_ENB_CS / GP6[0]/ / PRU1_R31[28]
R5
O
CP[31]
C
LCD AC bias enable chip
select
MMCSD1_DAT[6] / LCD_MCLK / PRU1_R30[6] / GP8[10] /
PRU1_R31[7]
F2
O
CP[31]
C
LCD memory clock
(1)
(2)
(3)
LCD data bus
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
43
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.20
www.ti.com
Universal Host-Port Interface (UHPI)
Table 3-22. Universal Host-Port Interface (UHPI) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VP_DIN[7] / UHPI_HD[15] / UPP_D[15] / PRU0_R31[29]
U18
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[6] / UHPI_HD[14] / UPP_D[14] / PRU0_R31[28]
V16
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[5] / UHPI_HD[13] / UPP_D[13] / PRU0_R31[27]
R14
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[4] / UHPI_HD[12] / UPP_D[12] / PRU0_R31[26]
W16
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[3] / UHPI_HD[11] / UPP_D[11] / PRU0_R31[25]
V17
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[2] / UHPI_HD[10] / UPP_D[10] / PRU0_R31[24]
W17
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[1] / UHPI_HD[9] / UPP_D[9] / PRU0_R31[23]
W18
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[0] / UHPI_HD[8] / UPP_D[8] / PRU1_R31[29]
W19
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[15]_VSYNC / UHPI_HD[7] / UPP_D[7]/PRU0_R30[15] /
PRU0_R31[15]
V18
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[14]_HSYNC / UHPI_HD[6] / UPP_D[6]/ PRU0_R30[14] /
PRU0_R31[14]
V19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[13]_FIELD / UHPI_HD[5] / UPP_D[5] / PRU0_R30[13] /
PRU0_R31[13]
U19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[12] / UHPI_HD[4] / UPP_D[4] / PRU0_R30[12] /
PRU0_R31[12]
T16
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[11] / UHPI_HD[3] / UPP_D[3] / PRU0_R30[11] /
PRU0_R31[11]
R18
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[10] / UHPI_HD[2] / UPP_D[2] / PRU0_R30[10] /
PRU0_R31[10]
R19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[9] / UHPI_HD[1] / UPP_D[1] / PRU0_R30[9] / PRU0_R31[9]
R15
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[8] / UHPI_HD[0] / UPP_D[0] / GP6[5] / PRU1_R31[0]
P17
I/O
CP[27]
C
PRU0_R30[29] / UHPI_HCNTL0 / UPP_CHA_CLOCK / GP6[11]
U17
I
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[28] / UHPI_HCNTL1 / UPP_CHA_START / GP6[10]
W15
I
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[27] / UHPI_HHWIL / UPP_CHA_ENABLE / GP6[9]
U16
I
CP[24]
C
UHPI half-word
identification control
PRU0_R30[26] /UHPI_HRW / UPP_CHA_WAIT /
GP6[8]/PRU1_R31[17]
T15
I
CP[24]
C
UHPI read/write
VP_CLKIN0 / UHPI_HCS / PRU1_R30[10] / GP6[7] / UPP_2xTXCLK
W14
I
CP[25]
C
UHPI chip select
VP_CLKIN1 / UHPI_HDS1 / PRU1_R30[9] / GP6[6] / PRU1_R31[16]
V15
I
CP[25]
C
CLKOUT / UHPI_HDS2 / PRU1_R30[13] / GP6[14]
T18
I
CP[22]
C
PRU0_R30[30] / UHPI_HINT / PRU1_R30[11] / GP6[12]
R16
I
CP[23]
C
UHPI host interrupt
PRU0_R30[31] /UHPI_HRDY / PRU1_R30[12] /GP6[13]
R17
O
CP[23]
C
UHPI ready
RESETOUT / UHPI_HAS / PRU1_R30[14] / GP6[15]
T17
I
CP[21]
C
UHPI address strobe
(1)
(2)
(3)
44
UHPI data bus
UHPI access control
UHPI data strobe
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.21
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Universal Parallel Port (uPP)
Table 3-23. Universal Parallel Port (uPP) Terminal Functions
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
W14
I
CP[25]
C
uPP 2x transmit clock
input
PRU0_R30[25] /MMCSD1_DAT[0] / UPP_CHB_CLOCK /
GP8[15]/PRU1_R31[27]
G1
I/O
CP[30]
C
uPP channel B clock
PRU0_R30[24]/ MMCSD1_CLK / UPP_CHB_START / GP8[14] /
PRU1_R31[26]
G2
I/O
CP[30]
C
uPP channel B start
PRU0_R30[23] / MMCSD1_CMD / UPP_CHB_ENABLE /
GP8[13]/PRU1_R31[25]
J4
I/O
CP[30]
C
uPP channel B enable
PRU0_R30[22] / PRU1_R30[8] / UPP_CHB_WAIT / GP8[12]/
PRU1_R31[24]
G3
I/O
CP[30]
C
uPP channel B wait
PRU0_R30[29] /UHPI_CNTL0 / UPP_CHA_CLOCK / GP6[11]
U17
I/O
CP[24]
C
uPP channel A clock
PRU0_R30[28] / UHPI_HCNTL1 / UPP_CHA_START / GP6[10]
W15
I/O
CP[24]
C
uPP channel A start
PRU0_R30[27] / UHPI_HHWIL / UPP_CHA_ENABLE / GP6[9]
U16
I/O
CP[24]
C
uPP channel A enable
PRU0_R30[26] /UHPI_HRW / UPP_CHA_WAIT / GP6[8] /
PRU1_R31[17]
T15
I/O
CP[24]
C
uPP channel A wait
NAME
NO.
VP_CLKIN0 / UHPI_HCS1 /PRU1_R30[10] / GP6[7] /
UPP_2xTXCLK
(1)
(2)
(3)
DESCRIPTION
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
45
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-23. Universal Parallel Port (uPP) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VP_DOUT[7] / LCD_D[7] / UPP_XD[15] / GP7[15] /
PRU1_R31[15]
U2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[6] / LCD_D[6] / UPP_XD[14] / GP7[14] /
PRU1_R31[14]
U1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[5] / LCD_D[5] / UPP_XD[13] / GP7[13] /
PRU1_R31[13]
V3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[4] / LCD_D[4] / UPP_XD[12] / GP7[12] /
PRU1_R31[12]
V2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[3] / LCD_D[3] / UPP_XD[11] / GP7[11] /
PRU1_R31[11]
V1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[2] / LCD_D[2] / UPP_XD[10] / GP7[10] /
PRU1_R31[10]
W3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[1] / LCD_D[1] / UPP_XD[9] / GP7[9] / PRU1_R31[9]
W2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[0] / LCD_D[0] / UPP_XD[8] / GP7[8] / PRU1_R31[8]
W1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[15] / LCD_D[15] / UPP_XD[7] / GP7[7] / BOOT[7]
P4
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[14] / LCD_D[14] / UPP_XD[6] / GP7[6] / BOOT[6]
R3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[13] / LCD_D[13] / UPP_XD[5] / GP7[5] / BOOT[5]
R2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[12] / LCD_D[12] / UPP_XD[4] / GP7[4] / BOOT[4]
R1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[11] / LCD_D[11] / UPP_XD[3] / GP7[3] / BOOT[3]
T3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[10] / LCD_D[10] / UPP_XD[2] / GP7[2] / BOOT[2]
T2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[9] / LCD_D[9] / UPP_XD[1] / GP7[1] / BOOT[1]
T1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[8] / LCD_D[8] / UPP_XD[0] / GP7[0] / BOOT[0]
U3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DIN[7] / UHPI_HD[15] / UPP_D[15] / PRU0_R31[29]
U18
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[6] / UHPI_HD[14] / UPP_D[14] / PRU0_R31[28]
V16
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[5] / UHPI_HD[13] / UPP_D[13] / PRU0_R31[27]
R14
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[4] / UHPI_HD[12] / UPP_D[12] / PRU0_R31[26]
W16
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[3] / UHPI_HD[11] / UPP_D[11] / PRU0_R31[25]
V17
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[2] / UHPI_HD[10] / UPP_D[10] / PRU0_R31[24]
W17
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[1] / UHPI_HD[9] / UPP_D[9] / PRU0_R31[23]
W18
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[0] / UHPI_HD[8] / UPP_D[8] / PRU1_R31[29]
W19
I/O
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[15]_VSYNC / UHPI_HD[7] / UPP_D[7]/PRU0_R30[15] /
PRU0_R31[15]
V18
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[14]_HSYNC / UHPI_HD[6] / UPP_D[6]/ PRU0_R30[14] /
PRU0_R31[14]
V19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[13]_FIELD / UHPI_HD[5] / UPP_D[5] /PRU0_R30[13] /
PRU0_R31[13]
U19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[12] / UHPI_HD[4] / UPP_D[4]/ PRU0_R30[12] /
PRU0_R31[12]
T16
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[11] / UHPI_HD[3] / UPP_D[3]/ PRU0_R30[11] /
PRU0_R31[11]
R18
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[10] / UHPI_HD[2] / UPP_D[2]/ PRU0_R30[10] /
PRU0_R31[10]
R19
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[9] / UHPI_HD[1] / UPP_D[1]/ PRU0_R30[9] /
PRU0_R31[9]
R15
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[8] / UHPI_HD[0] / UPP_D[0] / GP6[5] / PRU1_R31[0]
P17
I/O
CP[27]
C
46
Device Overview
DESCRIPTION
uPP data bus
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
3.7.22
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Video Port Interface (VPIF)
Table 3-24. Video Port Interface (VPIF) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
W14
I
CP[25]
C
VPIF capture channel 0
input clock
VP_CLKIN1 / UHPI_HDS1/PRU1_R30[9] / GP6[6] / PRU1_R31[16]
V15
I
CP[25]
C
VPIF capture channel 1
input clock
VP_DIN[15]_VSYNC / UHPI_HD[7] / UPP_D[7] / PRU0_R30[15] /
PRU0_R31[15]
V18
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[14]_HSYNC / UHPI_HD[6] / UPP_D[6]/ PRU0_R30[14] /
PRU0_R31[14]
V19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[13]_FIELD / UHPI_HD[5] / UPP_D[5] / PRU0_R30[13] /
PRU0_R31[13]
U19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[12] / UHPI_HD[4] / UPP_D[4]/ PRU0_R30[12] /
PRU0_R31[12]
T16
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[11] / UHPI_HD[3] / UPP_D[3]/ PRU0_R30[11] /
PRU0_R31[11]
R18
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[10] / UHPI_HD[2] / UPP_D[2] / PRU0_R30[10] /
PRU0_R31[10]
R19
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[9] / UHPI_HD[1] / UPP_D[1] / PRU0_R30[9] /
PRU0_R31[9]
R15
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[8] / UHPI_HD[0] / UPP_D[0] / GP6[5] / PRU1_R31[0]
P17
I
CP[27]
C
VP_DIN[7] / UHPI_HD[15] / UPP_D[15] / PRU0_R31[29]
U18
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[6] / UHPI_HD[14] / UPP_D[14] / PRU0_R31[28]
V16
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[5] / UHPI_HD[13] / UPP_D[13] / PRU0_R31[27]
R14
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[4] / UHPI_HD[12] / UPP_D[12] / PRU0_R31[26]
W16
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[3] / UHPI_HD[11] / UPP_D[11] / PRU0_R31[25]
V17
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[2] / UHPI_HD[10] / UPP_D[10] / PRU0_R31[24]
W17
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[1] / UHPI_HD[9] / UPP_D[9] / PRU0_R31[23]
W18
I
CP[26]
C
VP_DIN[0] / UHPI_HD[8] / UPP_D[8] / PRU1_R31[29]
W19
I
CP[26]
C
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VIDEO INPUT
VP_CLKIN0 / UHPI_HCS / PRU1_R30[10] / GP6[7] /
UPP_2xTXCLK
VPIF capture data bus
VIDEO OUTPUT
VP_CLKIN2 / MMCSD1_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[3] / GP6[4] /
PRU1_R31[4]
H3
I
CP[30]
C
VPIF display channel 2
input clock
VP_CLKOUT2 / MMCSD1_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[2] / GP6[3] /
PRU1_R31[3]
K3
O
CP[30]
C
VPIF display channel 2
output clock
VP_CLKIN3 / MMCSD1_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[1] / GP6[2] /
PRU1_R31[2]
J3
I
CP[30]
C
VPIF display channel 3
input clock
VP_CLKOUT3 / PRU1_R30[0] / GP6[1] / PRU1_R31[1]
K4
O
CP[30]
C
VPIF display channel 3
output clock
(1)
(2)
(3)
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
47
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-24. Video Port Interface (VPIF) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VP_DOUT[15] / LCD_D[15] /UPP_XD[7] / GP7[7] / BOOT[7]
P4
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[14] / LCD_D[14] / UPP_XD[6] / GP7[6] / BOOT[6]
R3
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[13] / LCD_D[13] /UPP_XD[5] / GP7[5] / BOOT[5]
R2
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[12] / LCD_D[12] /UPP_XD[4] / GP7[4] / BOOT[4]
R1
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[11] / LCD_D[11] /UPP_XD[3] / GP7[3] / BOOT[3]
T3
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[10] / LCD_D[10] /UPP_XD[2] / GP7[2] / BOOT[2]
T2
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[9] / LCD_D[9] /UPP_XD[1] / GP7[1] / BOOT[1]
T1
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[8] / LCD_D[8] /UPP_XD[0] / GP7[0] / BOOT[0]
U3
O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[7] / LCD_D[7] /UPP_XD[15] / GP7[15] / PRU1_R31[15]
U2
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[6] / LCD_D[6] /UPP_XD[14] / GP7[14] / PRU1_R31[14]
U1
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[5] / LCD_D[5] /UPP_XD[13] / GP7[13] / PRU1_R31[13]
V3
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[4] / LCD_D[4] /UPP_XD[12] / GP7[12] / PRU1_R31[12]
V2
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[3] / LCD_D[3] /UPP_XD[11] / GP7[11] / PRU1_R31[11]
V1
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[2] / LCD_D[2] /UPP_XD[10] / GP7[10] / PRU1_R31[10]
W3
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[1] / LCD_D[1] /UPP_XD[9] / GP7[9] / PRU1_R31[9]
W2
O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[0] /LCD_D[0] /UPP_XD[8] / GP7[8] / PRU1_R31[8]
W1
O
CP[28]
C
48
Device Overview
DESCRIPTION
VPIF display data bus
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.23 General Purpose Input Output
Table 3-25. General Purpose Input Output Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
A1
I/O
CP[0]
A
ACLKX / PRU0_R30[19] / GP0[14] / PRU0_R31[21]
B1
I/O
CP[0]
A
AFSR / GP0[13] / PRU0_R31[20]
C2
I/O
CP[0]
A
AFSX / GP0[12] /PRU0_R31[19]
B2
I/O
CP[0]
A
AHCLKR / PRU0_R30[18] / UART1_RTS / GP0[11] /
PRU0_R31[18]
A2
I/O
CP[0]
A
AHCLKX / USB_REFCLKIN / UART1_CTS / GP0[10] /
PRU0_R31[17]
A3
I/O
CP[0]
A
AMUTE / PRU0_R30[16] / UART2_RTS / GP0[9] / PRU0_R31[16]
D5
I/O
CP[0]
A
RTC_ALARM / UART2_CTS / GP0[8] / DEEPSLEEP
F4
I/O
CP[0]
A
AXR15 / EPWM0TZ[0] / ECAP2_APWM2 / GP0[7]
A4
I/O
CP[1]
A
AXR14 / CLKR1 / GP0[6]
B4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR13 / CLKX1 / GP0[5]
B3
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR12 / FSR1 / GP0[4]
C4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR11 / FSX1 / GP0[3]
C5
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR10 / DR1 / GP0[2]
D4
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR9 / DX1 / GP0[1]
C3
I/O
CP[2]
A
AXR8 / CLKS1 / ECAP1_APWM1 / GP0[0] / PRU0_R31[8]
E4
I/O
CP[3]
A
NAME
NO.
DESCRIPTION
GP0
GPIO Bank 0
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ACLKR / PRU0_R30[20] / GP0[15] / PRU0_R31[22]
GP1
AXR7 / EPWM1TZ[0] / PRU0_R30[17] / GP1[15] / PRU0_R31[7]
D2
I/O
CP[4]
A
AXR6 / CLKR0 / GP1[14] / PRU0_R31[6]
C1
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR5 / CLKX0 / GP1[13]
D3
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR4 / FSR0 / GP1[12]
D1
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR3 / FSX0 / GP1[11]
E3
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR2 / DR0 / GP1[10]
E2
I/O
CP[5]
A
AXR1 / DX0 / GP1[9]
E1
I/O
CP[5]
A
SPI0_CLK / EPWM0A / GP1[8]
D19
I/O
CP[7]
A
SPI0_SCS[1] / TM64P0_OUT12 / GP1[7] / TM64P0_IN12
E16
I/O
CP[10]
A
SPI0_SCS[0] / TM64P1_OUT12 / GP1[6] / TM64P1_IN12
D17
I/O
CP[10]
A
SPI1_SCS[7] / I2C0_SCL / TM64P2_OUT12 / GP1[5]
G16
I/O
CP[11]
A
SPI1_SCS[6] / I2C0_SDA / TM64P3_OUT12 / GP1[4]
G18
I/O
CP[11]
A
SPI1_SCS[5] / UART2_RXD / I2C1_SCL / GP1[3]
F17
I/O
CP[12]
A
SPI1_SCS[4] / UART2_TXD / I2C1_SDA / GP1[2]
F16
I/O
CP[12]
A
SPI1_SCS[3] / UART1_RXD / GP1[1]
E18
I/O
CP[13]
A
SPI1_SCS[2] / UART1_TXD / GP1[0]
F19
I/O
CP[13]
A
(1)
(2)
(3)
GPIO Bank 1
I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Bidirectional, Z = High impedance, PWR = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
Note: The pin type shown refers to the input, output or high-impedance state of the pin function when configured as the signal name
highlighted in bold. All multiplexed signals may enter a high-impedance state when the configured function is input-only or the configured
function supports high-Z operation. All GPIO signals can be used as input or output. For multiplexed pins where functions have different
types (ie., input versus output), the table reflects the pin function direction for that particular peripheral.
IPD = Internal Pulldown resistor; IPU = Internal Pullup resistor; CP[n] = configurable pull-up/pull-down (where n is the pin group) using
the PUPDENA and PUPDSEL registers in the System Module. The pull-up and pull-down control of these pins is not active until the
device is out of reset. During reset, all of the pins associated with these registers are weakly pulled down. If the application requires a
pull-up, an external pull-up can be used.
This signal is part of a dual-voltage IO group (A, B or C). These groups can be operated at 3.3V or 1.8V nominal. The three groups can
be operated at independent voltages but all pins withina group will operate at the same voltage. Group A operates at the voltage of
power supply DVDD3318_A. Group B operates at the voltage of power supply DVDD3318_B. Group C operates at the voltage of power
supply DVDD3318_C.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
49
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-25. General Purpose Input Output Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
F18
I/O
CP[14]
A
SPI1_SCS[0] / EPWM1B / PRU0_R30[8] / GP2[14] / TM64P3_IN12 E19
I/O
CP[14]
A
SPI1_CLK / GP2[13]
G19
I/O
CP[15]
A
SPI1_ENA / GP2[12]
H16
I/O
CP[15]
A
SPI1_SOMI / GP2[11]
H17
I/O
CP[15]
A
SPI1_SIMO / GP2[10]
G17
I/O
CP[15]
A
EMA_BA[1] / GP2[9]
A15
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_BA[0] / GP2[8]
C15
I/O
CP[16]
B
B7
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_SDCKE / PRU0_R30[4] / GP2[6] / PRU0_R31[4]
D8
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_RAS / PRU0_R30[3] / GP2[5] / PRU0_R31[3]
A16
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CAS / PRU0_R30[2] / GP2[4] / PRU0_R31[2]
A9
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WEN_DQM[0] / GP2[3]
C8
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WEN_DQM[1] / GP2[2]
A5
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[1] / PRU0_R30[1] / GP2[1] / PRU0_R31[1]
B19
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[0] / GP2[0]
A18
I/O
CP[16]
B
NAME
NO.
DESCRIPTION
GP2
SPI1_SCS[1] / EPWM1A / PRU0_R30[7] / GP2[15] / TM64P2_IN12
EMA_CLK / PRU0_R30[5] / GP2[7] / PRU0_R31[5]
GPIO Bank 2
ADVANCE INFORMATION
GP3
EMA_CS[2] / GP3[15]
B17
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[3] / GP3[14]
A17
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[4] / GP3[13]
F9
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_CS[5] / GP3[12]
B16
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WE / GP3[11]
B9
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_OE / GP3[10]
B15
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_A_RW / GP3[9]
D10
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_WAIT[0] / PRU0_R30[0] / GP3[8] / PRU0_R31[0]
B18
I/O
CP[16]
B
EMA_D[15] / GP3[7]
E6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[14] / GP3[6]
C7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[13] / GP3[5]
B6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[12] / GP3[4]
A6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[11] / GP3[3]
D6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[10] / GP3[2]
A7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[9] / GP3[1]
D9
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[8] / GP3[0]
E10
I/O
CP[17]
B
50
Device Overview
GPIO Bank 3
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-25. General Purpose Input Output Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
GP4
D7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[6] / GP4[14]
C6
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[5] / GP4[13]
E7
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[4] / GP4[12]
B5
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[3] / GP4[11]
E8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[2] / GP4[10]
B8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[1] / GP4[9]
A8
I/O
CP[17]
B
EMA_D[0] / GP4[8]
C9
I/O
CP[17]
B
MMCSD0_CLK / PRU1_R30[31] / GP4[7] / PRU1_R31[23]
E9
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[22] / MMCSD0_CMD / PRU1_R30[30] / GP4[6] /
PRU1_R31[22]
A10
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[21] / MMCSD0_DAT[0] / PRU1_R30[29] / GP4[5] /
PRU1_R31[21]
B10
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[20] / MMCSD0_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[28] / GP4[4] /
PRU1_R31[20]
A11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[19] / MMCSD0_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[27] / GP4[3] /
PRU1_R31[19]
C10
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[18] / MMCSD0_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[26] / GP4[2] /
PRU1_R31[18]
E11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[17] / MMCSD0_DAT[4] / PRU1_R30[25] / GP4[1]
B11
I/O
CP[18]
B
EMA_A[16] / MMCSD0_DAT[5] / PRU1_R30[24] / GP4[0]
E12
I/O
CP[18]
B
GPIO Bank 4
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_D[7] / GP4[15]
GP5
EMA_A[15] / MMCSD0_DAT[6] / PRU1_R30[23] / GP5[15]
C11
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[14] / MMCSD0_DAT[7] /PRU1_R30[22] / GP5[14]
A12
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[13] / PRU0_R30[21] / PRU1_R30[21] / GP5[13]
D11
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[12] / PRU1_R30[20] / GP5[12]
D13
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[11] / PRU1_R30[19] / GP5[11]
B12
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[10] / PRU1_R30[18] / GP5[10]
C12
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[9] / PRU1_R30[17] / GP5[9]
D12
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[8] / PRU1_R30[16] / GP5[8]
A13
I/O
CP[19]
B
EMA_A[7] / PRU1_R30[15] / GP5[7]
B13
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[6] / GP5[6]
E13
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[5] / GP5[5]
C13
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[4] / GP5[4]
A14
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[3] / GP5[3]
D14
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[2] / GP5[2]
B14
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[1] / GP5[1]
D15
I/O
CP[20]
B
EMA_A[0] / GP5[0]
C14
I/O
CP[20]
B
GPIO Bank 5
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
51
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-25. General Purpose Input Output Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
T17
I/O
CP[21]
C
CLKOUT / UHPI_HDS2 / PRU1_R30[13] / GP6[14]
T18
I/O
CP[22]
C
PRU0_R30[31] / UHPI_HRDY / PRU1_R30[12] / GP6[13]
R17
I/O
CP[23]
C
PRU0_R30[30] / UHPI_HINT / PRU1_R30[11] / GP6[12]
R16
I/O
CP[23]
C
PRU0_R30[29] / UHPI_HCNTL0 / UPP_CHA_CLOCK / GP6[11]
U17
I/O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[28] / UHPI_HCNTL1 / UPP_CHA_START / GP6[10]
W15
I/O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[27] / UHPI_HHWIL / UPP_CHA_ENABLE / GP6[9]
U16
I/O
CP[24]
C
PRU0_R30[26] / UHPI_HRW / UPP_CHA_WAIT / GP6[8] /
PRU1_R31[17]
T15
I/O
CP[24]
C
VP_CLKIN0 / UHPI_HCS / PRU1_R30[10] / GP6[7] /
UPP_2xTXCLK
W14
I/O
CP[25]
C
VP_CLKIN1 / UHPI_HDS1 / PRU1_R30[9] / GP6[6] /
PRU1_R31[16]
V15
I/O
CP[25]
C
VP_DIN[8] / UHPI_HD[0] / UPP_D[0] / GP6[5] / PRU1_R31[0]
P17
I/O
CP[27]
C
VP_CLKIN2 / MMCSD1_DAT[3] / PRU1_R30[3] / GP6[4] /
PRU1_R31[4]
H3
I/O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT2 / MMCSD1_DAT[2] / PRU1_R30[2] / GP6[3] /
PRU1_R31[3]
K3
I/O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKIN3 / MMCSD1_DAT[1] / PRU1_R30[1] / GP6[2] /
PRU1_R31[2]
J3
I/O
CP[30]
C
VP_CLKOUT3 / PRU1_R30[0] / GP6[1] / PRU1_R31[1]
K4
I/O
CP[30]
C
LCD_AC_ENB_CS / GP6[0] / PRU1_R31[28]
R5
I/O
CP[31]
C
NAME
NO.
DESCRIPTION
GP6
RESETOUT / UHPI_HAS / PRU1_R30[14] / GP6[15]
GPIO Bank 6
ADVANCE INFORMATION
GP7
VP_DOUT[7] / LCD_D[7] / UPP_XD[15] / GP7[15] / PRU1_R31[15]
U2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[6] / LCD_D[6] / UPP_XD[14] / GP7[14] / PRU1_R31[14]
U1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[5] / LCD_D[5] / UPP_XD[13] / GP7[13] / PRU1_R31[13]
V3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[4] / LCD_D[4] / UPP_XD[12] / GP7[12] / PRU1_R31[12]
V2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[3] / LCD_D[3] / UPP_XD[11] / GP7[11] / PRU1_R31[11]
V1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[2] / LCD_D[2] / UPP_XD[10] / GP7[10] / PRU1_R31[10]
W3
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[1] / LCD_D[1] / UPP_XD[9] / GP7[9] / PRU1_R31[9]
W2
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[0] / LCD_D[0] / UPP_XD[8] / GP7[8] /PRU1_R31[8]
W1
I/O
CP[28]
C
VP_DOUT[15/]/ LCD_D[15]/ UPP_XD[7] / GP7[7] / BOOT[7]
P4
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[14] / LCD_D[14] / UPP_XD[6] / GP7[6] / BOOT[6]
R3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[13] / LCD_D[13] / UPP_XD[5] / GP7[5] / BOOT[5]
R2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[12] / LCD_D[12] / UPP_XD[4] / GP7[4] / BOOT[4]
R1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[11] / LCD_D[11] / UPP_XD[3] / GP7[3] / BOOT[3]
T3
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[10] / LCD_D[10] / UPP_XD[2] / GP7[2] / BOOT[2]
T2
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[9] / LCD_D[9] / UPP_XD[1] / GP7[1] / BOOT[1]
T1
I/O
CP[29]
C
VP_DOUT[8] / LCD_D[8] / UPP_XD[0] / GP7[0] / BOOT[0]
U3
I/O
CP[29]
C
52
Device Overview
GPIO Bank 7
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 3-25. General Purpose Input Output Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
PULL (2)
POWER
GROUP (3)
DESCRIPTION
GP8
G1
I/O
CP30]
C
PRU0_R30[24] / MMCSD1_CLK / UPP_CHB_START / GP8[14] /
PRU1_R31[26]
G2
I/O
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[23] / MMCSD1_CMD / UPP_CHB_ENABLE / GP8[13] /
PRU1_R31[25]
J4
I/O
CP[30]
C
PRU0_R30[22] / PRU1_R30[8] / UPP_CHB_WAIT / GP8[12] /
PRU1_R31[24]
G3
I/O
CP[30]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[7] / LCD_PCLK / PRU1_R30[7] / GP8[11]
F1
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[6] / LCD_MCLK / PRU1_R30[6] / GP8[10] /
PRU1_R31[7]
F2
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[5] / LCD_HSYNC / PRU1_R30[5] / GP8[9] /
PRU1_R31[6]
H4
I/O
CP[31]
C
MMCSD1_DAT[4] / LCD_VSYNC / PRU1_R30[4] / GP8[8] /
PRU1_R31[5]
G4
I/O
CP[31]
C
AXR0 / ECAP0_APWM0 / GP8[7] / CLKS0
F3
I/O
CP[6]
A
SPI0_SOMI /EPWMSYNCI / GP8[6]
C16
I/O
CP[7]
A
SPI0_SIMO / EPWMSYNCO / GP8[5]
C18
I/O
CP[7]
A
SPI0_SCS[5] / UART0_RXD / GP8[4]
C19
I/O
CP[8]
A
SPI0_SCS[4] / UART0_TXD / GP8[3]
D18
I/O
CP[8]
A
SPI0_SCS[3] / UART0_CTS / GP8[2]
E17
I/O
CP[9]
A
SPI0_SCS[2] / UART0_RTS / GP8[1]
D16
I/O
CP[9]
A
K17
I/O
IPD
B
GP8[0]
(1)
(1)
GPIO Bank 8
GP8[0] is initially configured as a reserved function after reset and will not be in a predictable state. This signal will only be stable after
the GPIO configuration for this pin has been completed. Users should carefully consider the system implications of this pin being in an
unknown state after reset.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
53
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PRU0_R30[25] / MMCSD1_DAT[0] / UPP_CHB_CLOCK / GP8[15]
/ PRU1_R31[27]
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
3.7.24 Reserved and No Connect
Table 3-26. Reserved and No Connect Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
RSV2
NC
RSVDN
PWR = Supply voltage.
54
Device Overview
TYPE (1)
T19
PWR
M3, M14, N16
—
J17
I
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied either directly to
CVDD or left unconnected (do not connect to ground).
No connect (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
Reserved. For proper device operation, the pin must be pulled up to supply
DVDD3318_B.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
NO.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3.7.25 Supply and Ground
Table 3-27. Supply and Ground Terminal Functions
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
DESCRIPTION
CVDD (Core supply)
E15, G7, G8,
G13, H6, H7,
H10, H11,
H12, H13, J6,
J12, K6, K12,
L12, M8, M9,
N8
PWR
Variable (1.2V - 1.0V) core supply voltage pins
RVDD (Internal RAM supply)
E5, H14, N7
PWR
1.2V internal ram supply voltage pins
DVDD18 (I/O supply)
F14, G6, G10,
G11, G12,
J13, K5, L6,
P13, R13
PWR
1.8V I/O supply voltage pins
DVDD3318_A (I/O supply)
F5, F15, G5,
G14, G15, H5
PWR
1.8V or 3.3-V dual-voltage LVCMOS I/O supply voltage pins, Group A
DVDD3318_B (I/O supply)
E14, F6, F7,
F8, F10, F11,
F12, F13, G9,
J14, K15
PWR
1.8V or 3.3-V dual-voltage LVCMOS I/O supply voltage pins, Group B
DVDD3318_C (I/O supply)
J5, K13, L4,
L13, M13,
N13, P5, P6,
P12, R4
PWR
1.8V or 3.3-V dual-voltage LVCMOS I/O supply voltage pins, Group C
VSS (Ground)
A19, H8, H9,
H15, J7, J8,
J9, J10, J11,
K7, K8, K9,
K10, K11, L5,
L7, L8, L9,
L10, L11, M4,
M5, M6, M7,
M10, M11, N5,
N11, N12, P11
GND
Ground pins.
(1)
PWR = Supply voltage, GND - Ground.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
55
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SIGNAL
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
4 Device Configuration
4.1
Boot Modes
This device supports a variety of boot modes through an internal ARM ROM bootloader. This device does
not support dedicated hardware boot modes. The input states of the BOOT pins are sampled and latched
into the BOOTCFG register, which is part of the system configuration (SYSCFG) module, when device
reset is deasserted. Boot mode selection is determined by the values of the BOOT pins.
See Using the OMAP-L1x8 Bootloader Application Report (SPRAB41) for more details on the ROM Boot
Loader.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The following boot modes are supported:
• NAND Flash boot
– 8-bit NAND
• NOR Flash boot
– NOR Direct boot (8-bit or 16-bit)
– NOR Legacy boot (8-bit or 16-bit)
– NOR AIS boot (8-bit or 16-bit)
• HPI Boot
• I2C0/I2C1 Boot
– EEPROM (Master Mode)
– External Host (Slave Mode)
• SPI0/ SPI1 Boot
– Serial Flash (Master Mode)
– SERIAL EEPROM (Master Mode)
– External Host (Slave Mode)
• UART0/UART1/UART2 Boot
– External Host
4.2
SYSCFG Module
The following system level features of the chip are controlled by the SYSCFG peripheral:
• Readable Device, Die, and Chip Revision ID
• Control of Pin Multiplexing
• Priority of bus accesses different bus masters in the system
• Capture at power on reset the chip BOOT pin values and make them available to software
• Control of the DeepSleep power management function
• Enable and selection of the programmable pin pullups and pulldowns
• Special case settings for peripherals:
– Locking of PLL controller settings
– Default burst sizes for EDMA3 transfer controllers
– Selection of the source for the eCAP module input capture (including on chip sources)
– McASP AMUTEIN selection and clearing of AMUTE status for the McASP
– Control of the reference clock source and other side-band signals for both of the integrated USB
PHYs
– Clock source selection for EMIFA
– DDR2 Controller PHY settings
• Selects the source of emulation suspend signal (from ARM) of peripherals supporting this function.
56
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Since the SYSCFG peripheral controls global operation of the device, its registers are protected against
erroneous accesses by several mechanisms:
• A special key sequence must be written to KICK0, KICK1 registers before any other registers are
writeable.
• Additionally, many registers are accessible only by a host (ARM) when it is operating in its privileged
mode. (ex. from the kernel, but not from user space code).
Table 4-1. System Configuration (SYSCFG) Module Register Access
Register Name
Register Description
Register Access
REVID
Revision Identification Register
—
0x01C14008
DIEIDR0
Device Identification Register 0
—
0x01C1400C
DIEIDR1
Device Identification Register 1
—
0x01C14010
DIEIDR2
Device Identification Register 2
—
0x01C14014
DIEIDR3
Device Identification Register 3
0x01C1 4020
BOOTCFG
Boot Configuration Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4038
KICK0R
Kick 0 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 403C
KICK1R
Kick 1 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4040
HOST0CFG
Host 0 Configuration Register
0x01C1 4044
HOST1CFG
Host 1 Configuration Register
0x01C1 40E0
IRAWSTAT
Interrupt Raw Status/Set Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40E4
IENSTAT
Interrupt Enable Status/Clear Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40E8
IENSET
Interrupt Enable Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40EC
IENCLR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40F0
EOI
End of Interrupt Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40F4
FLTADDRR
Fault Address Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 40F8
FLTSTAT
Fault Status Register
0x01C1 4110
MSTPRI0
Master Priority 0 Registers
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4114
MSTPRI1
Master Priority 1 Registers
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4118
MSTPRI2
Master Priority 2 Registers
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4120
PINMUX0
Pin Multiplexing Control 0 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4124
PINMUX1
Pin Multiplexing Control 1 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4128
PINMUX2
Pin Multiplexing Control 2 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 412C
PINMUX3
Pin Multiplexing Control 3 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4130
PINMUX4
Pin Multiplexing Control 4 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4134
PINMUX5
Pin Multiplexing Control 5 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4138
PINMUX6
Pin Multiplexing Control 6 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 413C
PINMUX7
Pin Multiplexing Control 7 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4140
PINMUX8
Pin Multiplexing Control 8 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4144
PINMUX9
Pin Multiplexing Control 9 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4148
PINMUX10
Pin Multiplexing Control 10 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 414C
PINMUX11
Pin Multiplexing Control 11 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4150
PINMUX12
Pin Multiplexing Control 12 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4154
PINMUX13
Pin Multiplexing Control 13 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4158
PINMUX14
Pin Multiplexing Control 14 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 415C
PINMUX15
Pin Multiplexing Control 15 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4160
PINMUX16
Pin Multiplexing Control 16 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4164
PINMUX17
Pin Multiplexing Control 17 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4168
PINMUX18
Pin Multiplexing Control 18 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 416C
PINMUX19
Pin Multiplexing Control 19 Register
Privileged mode
—
—
—
—
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Register Address
0x01C1 4000
57
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. System Configuration (SYSCFG) Module Register Access (continued)
Register Address
Register Name
Register Description
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01C1 4170
SUSPSRC
0x01C1 4174
Reserved
—
0x01C1 4178
Reserved
—
0x01C1 417C
CFGCHIP0
Chip Configuration 0 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4180
CFGCHIP1
Chip Configuration 1 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4184
CFGCHIP2
Chip Configuration 2 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 4188
CFGCHIP3
Chip Configuration 3 Register
Privileged mode
0x01C1 418C
CFGCHIP4
Chip Configuration 4 Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C000
VTPIO_CTL
VTPIO COntrol Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C004
DDR_SLEW
DDR Slew Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C008
DeepSleep
DeepSleep Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C00C
PUPD_ENA
Pullup / Pulldown Enable Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C010
PUPD_SEL
Pullup / Pulldown Selection Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C014
RXACTIVE
RXACTIVE Control Register
Privileged mode
0x01E2 C018
PWRDN
PWRDN Control Register
Privileged mode
58
Suspend Source Register
Register Access
Device Configuration
Privileged mode
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
4.3
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Pullup/Pulldown Resistors
Proper board design should ensure that input pins to the device always be at a valid logic level and not
floating. This may be achieved via pullup/pulldown resistors. The device features internal pullup (IPU) and
internal pulldown (IPD) resistors on most pins to eliminate the need, unless otherwise noted, for external
pullup/pulldown resistors.
An external pullup/pulldown resistor needs to be used in the following situations:
• Boot and Configuration Pins: If the pin is both routed out and 3-stated (not driven), an external
pullup/pulldown resistor is strongly recommended, even if the IPU/IPD matches the desired value/state.
• Other Input Pins: If the IPU/IPD does not match the desired value/state, use an external
pullup/pulldown resistor to pull the signal to the opposite rail.
Tips for choosing an external pullup/pulldown resistor:
• Consider the total amount of current that may pass through the pullup or pulldown resistor. Make sure
to include the leakage currents of all the devices connected to the net, as well as any internal pullup or
pulldown resistors.
• Decide a target value for the net. For a pulldown resistor, this should be below the lowest VIL level of
all inputs connected to the net. For a pullup resistor, this should be above the highest VIH level of all
inputs on the net. A reasonable choice would be to target the VOL or VOH levels for the logic family of
the limiting device; which, by definition, have margin to the VIL and VIH levels.
• Select a pullup/pulldown resistor with the largest possible value; but, which can still ensure that the net
will reach the target pulled value when maximum current from all devices on the net is flowing through
the resistor. The current to be considered includes leakage current plus, any other internal and
external pullup/pulldown resistors on the net.
• For bidirectional nets, there is an additional consideration which sets a lower limit on the resistance
value of the external resistor. Verify that the resistance is small enough that the weakest output buffer
can drive the net to the opposite logic level (including margin).
• Remember to include tolerances when selecting the resistor value.
• For pullup resistors, also remember to include tolerances on the IO supply rail.
• For most systems, a 1-kΩ resistor can be used to oppose the IPU/IPD while meeting the above
criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application.
• For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can be used to compliment the IPU/IPD on the boot and
configuration pins while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct
for their specific application.
• For more detailed information on input current (II), and the low-/high-level input voltages (VIL and VIH)
for the device, see , Recommended Operating Conditions.
• For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the peripheral/system-specific terminal
functions table.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
59
ADVANCE INFORMATION
For the boot and configuration pins, if they are both routed out and 3-stated (not driven), it is strongly
recommended that an external pullup/pulldown resistor be implemented. Although, internal
pullup/pulldown resistors exist on these pins and they may match the desired configuration value,
providing external connectivity can help ensure that valid logic levels are latched on these device boot and
configuration pins. In addition, applying external pullup/pulldown resistors on the boot and configuration
pins adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
5 Device Operating Conditions
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Junction Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (1)
Core Logic, Variable and Fixed
(CVDD, RVDD, RTC_CVDD, PLL0_VDDA , PLL1_VDDA ,
USB_CVDD ) (2)
Supply voltage ranges
I/O, 1.8V
(USB0_VDDA18, DDR_DVDD18)
-0.5 V to 1.4 V
-0.5 V to 2 V
(2)
I/O, 3.3V
(DVDD3318_A, DVDD3318_B, DVDD3318_C, USB0_VDDA33)
(2)
Oscillator inputs (OSCIN, RTC_XI), 1.2V
-0.3 V to CVDD + 0.3V
Dual-voltage LVCMOS inputs, 3.3V or 1.8V (Steady State)
-0.3V to DVDD + 0.3V
Dual-voltage LVCMOS inputs, 3.3V or 1.8V (Transient)
Input voltage (VI) ranges
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Output voltage (VO) ranges
Clamp Current
-0.5 V to 3.8V
DVDD + 20%
up to 20% of Signal
Period
USB 5V Tolerant IOs:
(USB0_DM, USB0_DP, USB0_ID)
5.25V (3)
USB0 VBUS Pin
5.50V (3)
Dual-voltage LVCMOS outputs, 3.3V or 1.8V
(Steady State)
-0.5 V to DVDD + 0.3V
Dual-voltage LVCMOS outputs, 3.3V or 1.8V
(Transient)
DVDD + 20%
up to 20% of Signal
Period
Input or Output Voltages 0.3V above or below their respective power
rails. Limit clamp current that flows through the I/O's internal diode
protection cells.
±20mA
Operating Junction Temperature ranges,
TJ
Commercial (default)
0°C to 90°C
Extended (A version)
-40°C to 105°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg
(default)
-55°C to 150°C
(1)
(2)
(3)
60
Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
All voltage values are with respect to VSS, USB0_VSSA33, USB0_VSSA, PLL0_VSSA, OSCVSS, RTC_VSS
Up to a maximum of 24 hours.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
Recommended Operating Conditions
NAME
CVDD
RVDD
RTC_CVDD
Supply
Voltage
Voltage
Input High
CONDITION
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.3V operating point
1.25
1.3
1.35
V
1.2V operating point
1.14
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
1.1V operating point
1.05
1.1
1.16
V
1.0V operating point
0.95
1.0
1.05
V
1.14
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
Internal RAM Supply Voltage
(1)
RTC Core Logic Supply Voltage
0.9
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
PLL0_VDDA
PLL0 Supply Voltage
1.14
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
PLL1_VDDA
PLL1 Supply Voltage
1.14
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
USB_CVDD
USB0 Core Logic Supply Voltage
1.14
1.2 or 1.26
1.32
V
USB0_VDDA18
USB0 PHY Supply Voltage
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
USB0_VDDA33
USB0 PHY Supply Voltage
3.15
3.3
3.45
V
DDR_DVDD18
DDR2 PHY Supply Voltage
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
0.49*
DDR_DVDD18
0.5*
DDR_DVDD1
8
0.51*
DDR_DVDD18
V
DDR_VREF
DDR2/mDDR reference voltage
DDR_ZP
DDR2/mDDR impedance control,
connected via 50Ω resistor to Vss
DVDD3318_A
Power Group A Dual-voltage IO
Supply Voltage
1.8V operating point
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
3.3V operating point
3.15
3.3
3.45
V
Power Group B Dual-voltage IO
Supply Voltage
1.8V operating point
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
3.3V operating point
3.15
3.3
3.45
V
DVDD3318_C
Power Group C Dual-voltage IO
Supply Voltage
1.8V operating point
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
3.3V operating point
3.15
3.3
3.45
V
VSS
Core Logic Digital Ground
V
PLL0_VSSA
PLL0 Ground
V
PLL1_VSSA
PLL1 Ground
OSCVSS (2)
Oscillator Ground
RTC_VSS (2)
RTC Oscillator Ground
V
USB0_VSSA
USB0 PHY Ground
V
USB0_VSSA33
USB0 PHY Ground
DVDD3318_B
Supply
Ground
DESCRIPTION
Core Logic Supply Voltage (variable)
VIH
Vss
V
0
USB
Transition
Time
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
VIL
0
0
V
V
High-level input voltage, Dual-voltage I/O, 3.3V
High-level input voltage, Dual-voltage I/O, 1.8V
Voltage
Input Low
V
ADVANCE INFORMATION
5.2
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
(3)
(3)
2
V
0.65*DVDD
V
High-level input voltage, RTC_XI
0.8*RTC_CVDD
V
High-level input voltage, OSCIN
0.8*CVDD
Low-level input voltage, Dual-voltage I/O, 3.3V (3)
V
0.8
V
0.35*DVDD
V
Low-level input voltage, RTC_XI
0.2*RTC_CVDD
V
Low-level input voltage, OSCIN
0.2*CVDD
V
5.25
V
Low-level input voltage, Dual-voltage I/O, 1.8V
(3)
USB0_VBUS
USB external charge pump input
tt
Transition time, 10%-90%, All Inputs (unless otherwise
specified in the electrical data sections)
0
0.25P
(4)
ns
The RTC provides an option for isolating the RTC_CVDD from the CVDD to reduce current leakage when the RTC is powered
independently. If these power supplies are not isolated (CTRL.SPLITPOWER=0), RTC_CVDD must be equal to or greater than CVDD.
If these power supplies are isolated (CTRL.SPLITPOWER=1), RTC_CVDD may be lower than CVDD.
When an external crystal is used oscillator (OSC_VSS, RTC_VSS) ground must be kept separate from other grounds and connected
directly to the crystal load capacitor ground. These pins are shorted to VSS on the device itself and should not be connected to VSS on
the circuit board. If a crystal is not used and the clock input is driven directly, then the oscillator VSS may be connected to board ground.
These IO specifications apply to the dual-voltage IOs only and do not apply to the DDR2/mDDR . DDR2/mDDR IOs are 1.8V IOs and
adhere to the JESD79-2A standard.
Where P = the period of the applied signal. Maintaining transition times as fast as possible is recommended to improve noise immunity
on input signals.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
61
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Commercial temperature grade
(default)
Operating
Frequency
FPLL0_SYSCLK6
Extended temperature grade (A
suffix)
CONDITION
MIN
NOM
MAX
CVDD = 1.3V
operating point
0
456
CVDD = 1.2V
operating point
0
375
CVDD = 1.1V
operating point
0
200
CVDD = 1.0V
operating point
0
100
CVDD = 1.3V
operating point
0
456
CVDD = 1.2V
operating point
0
375
CVDD = 1.1V
operating point
0
200
CVDD = 1.0V
operating point
0
100
UNIT
MHz
MHz
ADVANCE INFORMATION
62
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Junction Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER
VOH
TEST CONDITIONS
Low/full speed:
USB0_DM and USB0_DP
High speed:
USB_DM and USB_DP
High-level output voltage
(dual-voltage LVCMOS IOs at 3.3V) (1)
High-level output voltage
(dual-voltage LVCMOS IOs at 1.8V) (1)
VOL
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
2.8
USB0_VDDA33
V
360
440
mV
DVDD= 3.15V, IOH = -4 mA
2.4
V
DVDD= 3.15V, IOH = -100 mA
2.95
V
DVDD-0.45
V
DVDD= 1.65V, IOH = -2 mA
Low/full speed:
USB_DM and USB_DP
0.0
0.3
V
High speed:
USB_DM and USB_DP
-10
10
mV
DVDD= 3.15V, IOL = 4mA
0.4
V
DVDD= 3.15V, IOL = 100 mA
0.2
V
DVDD= 1.65V, IOL = 2mA
0.45
V
±9
mA
Low-level output voltage
(dual-voltage LVCMOS I/Os at 3.3V)
Low-level output voltage
(dual-voltage LVCMOS I/Os at 1.8V)
VI = VSS to DVDD without opposing
internal resistor
(1)
II
(2)
Input current
(dual-voltage LVCMOS I/Os)
Input current (DDR2/mDDR I/Os)
VI = VSS to DVDD with opposing
internal pullup resistor (3)
70
310
mA
VI = VSS to DVDD with opposing
internal pulldown resistor (3)
-75
-270
mA
VI = VSS to DVDD with opposing
internal pulldown resistor (3)
-77
-286
mA
All peripherals
-6
mA
All peripherals
6
mA
(1)
IOH
High-level output current
(dual-voltage LVCMOS I/Os)
(1)
IOL
Low-level output current
(dual-voltage LVCMOS I/Os)
Input capacitance (dual-voltage LVCMOS)
Capacit
Output capacitance (dual-voltage
ance
LVCMOS)
(1)
(2)
(3)
3
pF
3
pF
These IO specifications apply to the dual-voltage IOs only and do not apply to the DDR2/mDDR . DDR2/mDDR IOs are 1.8V IOs and
adhere to the JESD79-2A standard.
II applies to input-only pins and bi-directional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bi-directional pins, II
indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
63
ADVANCE INFORMATION
5.3
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
6.1
Parameter Information
6.1.1
Parameter Information Device-Specific Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
4.0 pF
A.
1.85 pF
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
Device Pin
(see note)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its
transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to
produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to
add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the
device pin and the input signals are driven between 0V and the appropriate IO supply rail for the signal.
Figure 6-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
6.1.1.1
Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to Vref for both "0" and "1" logic levels. For 3.3 V I/O,
Vref = 1.65 V. For 1.8 V I/O, Vref = 0.9 V.
Vref
Figure 6-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks,
VOLMAX and VOH MIN for output clocks
Figure 6-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
64
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.2
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner.
6.3.1
Power Supplies
Power-on Sequence
The device should be powered-on in the following order:
• 1) RTC (RTC_CVDD) may be powered from an external device (such as a battery) prior to all other
supplies being applied or powered-up at the same time as CVDD. If the RTC is not used, RTC_CVDD
should be connected to CVDD. RTC_CVDD should not be left unpowered while CVDD is powered.
• 2a) All variable 1.2V - 1.0V core logic supplies (CVDD)
• 2b) All static 1.2V logic supplies (RVDD, VDDA_12_PLL0, VDDA_12_PLL1, USB_CVDD ). If voltage
scaling is not used on the device, groups 2a) and 2b) can be controlled from the same power supply
and powered up together.
• 3) All static 1.8V IO supplies (DVDD18, DDR_DVDD18, USB0_VDDA18 ) and any of the LVCMOS IO
supply groups used at 1.8V nominal (DVDD3318_A, DVDD3318_B, or DVDD3318_C).
• 4) All analog 3.3V PHY supplies (USB0_VDDA33; this is not required if USB0 is not used) and any of
the LVCMOS IO supply groups used at 3.3V nominal (DVDD3318_A, DVDD3318_B, or
DVDD3318_C).
There is no specific required voltage ramp rate for any of the supplies as long as the LVCMOS supplies
operated at 3.3V (DVDD3318_A, DVDD3318_B, or DVDD3318_C) never exceed the STATIC 1.8V
supplies by more than 2 volts.
RESET must be maintained active until all power supplies have reached their nominal values.
6.3.2
Power-off Sequence
The power supplies can be powered-off in any order as long as LVCMOS supplies operated at 3.3V
(DVDD3318_A, DVDD3318_B, or DVDD3318_C) never exceed static 1.8V supplies by more than 2 volts.
There is no specific required voltage ramp down rate for any of the supplies (except as required to meet
the above mentioned voltage condition).
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
65
ADVANCE INFORMATION
6.3
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.4
6.4.1
www.ti.com
Reset
Power-On Reset (POR)
A power-on reset (POR) is required to place the device in a known good state after power-up. Power-On
Reset is initiated by bringing RESET and TRST low at the same time. POR sets all of the device internal
logic to its default state. All pins are tri-stated with the exception of RESETOUT which remains active
through the reset sequence. RESETOUT is an output for use by other controllers in the system that
indicates the device is currently in reset.
RTCK is maintained active through a POR.
A
•
•
•
•
•
summary of the effects of Power-On Reset is given below:
All internal logic (including emulation logic and the PLL logic) is reset to its default state
Internal memory is not maintained through a POR
RESETOUT goes active
All device pins go to a high-impedance state
The RTC peripheral is not reset during a POR. A software sequence is required to reset the RTC
ADVANCE INFORMATION
A watchdog reset triggers a POR.
6.4.2
Warm Reset
A warm reset provides a limited reset to the device. Warm Reset is initiated by bringing only RESET low
(TRST is maintained high through a warm reset). Warm reset sets certain portions of the device to their
default state while leaving others unaltered. All pins are tri-stated with the exception of RESETOUT which
remains active through the reset sequence. RESETOUT is an output for use by other controllers in the
system that indicates the device is currently in reset.
RTCK is maintained active through a POR.
A
•
•
•
•
•
66
summary of the effects of Warm Reset is given below:
All internal logic (except for the emulation logic and the PLL logic) is reset to its default state
Internal memory is maintained through a warm reset
RESETOUT goes active
All device pins go to a high-impedance state
The RTC peripheral is not reset during a warm reset. A software sequence is required to reset the
RTC
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.4.3
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Reset Electrical Data Timings
Table 6-1 assumes testing over the recommended operating conditions.
Table 6-1. Reset Timing Requirements ( (1),
NO.
(2)
)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tw(RSTL)
Pulse width, RESET/TRST low
100
100
100
ns
2
tsu(BPV-RSTH)
Setup time, boot pins valid before RESET/TRST high
20
20
20
ns
3
th(RSTH-BPV)
Hold time, boot pins valid after RESET/TRST high
20
20
20
ns
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
td(RSTH-RESETOUTH) RESET high to RESETOUT high; Warm reset
td(RSTL-RESETOUTL)
14
16
20
RESET high to RESETOUT high; Power-on Reset
14
16
20
Delay time, RESET/TRST low to RESETOUT low
14
16
20
cycles (3)
ns
RESETOUT is multiplexed with other pin functions. See the Terminal Functions table, Table 3-3 for details.
For power-on reset (POR), the reset timings in this table refer to RESET and TRST together. For warm reset, the reset timings in this
table refer to RESET only (TRST is held high).
OSCIN cycles.
Power
Supplies
Ramping
ADVANCE INFORMATION
4
Power Supplies Stable
Clock Source Stable
OSCIN
1
RESET
TRST
4
RESETOUT
3
2
Boot Pins
Config
Figure 6-4. Power-On Reset (RESET and TRST active) Timing
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
67
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Power Supplies Stable
OSCIN
TRST
1
RESET
5
4
RESETOUT
3
2
Boot Pins
Driven or Hi-Z
Config
Figure 6-5. Warm Reset (RESET active, TRST high) Timing
ADVANCE INFORMATION
68
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.5
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Crystal Oscillator or External Clock Input
The device includes two choices to provide an external clock input, which is fed to the on-chip PLLs to
generate high-frequency system clocks. These options are illustrated in Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7. For
input clock frequencies between 12 and 20 MHz, a crystal with 80 ohm max ESR is recommended. For
input clock frequencies between 20 and 30 MHz, a crystal with 60 ohm max ESR is recommended.
Typical C1, C2 values are 10-20 pF.
Figure 6-6 illustrates the option that uses on-chip 1.2V oscillator with external crystal circuit. Figure 6-7
illustrates the option that uses an external 1.2V clock input.
C2
OSCIN
Clock Input
to PLL
X1
OSCOUT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
C1
OSCVSS
Figure 6-6. On-Chip Oscillator
Table 6-2. Oscillator Timing Requirements
PARAMETER
fosc
Oscillator frequency range (OSCIN/OSCOUT)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MIN
MAX
UNIT
12
30
MHz
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
69
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
OSCIN
NC
Clock
Input
to PLL
OSCOUT
OSCVSS
Figure 6-7. External 1.2V Clock Source
Table 6-3. OSCIN Timing Requirements for an Externally Driven Clock
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PARAMETER
fOSCIN
OSCIN frequency range
tc(OSCIN)
Cycle time, external clock driven on OSCIN
MIN
MAX
UNIT
12
50
MHz
20
ns
tw(OSCINH) Pulse width high, external clock on OSCIN
0.4 tc(OSCIN)
ns
tw(OSCINL) Pulse width low, external clock on OSCIN
0.4 tc(OSCIN)
ns
(1)
ns
ns
tt(OSCIN)
Transition time, OSCIN
0.25P
tj(OSCIN)
Period jitter, OSCIN
0.02P (1)
(1)
6.6
Where P = the period of the applied signal. Maintaining transition times as fast as possible is recommended to improve noise immunity
on input signals.
Clock PLLs
The device has two PLL controllers that provide clocks to different parts of the system. PLL0 provides
clocks (though various dividers) to most of the components of the device. PLL1 provides clocks to the
mDDR/DDR2 Controller and provides an alternate clock source for the ASYNC3 clock domain. This allows
the peripherals on the ASYNC3 clock domain to be immune to frequency scaling operation on PLL0.
The PLL controller provides the following:
• Glitch-Free Transitions (on changing clock settings)
• Domain Clocks Alignment
• Clock Gating
• PLL power down
The various clock outputs given by the controller are as follows:
• Domain Clocks: SYSCLK [1:n]
• Auxiliary Clock from reference clock source: AUXCLK
Various dividers that can be used are as follows:
• Post-PLL Divider: POSTDIV
• SYSCLK Divider: D1, ¼, Dn
Various other controls supported are as follows:
• PLL Multiplier Control: PLLM
• Software programmable PLL Bypass: PLLEN
70
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.6.1
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
PLL Device-Specific Information
The PLL requires some external filtering components to reduce power supply noise as shown in
Figure 6-8.
1.14V - 1.32V
PLLn_VDDA
50R
0.1
µF
VSS
50R
0.01
µF
PLLn_VSSA
Ferrite Bead: Murata BLM31PG500SN1L or Equivalent
Figure 6-8. PLL External Filtering Components
The PLLs are disabled by default after a device reset. They must be configured by software according to
the allowable operating conditions listed in Table 6-4 before enabling the device to run from the PLL by
setting PLLEN = 1.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
71
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The input to the PLL is either from the on-chip oscillator or from an external clock on the OSCIN pin. PLL0
outputs seven clocks that have programmable divider options. PLL1 outputs three clocks that have
programmable divider options. Figure 6-9 illustrates the high-level view of the PLL Topology.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
PLL Controller 0
PLLCTL[EXTCLKSRC]
PLL1_SYSCLK3
1
PLLCTL[PLLEN]
PLLCTL[CLKMODE]
OSCIN
Square
Wave
Crystal
0
0
PLLDIV1 (/1)
SYSCLK1
PLLDIV2 (/2)
SYSCLK2
PLLDIV4 (/4)
SYSCLK4
PLLDIV5 (/3)
SYSCLK5
PLLDIV6 (/1)
SYSCLK6
PLLDIV7 (/6)
SYSCLK7
PLLDIV3 (/3)
SYSCLK3
1
PREDIV
POSTDIV
PLL
1
0
PLLM
EMIFA
Internal
Clock
Source
0
1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DIV4.5
CFGCHIP3[EMA_CLKSRC]
AUXCLK
PLLC0 OBSCLK
(CLKOUT Pin)
DIV4.5
OSCDIV
14h
17h
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
SYSCLK1
SYSCLK2
SYSCLK3
SYSCLK4
SYSCLK5
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK7
PLLC1 OBSCLK
OCSEL[OCSRC]
PLLCTL[PLLEN]
0
POSTDIV
PLL
1
PLLM
SYSCLK1
SYSCLK2
SYSCLK3
PLL Controller 1
PLLDIV2 (/2)
SYSCLK2
PLLDIV3 (/3)
SYSCLK3
PLLDIV1 (/1)
SYSCLK1
DDR2/mDDR
Internal
Clock
Source
14h
17h
18h
19h
OSCDIV
PLLC1 OBSCLK
OCSEL[OCSRC]
Figure 6-9. PLL Topology
72
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-4. Allowed PLL Operating Conditions (PLL0 and PLL1)
NO.
PARAMETER
1
PLLRST: Assertion time during initialization
2
Lock time: The time that the application has to
wait for the PLL to acquire lock before setting
PLLEN, after changing PREDIV, PLLM, or
OSCIN
Default
Value
MIN
MAX
UNIT
N/A
1000
N/A
ns
2000 N
m
where N = Pre-Divider Ratio
Max PLL Lock Time =
N/A
N/A
OSCIN
cycles
M = PLL Multiplier
(1)
3
PREDIV: Pre-divider value
4
PLLREF: PLL input frequency
5
PLLM: PLL multiplier values
x20
x4
x32
6
PLLOUT: PLL output frequency
N/A
400
600 (1)
MHz
7
POSTDIV: Post-divider value
/1
/2 (1)
/32
ns
/1
/32
ns
12
50
MHz
PLL post divider / 2 must be used. The /4.5 clock path can be used to generate an EMIF clock from the undivided (i.e. 600 MHz) PLL
output clock.
6.6.2
Device Clock Generation
PLL0 is controlled by PLL Controller 0 and PLL1 is controlled by PLL Controller 1. PLLC0 and PLLC1
manage the clock ratios, alignment, and gating for the system clocks to the chip. The PLLCs are
responsible for controlling all modes of the PLL through software, in terms of pre-division of the clock
inputs (PLLC0 only), multiply factors within the PLLs, and post-division for each of the chip-level clocks
from the PLLs outputs. PLLC0 also controls reset propagation through the chip, clock alignment, and test
points.
PLLC0 provides clocks for the majority of the system but PLLC1 provides clocks to the mDDR/DDR2
Controller and the ASYNC3 clock domain to provide frequency scaling immunity to a defined set or
peripherals. The ASYNC3 clock domain can either derive its clock from PLL1_SYSCLK2 (for frequency
scaling immunity from PLL0) or from PLL0_SYSCLK2 (for synchronous timing with PLL0) depending on
the application requirements. In addition, some peripherals have specific clock options independent of the
ASYNC clock domain.
6.6.3
Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling (DVFS)
The processor supports multiple operating points by scaling voltage and frequency to minimize power
consumption for a given level of processor performance.
Frequency scaling is achieved by modifying the setting of the PLL controllers’ multipliers, post-dividers
(POSTDIV), and system clock dividers (SYSCLKn). Modification of the POSTDIV and SYSCLK values
does not require relocking the PLL and provides lower latency to switch between operating points, but at
the expense of the frequencies being limited by the integer divide values (only the divide values are
altered the PLL multiplier is left unmodified). Non integer divide frequency values can be achieved by
changing both the multiplier and the divide values, but when the PLL multiplier is changed the PLL must
relock, incurring additional latency to change between operating points. Detailed information on modifying
the PLL Controller settings can be found in SPRUGU4 - AM1806 ARM Microprocessor System Reference
Guide .
Voltage scaling is enabled from outside the device by controlling an external voltage regulator. The
processor may communicate with the regulator using GPIOs, I2C or some other interface. When switching
between voltage-frequency operating points, the voltage must always support the desired frequency.
When moving from a high-performance operating point to a lower performance operating point, the
frequency should be lowered first followed by the voltage. When moving from a low-performance operating
point to a higher performance operating point, the voltage should be raised first followed by the frequency.
Voltage operating points refer to the CVdd voltage at that point. Other static supplies must be maintained
at their nominal voltages at all operating points.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
73
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
/1
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
The maximum voltage slew rate for CVdd supply changes is 1 mV/us.
For additional information on power management solutions from TI for this processor, follow the Power
Management link in the Product Folder on www.ti.com for this processor.
The processor supports multiple clock domains some of which have clock ratio requirements to each
other. PLL0_SYSCLK2:PLL0_SYSCLK4:PLL0_SYSCLK6 are synchronous to each other and the
SYSCLKn dividers must always be configured such that the ratio between these domains is 2:4:1. The
ASYNC and ASYNC3 clock domains are asynchronous to the other clock domains and have no specific
ratio requirement.
The table below summarizes the maximum internal clock frequencies at each of the voltage operating
points.
Table 6-5. Maximum Internal Clock Frequencies at Each Voltage Operating Point
CLOCK SOURCE
CLOCK DOMAIN
1.3V NOM
1.2V NOM
1.1V NOM
1.0V NOM
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PLL0_SYSCLK1
Not used on this processor
-
-
-
-
PLL0_SYSCLK2
SYSCLK2 clock domain peripherals and optional
clock source for ASYNC3 clock domain peripherals
228 MHz
187.5 MHz
100 MHz
50 MHz
PLL0_SYSCLK3
Optional clock for ASYNC1 clock domain
133 MHz
133 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
PLL0_SYSCLK4
SYSCLK4 domain peripherals
114 MHz
93.75 MHz
50 MHz
25 MHz
PLL0_SYSCLK5
Not used on this processor
-
-
-
-
PLL0_SYSCLK6
ARM subsystem
456 MHz
375 MHz
200 MHz
100 MHz
PLL0_SYSCLK7
Not used on this processor
-
-
-
-
PLL1_SYSCLK1
DDR2/mDDR Interface clock source (memory
interface clock is one-half of the value shown)
300 MHz
300 MHz
300 MHz
266 MHz
PLL1_SYSCLK2
Optional clock source for ASYNC3 clock domain
peripherals
152 MHz
150 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
PLL1_SYSCLK3
Alternate clock source input to PLL Controller 0
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
McASP AUXCLK
Bypass clock source for the McASP
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
PLL0_AUXCLK
Bypass clock source for the USB0
48 MHz
48 MHz
48 MHz
48 MHz
ASYNC
ASYNC Clock Domain (EMIFA)
100 MHz
100 MHz
66.6 MHz
33.3 MHz
ASYNC2
ASYNC2 Clock Domain (multiple peripherals)
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
ASYNC3
ASYNC3 Clock Domain (multiple peripherals)
152 MHz
150 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
Some interfaces have specific limitations on supported modes/speeds at each operating point. See the
corresponding peripheral sections of this document for more information.
TI provides software components (called the Power Manager) to perform DVFS and abstract the task from
the user. The Power Manager controls changing operating points (both frequency and voltage) and
handles the related tasks involved such as informing/controlling peripherals to provide graceful transitions
between operating points.
74
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.7
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Interrupts
6.7.1
ARM CPU Interrupts
The ARM9 CPU core supports 2 direct interrupts: FIQ and IRQ. The ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)
extends the number of interrupts to 100, and provides features like programmable masking, priority,
hardware nesting support, and interrupt vector generation.
ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC) Interrupt Signal Hierarchy
The ARM Interrupt controller organizes interrupts into the following hierarchy:
• Peripheral Interrupt Requests
– Individual Interrupt Sources from Peripherals
• 101 System Interrupts
– One or more Peripheral Interrupt Requests are combined (fixed configuration) to generate a
System Interrupt.
– After prioritization, the AINTC will provide an interrupt vector based unique to each System Interrupt
• 32 Interrupt Channels
– Each System Interrupt is mapped to one of the 32 Interrupt Channels
– Channel Number determines the first level of prioritization, Channel 0 is highest priority and 31
lowest.
– If more than one system interrupt is mapped to a channel, priority within the channel is determined
by system interrupt number (0 highest priority)
• Host Interrupts (FIQ and IRQ)
– Interrupt Channels 0 and 1 generate the ARM FIQ interrupt
– Interrupt Channels 2 through 31 Generate the ARM IRQ interrupt
• Debug Interrupts
– Two Debug Interrupts are supported and can be used to trigger events in the debug subsystem
– Sources can be selected from any of the System Interrupts or Host Interrupts
6.7.1.2
AINTC Hardware Vector Generation
The AINTC also generates an interrupt vector in hardware for both IRQ and FIQ host interrupts. This may
be used to accelerate interrupt dispatch. A unique vector is generated for each of the 100 system
interrupts. The vector is computed in hardware as:
VECTOR = BASE + (SYSTEM INTERRUPT NUMBER × SIZE)
Where BASE and SIZE are programmable. The computed vector is a 32-bit address which may
dispatched to using a single instruction of type LDR PC, [PC, #-<offset_12>] at the FIQ and IRQ vector
locations (0xFFFF0018 and 0xFFFF001C respectively).
6.7.1.3
AINTC Hardware Interrupt Nesting Support
Interrupt nesting occurs when an interrupt service routine re-enables interrupts, to allow the CPU to
interrupt the ISR if a higher priority event occurs. The AINTC provides hardware support to facilitate
interrupt nesting. It supports both global and per host interrupt (FIQ and IRQ in this case) automatic
nesting. If enabled, the AINTC will automatically update an internal nesting register that temporarily masks
interrupts at and below the priority of the current interrupt channel. Then if the ISR re-enables interrupts;
only higher priority channels will be able to interrupt it. The nesting level is restored by the ISR by writing
to the nesting level register on completion. Support for nesting can be enabled/disabled by software, with
the option of automatic nesting on a global or per host interrupt basis; or manual nesting.
6.7.1.4
AINTC System Interrupt Assignments
System Interrupt assignments are listed in Table 6-6
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
75
ADVANCE INFORMATION
6.7.1.1
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-6. AINTC System Interrupt Assignments
System Interrupt
ADVANCE INFORMATION
76
Interrupt Name
Source
0
COMMTX
ARM
1
COMMRX
ARM
2
NINT
ARM
3
PRU_EVTOUT0
PRUSS Interrupt
4
PRU_EVTOUT1
PRUSS Interrupt
5
PRU_EVTOUT2
PRUSS Interrupt
6
PRU_EVTOUT3
PRUSS Interrupt
7
PRU_EVTOUT4
PRUSS Interrupt
8
PRU_EVTOUT5
PRUSS Interrupt
9
PRU_EVTOUT6
PRUSS Interrupt
10
PRU_EVTOUT7
PRUSS Interrupt
11
EDMA3_0_CC0_INT0
EDMA3_0 Channel Controller 0 Shadow Region 0 Transfer
Completion Interrupt
12
EDMA3_0_CC0_ERRINT
EDMA3_0 Channel Controller 0 Error Interrupt
13
EDMA3_0_TC0_ERRINT
EDMA3_0 Transfer Controller 0 Error Interrupt
14
EMIFA_INT
EMIFA
15
IIC0_INT
I2C0
16
MMCSD0_INT0
MMCSD0 MMC/SD Interrupt
17
MMCSD0_INT1
MMCSD0 SDIO Interrupt
18
PSC0_ALLINT
PSC0
19
RTC_IRQS[1:0]
RTC
20
SPI0_INT
SPI0
21
T64P0_TINT12
Timer64P0 Interrupt 12
22
T64P0_TINT34
Timer64P0 Interrupt 34
23
T64P1_TINT12
Timer64P1 Interrupt 12
24
T64P1_TINT34
Timer64P1 Interrupt 34
25
UART0_INT
UART0
26
-
Reserved
27
PROTERR
SYSCFG Protection Shared Interrupt
28
-
Reserved
29
-
Reserved
30
-
Reserved
31
-
Reserved
32
EDMA3_0_TC1_ERRINT
EDMA3_0 Transfer Controller 1 Error Interrupt
33
-
Reserved
34
-
Reserved
35
-
Reserved
36
-
Reserved
37
-
Reserved
38
-
Reserved
39
-
Reserved
40
DDR2_MEMERR
DDR2 Controller
42
GPIO_B0INT
GPIO Bank 0 Interrupt
43
GPIO_B1INT
GPIO Bank 1 Interrupt
44
GPIO_B2INT
GPIO Bank 2 Interrupt
45
GPIO_B3INT
GPIO Bank 3 Interrupt
46
GPIO_B4INT
GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Interrupt Name
Source
47
GPIO_B5INT
GPIO Bank 5 Interrupt
48
GPIO_B6INT
GPIO Bank 6 Interrupt
49
GPIO_B7INT
GPIO Bank 7 Interrupt
50
GPIO_B8INT
GPIO Bank 8 Interrupt
51
IIC1_INT
I2C1
52
LCDC_INT
LCD Controller
53
UART_INT1
UART1
54
MCASP_INT
McASP0 Combined RX / TX Interrupts
55
PSC1_ALLINT
PSC1
56
SPI1_INT
SPI1
57
UHPI_ARMINT
UHPI ARM Interrupt
58
USB0_INT
USB0 Interrupt
59
-
Reserved
60
-
Reserved
61
UART2_INT
UART2
62
-
Reserved
63
EHRPWM0
HiResTimer / PWM0 Interrupt
64
EHRPWM0TZ
HiResTimer / PWM0 Trip Zone Interrupt
65
EHRPWM1
HiResTimer / PWM1 Interrupt
66
EHRPWM1TZ
HiResTimer / PWM1 Trip Zone Interrupt
67
-
Reserved
68
T64P2_ALL
Timer64P2 - Combined TINT12 and TINT34
69
ECAP0
ECAP0
70
ECAP1
ECAP1
71
ECAP2
ECAP2
72
MMCSD1_INT0
MMCSD1 MMC/SD Interrupt
73
MMCSD1_INT1
MMCSD1 SDIO Interrupt
74
T64P0_CMPINT0
Timer64P0 - Compare 0
75
T64P0_CMPINT1
Timer64P0 - Compare 1
76
T64P0_CMPINT2
Timer64P0 - Compare 2
77
T64P0_CMPINT3
Timer64P0 - Compare 3
78
T64P0_CMPINT4
Timer64P0 - Compare 4
79
T64P0_CMPINT5
Timer64P0 - Compare 5
80
T64P0_CMPINT6
Timer64P0 - Compare 6
81
T64P0_CMPINT7
Timer64P0 - Compare 7
82
T64P1_CMPINT0
Timer64P1 - Compare 0
83
T64P1_CMPINT1
Timer64P1 - Compare 1
84
T64P1_CMPINT2
Timer64P1 - Compare 2
85
T64P1_CMPINT3
Timer64P1 - Compare 3
86
T64P1_CMPINT4
Timer64P1 - Compare 4
87
T64P1_CMPINT5
Timer64P1 - Compare 5
88
T64P1_CMPINT6
Timer64P1 - Compare 6
89
T64P1_CMPINT7
Timer64P1 - Compare 7
90
ARMCLKSTOPREQ
PSC0
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-6. AINTC System Interrupt Assignments (continued)
System Interrupt
77
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-6. AINTC System Interrupt Assignments (continued)
System Interrupt
ADVANCE INFORMATION
78
Interrupt Name
Source
91
uPP_ALLINT
uPP Combined Interrupt
•
Channel I End-of-Line Interrupt
•
Channel I End-of-Window Interrupt
•
Channel I DMA Access Interrupt
•
Channel I Overflow-Underrun Interrupt
•
Channel I DMA Programming Error Interrupt
•
Channel Q End-of-Line Interrupt
•
Channel Q End-of-Window Interrupt
•
Channel Q DMA Access Interrupt
•
Channel Q Overflow-Underrun Interrupt
•
Channel Q DMA Programming Error Interrupt
92
VPIF_ALLINT
VPIF Combined Interrupt
•
Channel 0 Frame Interrupt
•
Channel 1 Frame Interrupt
•
Channel 2 Frame Interrupt
•
Channel 3 Frame Interrupt
•
Error Interrupt
93
EDMA3_1_CC0_INT0
EDMA3_1 Channel Controller 0 Shadow Region 0 Transfer
Completion Interrupt
94
EDMA3_1_CC0_ERRINT
EDMA3_1Channel Controller 0 Error Interrupt
95
EDMA3_1_TC0_ERRINT
EDMA3_1 Transfer Controller 0 Error Interrupt
96
T64P3_ALL
Timer64P 3 - Combined TINT12 and TINT34
97
MCBSP0_RINT
McBSP0 Receive Interrupt
98
MCBSP0_XINT
McBSP0 Transmit Interrupt
99
MCBSP1_RINT
McBSP1 Receive Interrupt
100
MCBSP1_XINT
McBSP1 Transmit Interrupt
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.7.1.5
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
AINTC Memory Map
Table 6-7. AINTC Memory Map
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0xFFFE E000
REV
Revision Register
0xFFFE E004
CR
Control Register
0xFFFE E008 - 0xFFFE E00F
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E010
GER
Global Enable Register
0xFFFE E014 - 0xFFFE E01B
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E01C
GNLR
Global Nesting Level Register
0xFFFE E020
SISR
System Interrupt Status Indexed Set Register
0xFFFE E024
SICR
System Interrupt Status Indexed Clear Register
0xFFFE E028
EISR
System Interrupt Enable Indexed Set Register
0xFFFE E02C
EICR
System Interrupt Enable Indexed Clear Register
0xFFFE E030
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E034
HIEISR
Host Interrupt Enable Indexed Set Register
0xFFFE E038
HIDISR
Host Interrupt Enable Indexed Clear Register
0xFFFE E03C - 0xFFFE E04F
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E050
VBR
Vector Base Register
0xFFFE E054
VSR
Vector Size Register
0xFFFE E058
VNR
Vector Null Register
0xFFFE E05C - 0xFFFE E07F
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E080
GPIR
Global Prioritized Index Register
0xFFFE E084
GPVR
Global Prioritized Vector Register
0xFFFE E088 - 0xFFFE E1FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E200
SRSR[0]
System Interrupt Status Raw / Set Registers
0xFFFE E204
SRSR[1]
0xFFFE E208
SRSR[2]
0xFFFE E20C
SRSR[3]
0xFFFE E210- 0xFFFE E27F
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E280
SECR[0]
System Interrupt Status Enabled / Clear Registers
0xFFFE E284
SECR[1]
0xFFFE E288
SECR[2]
0xFFFE E28C
SECR[3]
0xFFFE E290 - 0xFFFE E2FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E300
ESR[0]
System Interrupt Enable Set Registers
0xFFFE E304
ESR[1]
0xFFFE E308
ESR[2]
0xFFFE E30C
ESR[3]
0xFFFE E310 - 0xFFFE E37F
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E380
ECR[0]
System Interrupt Enable Clear Registers
0xFFFE E384
ECR[1]
0xFFFE E388
ECR[2]
0xFFFE E38C
ECR[3]
0xFFFE E390 - 0xFFFE E3FF
-
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
Reserved
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
79
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-7. AINTC Memory Map (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0xFFFE E400 - 0xFFFE E45B
CMR[0]
0xFFFE E404
CMR[1]
0xFFFE E408
CMR[2]
0xFFFE E40C
CMR[3]
0xFFFE E410
CMR[4]
0xFFFE E414
CMR[5]
0xFFFE E418
CMR[6]
0xFFFE E41C
CMR[7]
0xFFFE E420
CMR[8]
0xFFFE E424
CMR[9]
0xFFFE E428
CMR[10]
0xFFFE E42C
CMR[11]
0xFFFE E430
CMR[12]
0xFFFE E434
CMR[13]
0xFFFE E438
CMR[14]
0xFFFE E43C
CMR[15]
0xFFFE E440
CMR[16]
0xFFFE E444
CMR[17]
0xFFFE E448
CMR[18]
0xFFFE E44C
CMR[19]
0xFFFE E450
CMR[20]
0xFFFE E454
CMR[21]
0xFFFE E458
CMR[22]
0xFFFE E45C
CMR[23]
0xFFFE E460
CMR[24]
0xFFFE E464
CMR[25]
0xFFFE E468 - 0xFFFE E8FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE E900
HIPIR[0]
Host Interrupt Prioritized Index Registers
0xFFFE E904
HIPIR[1]
0xFFFE E908 - 0xFFFE EEFF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE EF00
DSR[0]
Debug Select Registers
0xFFFE EF04
DSR[1]
0xFFFE EF08 - 0xFFFE F0FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE F100
HINLR[0]
Host Interrupt Nesting Level Registers
0xFFFE F104
HINLR[1]
0xFFFE F108 - 0xFFFE F4FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE F500
HIER[0]
Host Interrupt Enable Register
0xFFFE F504 - 0xFFFE F5FF
-
Reserved
0xFFFE F600
HIPVR[0] -
Host Interrupt Prioritized Vector Registers
0xFFFE F604
HIPVR[1]
0xFFFE F608 - 0xFFFE FFFF
-
80
Channel Map Registers
Reserved
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.8
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
The Power and Sleep Controllers (PSC) are responsible for managing transitions of system power on/off,
clock on/off, resets (device level and module level). It is used primarily to provide granular power control
for on chip modules (peripherals and CPU). A PSC module consists of a Global PSC (GPSC) and a set of
Local PSCs (LPSCs). The GPSC contains memory mapped registers, PSC interrupts, a state machine for
each peripheral/module it controls. An LPSC is associated with every module that is controlled by the PSC
and provides clock and reset control.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The PSC includes the following features:
• Provides a software interface to:
– Control module clock enable/disable
– Control module reset
– Control CPU local reset
• Supports IcePick emulation features: power, clock and reset
PSC0 controls 16 local PSCs.
PSC1 controls 32 local PSCs.
Table 6-8. Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) Registers
PSC0 BYTE ADDRESS PSC1 BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C1 0000
0x01E2 7000
REVID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information Register
0x01C1 0018
0x01E2 7018
INTEVAL
Interrupt Evaluation Register
0x01C1 0040
0x01E2 7040
MERRPR0
Module Error Pending Register 0 (module 0-15) (PSC0)
0x01C1 0050
0x01E2 7050
MERRCR0
0x01C1 0060
0x01E2 7060
PERRPR
Power Error Pending Register
0x01C1 0068
0x01E2 7068
PERRCR
Power Error Clear Register
0x01C1 0120
0x01E2 7120
PTCMD
Power Domain Transition Command Register
0x01C1 0128
0x01E2 7128
PTSTAT
Power Domain Transition Status Register
0x01C1 0200
0x01E2 7200
PDSTAT0
Power Domain 0 Status Register
0x01C1 0204
0x01E2 7204
PDSTAT1
Power Domain 1 Status Register
0x01C1 0300
0x01E2 7300
PDCTL0
Power Domain 0 Control Register
0x01C1 0304
0x01E2 7304
PDCTL1
Power Domain 1 Control Register
0x01C1 0400
0x01E2 7400
PDCFG0
Power Domain 0 Configuration Register
0x01C1 0404
0x01E2 7404
PDCFG1
Power Domain 1 Configuration Register
0x01C1 0800
0x01E2 7800
MDSTAT0
Module 0 Status Register
0x01C1 0804
0x01E2 7804
MDSTAT1
Module 1 Status Register
0x01C1 0808
0x01E2 7808
MDSTAT2
Module 2 Status Register
0x01C1 080C
0x01E2 780C
MDSTAT3
Module 3 Status Register
0x01C1 0810
0x01E2 7810
MDSTAT4
Module 4 Status Register
0x01C1 0814
0x01E2 7814
MDSTAT5
Module 5 Status Register
0x01C1 0818
0x01E2 7818
MDSTAT6
Module 6 Status Register
0x01C1 081C
0x01E2 781C
MDSTAT7
Module 7 Status Register
0x01C1 0820
0x01E2 7820
MDSTAT8
Module 8 Status Register
0x01C1 0824
0x01E2 7824
MDSTAT9
Module 9 Status Register
0x01C1 0828
0x01E2 7828
MDSTAT10
Module 10 Status Register
0x01C1 082C
0x01E2 782C
MDSTAT11
Module 11 Status Register
0x01C1 0830
0x01E2 7830
MDSTAT12
Module 12 Status Register
0x01C1 0834
0x01E2 7834
MDSTAT13
Module 13 Status Register
Module Error Pending Register 0 (module 0-31) (PSC1)
Module Error Clear Register 0 (module 0-15) (PSC0)
Module Error Clear Register 0 (module 0-31) (PSC1)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
81
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-8. Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) Registers (continued)
PSC0 BYTE ADDRESS PSC1 BYTE ADDRESS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
82
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C1 0838
0x01E2 7838
MDSTAT14
Module 14 Status Register
0x01C1 083C
0x01E2 783C
MDSTAT15
Module 15 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7840
MDSTAT16
Module 16 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7844
MDSTAT17
Module 17 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7848
MDSTAT18
Module 18 Status Register
-
0x01E2 784C
MDSTAT19
Module 19 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7850
MDSTAT20
Module 20 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7854
MDSTAT21
Module 21 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7858
MDSTAT22
Module 22 Status Register
-
0x01E2 785C
MDSTAT23
Module 23 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7860
MDSTAT24
Module 24 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7864
MDSTAT25
Module 25 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7868
MDSTAT26
Module 26 Status Register
-
0x01E2 786C
MDSTAT27
Module 27 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7870
MDSTAT28
Module 28 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7874
MDSTAT29
Module 29 Status Register
-
0x01E2 7878
MDSTAT30
Module 30 Status Register
-
0x01E2 787C
MDSTAT31
Module 31 Status Register
0x01C1 0A00
0x01E2 7A00
MDCTL0
Module 0 Control Register
0x01C1 0A04
0x01E2 7A04
MDCTL1
Module 1 Control Register
0x01C1 0A08
0x01E2 7A08
MDCTL2
Module 2 Control Register
0x01C1 0A0C
0x01E2 7A0C
MDCTL3
Module 3 Control Register
0x01C1 0A10
0x01E2 7A10
MDCTL4
Module 4 Control Register
0x01C1 0A14
0x01E2 7A14
MDCTL5
Module 5 Control Register
0x01C1 0A18
0x01E2 7A18
MDCTL6
Module 6 Control Register
0x01C1 0A1C
0x01E2 7A1C
MDCTL7
Module 7 Control Register
0x01C1 0A20
0x01E2 7A20
MDCTL8
Module 8 Control Register
0x01C1 0A24
0x01E2 7A24
MDCTL9
Module 9 Control Register
0x01C1 0A28
0x01E2 7A28
MDCTL10
Module 10 Control Register
0x01C1 0A2C
0x01E2 7A2C
MDCTL11
Module 11 Control Register
0x01C1 0A30
0x01E2 7A30
MDCTL12
Module 12 Control Register
0x01C1 0A34
0x01E2 7A34
MDCTL13
Module 13 Control Register
0x01C1 0A38
0x01E2 7A38
MDCTL14
Module 14 Control Register
0x01C1 0A3C
0x01E2 7A3C
MDCTL15
Module 15 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A40
MDCTL16
Module 16 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A44
MDCTL17
Module 17 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A48
MDCTL18
Module 18 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A4C
MDCTL19
Module 19 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A50
MDCTL20
Module 20 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A54
MDCTL21
Module 21 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A58
MDCTL22
Module 22 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A5C
MDCTL23
Module 23 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A60
MDCTL24
Module 24 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A64
MDCTL25
Module 25 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A68
MDCTL26
Module 26 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A6C
MDCTL27
Module 27 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A70
MDCTL28
Module 28 Control Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-8. Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) Registers (continued)
PSC0 BYTE ADDRESS PSC1 BYTE ADDRESS
6.8.1
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
-
0x01E2 7A74
MDCTL29
Module 29 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A78
MDCTL30
Module 30 Control Register
-
0x01E2 7A7C
MDCTL31
Module 31 Control Register
Power Domain and Module Topology
The device includes two PSC modules.
Each PSC module controls clock states for several of the on chip modules, controllers and interconnect
components. Table 6-9 and Table 6-10 lists the set of peripherals/modules that are controlled by the PSC,
the power domain they are associated with, the LPSC assignment and the default (power-on reset)
module states. See the device-specific data manual for the peripherals available on a given device. The
module states and terminology are defined in Section 6.8.1.1.
LPSC
Number
Module Name
Power Domain
Default Module State
Auto Sleep/Wake Only
0
EDMA3 Channel Controller 0
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
1
EDMA3 Transfer Controller 0
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
2
EDMA3 Transfer Controller 1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
3
EMIFA (Br7)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
4
SPI 0
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
5
MMC/SD 0
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
6
ARM Interrupt Controller
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
7
ARM RAM/ROM
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
8
—
—
—
—
9
UART 0
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
10
SCR0 (Br 0, Br 1, Br 2, Br 8)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
11
SCR1 (Br 4)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
12
SCR2 (Br 3, Br 5, Br 6)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
13
PRUSS
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
14
ARM
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
15
—
—
—
—
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-9. PSC0 Default Module Configuration
83
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-10. PSC1 Default Module Configuration
ADVANCE INFORMATION
LPSC
Number
Module Name
Power Domain
Default Module State
Auto Sleep/Wake Only
0
EDMA3 Channel Controller 1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
1
USB0 (USB2.0)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
2
—
—
—
—
3
GPIO
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
4
UHPI
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
5
—
—
—
—
6
DDR2 (and SCR_F3)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
7
McASP0 ( + McASP0 FIFO)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
8
SATA
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
8
—
—
—
—
9
VPIF
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
10
SPI 1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
11
I2C 1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
12
UART 1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
13
UART 2
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
14
McBSP0 ( + McBSP0 FIFO)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
15
McBSP1 ( + McBSP1 FIFO)
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
16
LCDC
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
17
eHRPWM0/1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
18
MMCSD1
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
19
uPP
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
20
ECAP0/1/2
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
21
EDMA3 Transfer Controller 2
AlwaysON (PD0)
SwRstDisable
—
22
—
—
—
—
23
—
—
—
—
24
SCR_F0 (and bridge F0)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
25
SCR_F1 (and bridge F1)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
26
SCR_F2 (and bridge F2)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
27
SCR_F6 (and bridge F3)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
28
SCR_F7 (and bridge F4)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
29
SCR_F8 (and bridge F5)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
30
Bridge F7 (DDR Controller path)
AlwaysON (PD0)
Enable
Yes
31
On-chip RAM (including SCR_F4
and bridge F6)
PD_SHRAM
Enable
—
84
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.8.1.1
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Module States
The PSC defines several possible states for a module. This states are essentially a combination of the
module reset asserted or de-asserted and module clock on/enabled or off/disabled. The module states are
defined in Table 6-11.
Module State
Module Reset
Module Clock Module State Definition
Enable
De-asserted
On
A module in the enable state has its module reset de-asserted and it has its clock on.
This is the normal operational state for a given module
Disable
De-asserted
Off
A module in the disabled state has its module reset de-asserted and it has its module
clock off. This state is typically used for disabling a module clock to save power. The
device is designed in full static CMOS, so when you stop a module clock, it retains the
module’s state. When the clock is restarted, the module resumes operating from the
stopping point.
SyncReset
Asserted
On
A module state in the SyncReset state has its module reset asserted and it has its
clock on. Generally, software is not expected to initiate this state
SwRstDisable
Asserted
Off
A module in the SwResetDisable state has its module reset asserted and it has its
clock disabled. After initial power-on, several modules come up in the SwRstDisable
state. Generally, software is not expected to initiate this state
Auto Sleep
De-asserted
Off
A module in the Auto Sleep state also has its module reset de-asserted and its module
clock disabled, similar to the Disable state. However this is a special state, once a
module is configured in this state by software, it can “automatically” transition to
“Enable” state whenever there is an internal read/write request made to it, and after
servicing the request it will “automatically” transition into the sleep state (with module
reset re de-asserted and module clock disabled), without any software intervention.
The transition from sleep to enabled and back to sleep state has some cycle latency
associated with it. It is not envisioned to use this mode when peripherals are fully
operational and moving data.
Auto Wake
De-asserted
Off
A module in the Auto Wake state also has its module reset de-asserted and its module
clock disabled, similar to the Disable state. However this is a special state, once a
module is configured in this state by software, it will “automatically” transition to
“Enable” state whenever there is an internal read/write request made to it, and will
remain in the “Enabled” state from then on (with module reset re de-asserted and
module clock on), without any software intervention. The transition from sleep to
enabled state has some cycle latency associated with it. It is not envisioned to use this
mode when peripherals are fully operational and moving data.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
85
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-11. Module States
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.9
www.ti.com
EDMA
The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between memories and the device slave peripherals on
the device. These data transfers include cache servicing, non-cacheable memory accesses,
user-programmed data transfers, and host accesses.
6.9.1
EDMA3 Channel Synchronization Events
Each EDMA channel controller supports up to 32 channels which service peripherals and memory.
Table 6-12lists the source of the EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable
EDMA channels.
Table 6-12. EDMA Synchronization Events
EDMA0 Channel Controller 0
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Event
Event Name / Source
Event
0
McASP0 Receive
16
Event Name / Source
MMCSD0 Receive
1
McASP0 Transmit
17
MMCSD0 Transmit
2
McBSP0 Receive
18
SPI1 Receive
3
McBSP0 Transmit
19
SPI1 Transmit
4
McBSP1 Receive
20
PRU_EVTOUT6
5
McBSP1 Transmit
21
PRU_EVTOUT7
6
GPIO Bank 0 Interrupt
22
GPIO Bank 2 Interrupt
7
GPIO Bank 1 Interrupt
23
GPIO Bank 3 Interrupt
8
UART0 Receive
24
I2C0 Receive
I2C0 Transmit
9
UART0 Transmit
25
10
Timer64P0 Event Out 12
26
I2C1 Receive
11
Timer64P0 Event Out 34
27
I2C1 Transmit
12
UART1 Receive
28
GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt
13
UART1 Transmit
29
GPIO Bank 5 Interrupt
14
SPI0 Receive
30
UART2 Receive
15
SPI0 Transmit
31
UART2 Transmit
Event
Event Name / Source
Event
Event Name / Source
0
Timer64P2 Compare Event 0
16
GPIO Bank 6 Interrupt
1
Timer64P2 Compare Event 1
17
GPIO Bank 7 Interrupt
2
Timer64P2 Compare Event 2
18
GPIO Bank 8 Interrupt
3
Timer64P2 Compare Event 3
19
Reserved
4
Timer64P2 Compare Event 4
20
Reserved
5
Timer64P2 Compare Event 5
21
Reserved
6
Timer64P2 Compare Event 6
22
Reserved
7
Timer64P2 Compare Event 7
23
Reserved
8
Timer64P3 Compare Event 0
24
Timer64P2 Event Out 12
9
Timer64P3 Compare Event 1
25
Timer64P2 Event Out 34
10
Timer64P3 Compare Event 2
26
Timer64P3 Event Out 12
11
Timer64P3 Compare Event 3
27
Timer64P3 Event Out 34
12
Timer64P3 Compare Event 4
28
MMCSD0 Receive
13
Timer64P3 Compare Event 5
29
MMCSD0 Transmit
14
Timer64P3 Compare Event 6
30
Reserved
15
Timer64P3 Compare Event 7
31
Reserved
EDMA1 Channel Controller 1
86
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.9.2
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
EDMA Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 6-13 is the list of EDMA3 Channel Controller Registers and Table 6-14 is the list of EDMA3 Transfer
Controller registers.
Table 6-13. EDMA3 Channel Controller (EDMA3CC) Registers
EDMA0 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
EDMA1 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C0 0000
0x01E3 0000
PID
0x01C0 0004
0x01E3 0004
CCCFG
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Peripheral Identification Register
EDMA3CC Configuration Register
0x01C0 0200
0x01E3 0200
QCHMAP0
QDMA Channel 0 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0204
0x01E3 0204
QCHMAP1
QDMA Channel 1 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0208
0x01E3 0208
QCHMAP2
QDMA Channel 2 Mapping Register
0x01C0 020C
0x01E3 020C
QCHMAP3
QDMA Channel 3 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0210
0x01E3 0210
QCHMAP4
QDMA Channel 4 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0214
0x01E3 0214
QCHMAP5
QDMA Channel 5 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0218
0x01E3 0218
QCHMAP6
QDMA Channel 6 Mapping Register
0x01C0 021C
0x01E3 021C
QCHMAP7
QDMA Channel 7 Mapping Register
0x01C0 0240
0x01E3 0240
DMAQNUM0
DMA Channel Queue Number Register 0
0x01C0 0244
0x01E3 0244
DMAQNUM1
DMA Channel Queue Number Register 1
0x01C0 0248
0x01E3 0248
DMAQNUM2
DMA Channel Queue Number Register 2
0x01C0 024C
0x01E3 024C
DMAQNUM3
DMA Channel Queue Number Register 3
0x01C0 0260
0x01E3 0260
QDMAQNUM QDMA Channel Queue Number Register
0x01C0 0284
0x01E3 0284
0x01C0 0300
0x01E3 0300
EMR
0x01C0 0308
0x01E3 0308
EMCR
Event Missed Clear Register
0x01C0 0310
0x01E3 0310
QEMR
QDMA Event Missed Register
0x01C0 0314
0x01E3 0314
QEMCR
QDMA Event Missed Clear Register
0x01C0 0318
0x01E3 0318
CCERR
EDMA3CC Error Register
0x01C0 031C
0x01E3 031C
CCERRCLR
0x01C0 0320
0x01E3 0320
EEVAL
Error Evaluate Register
0x01C0 0340
0x01E3 0340
DRAE0
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 0
0x01C0 0348
0x01E3 0348
DRAE1
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 1
0x01C0 0350
0x01E3 0350
DRAE2
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 2
0x01C0 0358
0x01E3 0358
DRAE3
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 3
0x01C0 0380
0x01E3 0380
QRAE0
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 0
0x01C0 0384
0x01E3 0384
QRAE1
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 1
QUEPRI
Queue Priority Register (1)
Event Missed Register
EDMA3CC Error Clear Register
0x01C0 0388
0x01E3 0388
QRAE2
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 2
0x01C0 038C
0x01E3 038C
QRAE3
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 3
0x01C0 0400 - 0x01C0 043C
0x01E3 0400 - 0x01E3 043C
Q0E0-Q0E15 Event Queue Entry Registers Q0E0-Q0E15
0x01C0 0440 - 0x01C0 047C
0x01E3 0440 - 0x01E3 047C
Q1E0-Q1E15 Event Queue Entry Registers Q1E0-Q1E15
0x01C0 0600
0x01E3 0600
QSTAT0
Queue 0 Status Register
0x01C0 0604
0x01E3 0604
QSTAT1
Queue 1 Status Register
0x01C0 0620
0x01E3 0620
QWMTHRA
0x01C0 0640
0x01E3 0640
CCSTAT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Global Registers
Queue Watermark Threshold A Register
EDMA3CC Status Register
Global Channel Registers
0x01C0 1000
(1)
0x01E3 1000
ER
Event Register
On previous architectures, the EDMA3TC priority was controlled by the queue priority register (QUEPRI) in the EDMA3CC
memory-map. However for this device, the priority control for the transfer controllers is controlled by the chip-level registers in the
System Configuration Module. You should use the chip-level registers and not QUEPRI to configure the TC priority.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
87
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-13. EDMA3 Channel Controller (EDMA3CC) Registers (continued)
EDMA1 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C0 1008
0x01E3 1008
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01C0 1010
0x01E3 1010
ESR
Event Set Register
0x01C0 1018
0x01E3 1018
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01C0 1020
0x01E3 1020
EER
Event Enable Register
0x01C0 1028
0x01E3 1028
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 1030
0x01E3 1030
EESR
Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 1038
0x01E3 1038
SER
Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 1040
0x01E3 1040
SECR
0x01C0 1050
0x01E3 1050
IER
0x01C0 1058
0x01E3 1058
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 1060
0x01E3 1060
IESR
Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01C0 1068
0x01E3 1068
IPR
Interrupt Pending Register
0x01C0 1070
0x01E3 1070
ICR
Interrupt Clear Register
0x01C0 1078
0x01E3 1078
IEVAL
0x01C0 1080
0x01E3 1080
QER
0x01C0 1084
0x01E3 1084
QEER
0x01C0 1088
0x01E3 1088
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 108C
0x01E3 108C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 1090
0x01E3 1090
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 1094
0x01E3 1094
QSECR
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EDMA0 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Secondary Event Clear Register
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Evaluate Register
QDMA Event Register
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Shadow Region 0 Channel Registers
0x01C0 2000
0x01E3 2000
ER
Event Register
0x01C0 2008
0x01E3 2008
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01C0 2010
0x01E3 2010
ESR
Event Set Register
0x01C0 2018
0x01E3 2018
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01C0 2020
0x01E3 2020
EER
Event Enable Register
0x01C0 2028
0x01E3 2028
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 2030
0x01E3 2030
EESR
Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2038
0x01E3 2038
SER
Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 2040
0x01E3 2040
SECR
0x01C0 2050
0x01E3 2050
IER
0x01C0 2058
0x01E3 2058
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 2060
0x01E3 2060
IESR
Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2068
0x01E3 2068
IPR
Interrupt Pending Register
0x01C0 2070
0x01E3 2070
ICR
Interrupt Clear Register
0x01C0 2078
0x01E3 2078
IEVAL
0x01C0 2080
0x01E3 2080
QER
0x01C0 2084
0x01E3 2084
QEER
0x01C0 2088
0x01E3 2088
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 208C
0x01E3 208C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2090
0x01E3 2090
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 2094
0x01E3 2094
QSECR
0x01C0 2200
0x01E3 2200
ER
0x01C0 2208
0x01E3 2208
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01C0 2210
0x01E3 2210
ESR
Event Set Register
Secondary Event Clear Register
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Evaluate Register
QDMA Event Register
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Shadow Region 1 Channel Registers
88
Event Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-13. EDMA3 Channel Controller (EDMA3CC) Registers (continued)
EDMA0 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
EDMA1 Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C0 2218
0x01E3 2218
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01C0 2220
0x01E3 2220
EER
Event Enable Register
0x01C0 2228
0x01E3 2228
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 2230
0x01E3 2230
EESR
Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2238
0x01E3 2238
SER
Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 2240
0x01E3 2240
SECR
0x01C0 2250
0x01E3 2250
IER
0x01C0 2258
0x01E3 2258
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 2260
0x01E3 2260
IESR
Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2268
0x01E3 2268
IPR
Interrupt Pending Register
0x01C0 2270
0x01E3 2270
ICR
Interrupt Clear Register
0x01C0 2278
0x01E3 2278
IEVAL
0x01C0 2280
0x01E3 2280
QER
0x01C0 2284
0x01E3 2284
QEER
0x01C0 2288
0x01E3 2288
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01C0 228C
0x01E3 228C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01C0 2290
0x01E3 2290
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01C0 2294
0x01E3 2294
QSECR
0x01C0 4000 - 0x01C0 4FFF
0x01E3 4000 - 0x01E3 4FFF
—
Secondary Event Clear Register
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Evaluate Register
QDMA Event Register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Parameter RAM (PaRAM)
Table 6-14. EDMA3 Transfer Controller (EDMA3TC) Registers
EDMA0
EDMA0
Transfer Controller Transfer Controller
0
1
BYTE ADDRESS
BYTE ADDRESS
EDMA1
Transfer Controller
0
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
PID
Peripheral Identification Register
0x01C0 8000
0x01C0 8400
0x01E3 8000
0x01C0 8004
0x01C0 8404
0x01E3 8004
TCCFG
EDMA3TC Configuration Register
0x01C0 8100
0x01C0 8500
0x01E3 8100
TCSTAT
EDMA3TC Channel Status Register
0x01C0 8120
0x01C0 8520
0x01E3 8120
ERRSTAT
Error Status Register
0x01C0 8124
0x01C0 8524
0x01E3 8124
ERREN
Error Enable Register
0x01C0 8128
0x01C0 8528
0x01E3 8128
ERRCLR
Error Clear Register
0x01C0 812C
0x01C0 852C
0x01E3 812C
ERRDET
Error Details Register
0x01C0 8130
0x01C0 8530
0x01E3 8130
ERRCMD
Error Interrupt Command Register
0x01C0 8140
0x01C0 8540
0x01E3 8140
RDRATE
Read Command Rate Register
0x01C0 8240
0x01C0 8640
0x01E3 8240
SAOPT
Source Active Options Register
0x01C0 8244
0x01C0 8644
0x01E3 8244
SASRC
Source Active Source Address Register
0x01C0 8248
0x01C0 8648
0x01E3 8248
SACNT
Source Active Count Register
0x01C0 824C
0x01C0 864C
0x01E3 824C
SADST
Source Active Destination Address Register
0x01C0 8250
0x01C0 8650
0x01E3 8250
SABIDX
Source Active B-Index Register
0x01C0 8254
0x01C0 8654
0x01E3 8254
SAMPPRXY
Source Active Memory Protection Proxy Register
0x01C0 8258
0x01C0 8658
0x01E3 8258
SACNTRLD
Source Active Count Reload Register
0x01C0 825C
0x01C0 865C
0x01E3 825C
SASRCBREF
Source Active Source Address B-Reference Register
0x01C0 8260
0x01C0 8660
0x01E3 8260
SADSTBREF
Source Active Destination Address B-Reference Register
0x01C0 8280
0x01C0 8680
0x01E3 8280
DFCNTRLD
0x01C0 8284
0x01C0 8684
0x01E3 8284
DFSRCBREF
Destination FIFO Set Source Address B-Reference
Register
0x01C0 8288
0x01C0 8688
0x01E3 8288
DFDSTBREF
Destination FIFO Set Destination Address B-Reference
Register
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Destination FIFO Set Count Reload Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
89
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-14. EDMA3 Transfer Controller (EDMA3TC) Registers (continued)
EDMA0
EDMA0
Transfer Controller Transfer Controller
0
1
BYTE ADDRESS
BYTE ADDRESS
EDMA1
Transfer Controller
0
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01C0 8300
0x01C0 8700
0x01E3 8300
DFOPT0
Destination FIFO Options Register 0
0x01C0 8304
0x01C0 8704
0x01E3 8304
DFSRC0
Destination FIFO Source Address Register 0
0x01C0 8308
0x01C0 8708
0x01E3 8308
DFCNT0
Destination FIFO Count Register 0
0x01C0 830C
0x01C0 870C
0x01E3 830C
DFDST0
Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 0
0x01C0 8310
0x01C0 8710
0x01E3 8310
DFBIDX0
Destination FIFO B-Index Register 0
0x01C0 8314
0x01C0 8714
0x01E3 8314
DFMPPRXY0
0x01C0 8340
0x01C0 8740
0x01E3 8340
DFOPT1
Destination FIFO Options Register 1
0x01C0 8344
0x01C0 8744
0x01E3 8344
DFSRC1
Destination FIFO Source Address Register 1
0x01C0 8348
0x01C0 8748
0x01E3 8348
DFCNT1
Destination FIFO Count Register 1
0x01C0 834C
0x01C0 874C
0x01E3 834C
DFDST1
Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 1
0x01C0 8350
0x01C0 8750
0x01E3 8350
DFBIDX1
Destination FIFO B-Index Register 1
0x01C0 8354
0x01C0 8754
0x01E3 8354
DFMPPRXY1
0x01C0 8380
0x01C0 8780
0x01E3 8380
DFOPT2
Destination FIFO Options Register 2
0x01C0 8384
0x01C0 8784
0x01E3 8384
DFSRC2
Destination FIFO Source Address Register 2
Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 0
Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 1
0x01C0 8388
0x01C0 8788
0x01E3 8388
DFCNT2
Destination FIFO Count Register 2
0x01C0 838C
0x01C0 878C
0x01E3 838C
DFDST2
Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 2
0x01C0 8390
0x01C0 8790
0x01E3 8390
DFBIDX2
Destination FIFO B-Index Register 2
0x01C0 8394
0x01C0 8794
0x01E3 8394
DFMPPRXY2
0x01C0 83C0
0x01C0 87C0
0x01E3 83C0
DFOPT3
Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 2
Destination FIFO Options Register 3
0x01C0 83C4
0x01C0 87C4
0x01E3 83C4
DFSRC3
Destination FIFO Source Address Register 3
0x01C0 83C8
0x01C0 87C8
0x01E3 83C8
DFCNT3
Destination FIFO Count Register 3
0x01C0 83CC
0x01C0 87CC
0x01E3 83CC
DFDST3
Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 3
0x01C0 83D0
0x01C0 87D0
0x01E3 83D0
DFBIDX3
Destination FIFO B-Index Register 3
0x01C0 83D4
0x01C0 87D4
0x01E3 83D4
DFMPPRXY3
Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 3
Table 6-15 shows an abbreviation of the set of registers which make up the parameter set for each of 128
EDMA events. Each of the parameter register sets consist of 8 32-bit word entries. Table 6-16 shows the
parameter set entry registers with relative memory address locations within each of the parameter sets.
Table 6-15. EDMA Parameter Set RAM
90
EDMA0
Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
EDMA1
Channel Controller 0
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
0x01C0 4000 - 0x01C0 401F
0x01E3 4000 - 0x01E3 401F
Parameters Set 0 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 4020 - 0x01C0 403F
0x01E3 4020 - 0x01E3 403F
Parameters Set 1 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 4040 - 0x01CC0 405F
0x01E3 4040 - 0x01CE3 405F
Parameters Set 2 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 4060 - 0x01C0 407F
0x01E3 4060 - 0x01E3 407F
Parameters Set 3 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 4080 - 0x01C0 409F
0x01E3 4080 - 0x01E3 409F
Parameters Set 4 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 40A0 - 0x01C0 40BF
0x01E3 40A0 - 0x01E3 40BF
Parameters Set 5 (8 32-bit words)
...
...
0x01C0 4FC0 - 0x01C0 4FDF
0x01E3 4FC0 - 0x01E3 4FDF
Parameters Set 126 (8 32-bit words)
0x01C0 4FE0 - 0x01C0 4FFF
0x01E3 4FE0 - 0x01E3 4FFF
Parameters Set 127 (8 32-bit words)
DESCRIPTION
...
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-16. Parameter Set Entries
OFFSET BYTE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE PARAMETER SET
ACRONYM
0x0000
OPT
Option
0x0004
SRC
Source Address
0x0008
A_B_CNT
0x000C
DST
0x0010
SRC_DST_BIDX
Source B Index, Destination B Index
0x0014
LINK_BCNTRLD
Link Address, B Count Reload
0x0018
SRC_DST_CIDX
Source C Index, Destination C Index
0x001C
CCNT
PARAMETER ENTRY
A Count, B Count
Destination Address
ADVANCE INFORMATION
C Count
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
91
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.10 External Memory Interface A (EMIFA)
EMIFA is one of two external memory interfaces supported on the device. It is primarily intended to
support asynchronous memory types, such as NAND and NOR flash and Asynchronous SRAM. However
on this device, EMIFA also provides a secondary interface to SDRAM.
6.10.1 EMIFA Asynchronous Memory Support
EMIFA supports asynchronous:
• SRAM memories
• NAND Flash memories
• NOR Flash memories
The EMIFA data bus width is up to 16-bits.The device supports up to 24 address lines and two external
wait/interrupt inputs. Up to four asynchronous chip selects are supported by EMIFA (EMA_CS[5:2]).
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Each chip select has the following individually programmable attributes:
• Data Bus Width
• Read cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe
• Write cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe
• Bus turn around time
• Extended Wait Option With Programmable Timeout
• Select Strobe Option
• NAND flash controller supports 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation on blocks of 512 bytes.
6.10.2 EMIFA Synchronous DRAM Memory Support
The device supports 16-bit SDRAM in addition to the asynchronous memories listed in Section 6.10.1. It
has a single SDRAM chip select (EMA_CS[0]). SDRAM configurations that are supported are:
• One, Two, and Four Bank SDRAM devices
• Devices with Eight, Nine, Ten, and Eleven Column Address
• CAS Latency of two or three clock cycles
• Sixteen Bit Data Bus Width
Additionally, the SDRAM interface of EMIFA supports placing the SDRAM in Self Refresh and Powerdown
Modes. Self Refresh mode allows the SDRAM to be put into a low power state while still retaining memory
contents; since the SDRAM will continue to refresh itself even without clocks from the device. Powerdown
mode achieves even lower power, except the device must periodically wake the SDRAM up and issue
refreshes if data retention is required.
Finally, note that the EMIFA does not support Mobile SDRAM devices.
Table 6-17 shows the supported SDRAM configurations for EMIFA.
92
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-17. EMIFA Supported SDRAM Configurations (1)
16
8
(1)
Number of
Memories
EMIFA Data
Bus Size
(bits)
Rows
Columns
Banks
1
16
16
8
1
256
32
1
16
16
8
2
512
64
512
1
16
16
8
4
1024
128
1024
1
16
16
9
1
512
64
512
1
16
16
9
2
1024
128
1024
1
16
16
9
4
2048
256
2048
1
16
16
10
1
1024
128
1024
1
16
16
10
2
2048
256
2048
1
16
16
10
4
4096
512
4096
1
16
16
11
1
2048
256
2048
1
16
16
11
2
4096
512
4096
1
16
15
11
4
4096
512
4096
2
16
16
8
1
256
32
128
2
16
16
8
2
512
64
256
2
16
16
8
4
1024
128
512
2
16
16
9
1
512
64
256
2
16
16
9
2
1024
128
512
2
16
16
9
4
2048
256
1024
2
16
16
10
1
1024
128
512
2
16
16
10
2
2048
256
1024
2
16
16
10
4
4096
512
2048
2
16
16
11
1
2048
256
1024
2
16
16
11
2
4096
512
2048
2
16
15
11
4
4096
512
2048
Total Memory Total Memory
(Mbits)
(Mbytes)
Memory
Density
(Mbits)
256
The shaded cells indicate configurations that are possible on the EMIFA interface but as of this writing SDRAM memories capable of
supporting these densities are not available in the market.
6.10.3 EMIFA SDRAM Loading Limitations
EMIFA supports SDRAM up to 100 MHz with up to two SDRAM or asynchronous memory loads.
Additional loads will limit the SDRAM operation to lower speeds and the maximum speed should be
confirmed by board simulation using IBIS models.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
93
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SDRAM
Memory Data
Bus Width
(bits)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.10.4 External Memory Interface Register Descriptions
Table 6-18 is a list of the EMIF registers.
Table 6-18. External Memory Interface (EMIFA) Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
94
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x6800 0000
MIDR
Module ID Register
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x6800 0004
AWCC
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register
0x6800 0008
SDCR
SDRAM Configuration Register
0x6800 000C
SDRCR
SDRAM Refresh Control Register
0x6800 0010
CE2CFG
Asynchronous 1 Configuration Register
0x6800 0014
CE3CFG
Asynchronous 2 Configuration Register
0x6800 0018
CE4CFG
Asynchronous 3 Configuration Register
0x6800 001C
CE5CFG
Asynchronous 4 Configuration Register
SDRAM Timing Register
0x6800 0020
SDTIMR
0x6800 003C
SDSRETR
0x6800 0040
INTRAW
EMIFA Interrupt Raw Register
0x6800 0044
INTMSK
EMIFA Interrupt Mask Register
0x6800 0048
INTMSKSET
EMIFA Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x6800 004C
INTMSKCLR
EMIFA Interrupt Mask Clear Register
0x6800 0060
NANDFCR
NAND Flash Control Register
0x6800 0064
NANDFSR
NAND Flash Status Register
0x6800 0070
NANDF1ECC
NAND Flash 1 ECC Register (CS2 Space)
0x6800 0074
NANDF2ECC
NAND Flash 2 ECC Register (CS3 Space)
SDRAM Self Refresh Exit Timing Register
0x6800 0078
NANDF3ECC
NAND Flash 3 ECC Register (CS4 Space)
0x6800 007C
NANDF4ECC
NAND Flash 4 ECC Register (CS5 Space)
0x6800 00BC
NAND4BITECCLOAD
0x6800 00C0
NAND4BITECC1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 1
0x6800 00C4
NAND4BITECC2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 2
0x6800 00C8
NAND4BITECC3
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 3
0x6800 00CC
NAND4BITECC4
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 4
0x6800 00D0
NANDERRADD1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 1
0x6800 00D4
NANDERRADD2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 2
0x6800 00D8
NANDERRVAL1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 1
0x6800 00DC
NANDERRVAL2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Load Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.10.5 EMIFA Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-19 through Table 6-22 assume testing over recommended operating conditions.
Table 6-19. Timing Requirements for EMIFA SDRAM Interface
NO.
PARAMETER
19
tsu(EMA_DV-EM_CLKH)
Input setup time, read data valid on EMA_D[15:0] before
EMA_CLK rising
20
th(CLKH-DIV)
Input hold time, read data valid on EMA_D[15:0] after
EMA_CLK rising
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
MAX
UNIT
2
3
3
ns
1.6
1.6
1.6
ns
Table 6-20. Switching Characteristics for EMIFA SDRAM Interface
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
1
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, EMIF clock EMA_CLK
10
15
20
2
tw(CLK)
Pulse width, EMIF clock EMA_CLK high or low
3
5
8
3
td(CLKH-CSV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_CS[0] valid
4
toh(CLKH-CSIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_CS[0] invalid
5
td(CLKH-DQMV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_WE_DQM[1:0] valid
6
toh(CLKH-DQMIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_WE_DQM[1:0]
invalid
7
td(CLKH-AV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_A[12:0] and
EMA_BA[1:0] valid
8
toh(CLKH-AIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_A[12:0] and
EMA_BA[1:0] invalid
9
td(CLKH-DV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_D[15:0] valid
10
toh(CLKH-DIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_D[15:0] invalid
11
td(CLKH-RASV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_RAS valid
12
toh(CLKH-RASIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_RAS invalid
13
td(CLKH-CASV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_CAS valid
14
toh(CLKH-CASIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_CAS invalid
15
td(CLKH-WEV)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_WE valid
16
toh(CLKH-WEIV)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_WE invalid
17
tdis(CLKH-DHZ)
Delay time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_D[15:0] tri-stated
18
tena(CLKH-DLZ)
Output hold time, EMA_CLK rising to EMA_D[15:0] driving
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
7
1
9.5
1
7
1
1
9.5
7
7
1
7
7
9.5
1
ns
ns
13
1
9.5
ns
ns
13
1
1
7
1
13
9.5
ns
ns
1
1
1
13
9.5
ns
ns
1
1
1
13
9.5
ns
ns
1
1
ns
ns
13
1
1
1
ns
1
1
UNIT
ns
13
9.5
7
MAX
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
ns
ns
13
1
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ns
ns
95
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
1
BASIC SDRAM
WRITE OPERATION
2
2
EMA_CLK
3
4
EMA_CS[0]
5
6
EMA_WE_DQM[1:0]
7
8
7
8
EMA_BA[1:0]
EMA_A[12:0]
9
10
EMA_D[15:0]
11
12
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_RAS
13
EMA_CAS
15
16
EMA_WE
Figure 6-10. EMIFA Basic SDRAM Write Operation
BASIC SDRAM
READ OPERATION
1
2
2
EMA_CLK
3
4
EMA_CS[0]
5
6
EMA_WE_DQM[1:0]
7
8
7
8
EMA_BA[1:0]
EMA_A[12:0]
19
17
2 EM_CLK Delay
20
18
EMA_D[15:0]
11
12
EMA_RAS
13
14
EMA_CAS
EMA_WE
Figure 6-11. EMIFA Basic SDRAM Read Operation
96
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-21. Timing Requirements for EMIFA Asynchronous Memory Interface
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
(1)
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
READS and WRITES
E
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, EMIFA module clock
10
15
20
ns
2
tw(EM_WAIT)
Pulse duration, EM_WAIT assertion and deassertion
2E
2E
2E
ns
12
tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high
3
5
7
ns
13
th(EMOEH-EMDIV)
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high
0
0
0
ns
14
tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT)
Setup Time, EM_WAIT asserted before end of Strobe
Phase (2)
4E+3
4E+3
4E+3
ns
tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT)
Setup Time, EM_WAIT asserted before end of Strobe
Phase (2)
4E+3
4E+3
4E+3
ns
READS
28
(1)
(2)
E = EMA_CLK period or in ns. EMA_CLK is selected either as SYSCLK3 or the PLL0 output clock divided by 4.5. As an example, when
SYSCLK3 is selected and set to 100MHz, E=10ns
Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAIT must be asserted to add extended
wait states. Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.
Table 6-22. Switching Characteristics for EMIFA Asynchronous Memory Interface
NO
.
(1) (2) (3)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
Nom
UNIT
MAX
READS and WRITES
1
td(TURNAROUND)
Turn around time
(TA)*E - 3
(TA)*E
(TA)*E + 3
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)
(RS+RST+RH)*E
-3
(RS+RST+RH)*E
(RS+RST+RH)*E
+3
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)
(RS+RST+RH+(E
WC*16))*E - 3
(RS+RST+RH+(EW (RS+RST+RH+(E
C*16))*E
WC*16))*E + 3
ns
READS
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)
tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL)
th(EMOEH-EMCEH)
Output setup time, EMA_CE[5:2] low to
EMA_OE low (SS = 0)
(RS)*E-3
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+3
ns
Output setup time, EMA_CE[5:2] low to
EMA_OE low (SS = 1)
-3
0
+3
ns
Output hold time, EMA_OE high to
EMA_CE[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(RH)*E - 3
(RH)*E
(RH)*E + 3
ns
Output hold time, EMA_OE high to
EMA_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-3
0
+3
ns
6
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EMA_BA[1:0] valid to
EMA_OE low
(RS)*E-3
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+3
ns
7
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EMA_OE high to
EMA_BA[1:0] invalid
(RH)*E-3
(RH)*E
(RH)*E+3
ns
8
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EMA_A[13:0] valid to
EMA_OE low
(RS)*E-3
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+3
ns
9
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EMA_OE high to
EMA_A[13:0] invalid
(RH)*E-3
(RH)*E
(RH)*E+3
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold,
MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Bank and Asynchronous Wait Cycle
Configuration Registers. These support the following range of values: TA[4-1], RS[16-1], RST[64-1], RH[8-1], WS[16-1], WST[64-1],
WH[8-1], and MEW[1-256].
E = EMA_CLK period or in ns. EMA_CLK is selected either as SYSCLK3 or the PLL0 output clock divided by 4.5. As an example, when
SYSCLK3 is selected and set to 100MHz, E=10ns.
EWC = external wait cycles determined by EMA_WAIT input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that
the maximum wait time before timeout is specified by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
97
ADVANCE INFORMATION
WRITES
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-22. Switching Characteristics for EMIFA Asynchronous Memory Interface
NO
.
tw(EMOEL)
11
td(EMWAITHEMOEH)
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
10
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
Nom
UNIT
MAX
EMA_OE active low width (EW = 0)
(RST)*E-3
(RST)*E
(RST)*E+3
ns
EMA_OE active low width (EW = 1)
(RST+(EWC*16))
*E-3
(RST+(EWC*16))*E
(RST+(EWC*16))
*E+3
ns
3E-3
4E
4E+3
ns
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)
(WS+WST+WH)*
E-3
(WS+WST+WH)*E
(WS+WST+WH)*
E+3
ns
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)
(WS+WST+WH+(
EWC*16))*E - 3
(WS+WST+WH+(E (WS+WST+WH+(
WC*16))*E
EWC*16))*E + 3
ns
Delay time from EMA_WAIT deasserted to
EMA_OE high
WRITES
15
16
ADVANCE INFORMATION
17
18
tc(EMWCYCLE)
tsu(EMCEL-EMWEL)
th(EMWEH-EMCEH)
tsu(EMDQMVEMWEL)
19
th(EMWEHEMDQMIV)
Output setup time, EMA_CE[5:2] low to
EMA_WE low (SS = 0)
(WS)*E - 3
(WS)*E
(WS)*E + 3
ns
Output setup time, EMA_CE[5:2] low to
EMA_WE low (SS = 1)
-3
0
+3
ns
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_CE[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(WH)*E-3
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+3
ns
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-3
0
+3
ns
Output setup time, EMA_BA[1:0] valid to
EMA_WE low
(WS)*E-3
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+3
ns
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_BA[1:0] invalid
(WH)*E-3
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+3
ns
20
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EMA_BA[1:0] valid to
EMA_WE low
(WS)*E-3
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+3
ns
21
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_BA[1:0] invalid
(WH)*E-3
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+3
ns
22
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EMA_A[13:0] valid to
EMA_WE low
(WS)*E-3
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+3
ns
23
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_A[13:0] invalid
(WH)*E-3
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+3
ns
EMA_WE active low width (EW = 0)
(WST)*E-3
(WST)*E
(WST)*E+3
ns
24
tw(EMWEL)
EMA_WE active low width (EW = 1)
(WST+(EWC*16))
*E-3
(WST+(EWC*16))*E
(WST+(EWC*16))
*E+3
ns
25
td(EMWAITH-
3E-3
4E
4E+3
ns
EMWEH)
Delay time from EMA_WAIT deasserted to
EMA_WE high
26
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EMA_D[15:0] valid to
EMA_WE low
(WS)*E-3
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+3
ns
27
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)
Output hold time, EMA_WE high to
EMA_D[15:0] invalid
(WH)*E-3
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+3
ns
98
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
3
1
EMA_CS[5:2]
EMA_BA[1:0]
EMA_A[12:0]
EMA_WE_DQM[1:0]
1
EMA_A_RW
4
8
5
9
6
29
7
30
10
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_OE
13
12
EMA_D[15:0]
EMA_WE
Figure 6-12. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
99
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
15
1
EMA_CS[5:2]
EMA_BA[1:0]
EMA_A[12:0]
EMA_WE_DQM[1:0]
EMA_A_RW
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
31
1
32
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMA_WE
26
27
EMA_D[15:0]
EMA_OE
Figure 6-13. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA
EMA_CS[5:2]
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EMA_WAIT
STROBE HOLD
EMA_BA[1:0]
EMA_A[12:0]
EMA_D[15:0]
EMA_A_RW
14
11
EMA_OE
2
EMA_WAIT
Asserted
2
Deasserted
Figure 6-14. EMA_WAIT Read Timing Requirements
100
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
ADVANCE INFORMATION
www.ti.com
Figure 6-15. EMA_WAIT Write Timing Requirements
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
101
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.11 DDR2/mDDR Controller
The DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller is a dedicated interface to DDR2/mDDR SDRAM. It supports
JESD79-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM devices and compliant Mobile DDR SDRAM devices.
The DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller support the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ADVANCE INFORMATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
JESD79-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM
Mobile DDR SDRAM
512 MByte memory space for DDR2
256 MByte memory space for mDDR
CAS latencies:
– DDR2: 2, 3, 4 and 5
– mDDR: 2 and 3
Internal banks:
– DDR2: 1, 2, 4 and 8
– mDDR:1, 2 and 4
Burst length: 8
Burst type: sequential
1 chip select (CS) signal
Page sizes: 256, 512, 1024 and 2048
SDRAM autoinitialization
Self-refresh mode
Partial array self-refresh (for mDDR)
Power down mode
Prioritized refresh
Programmable refresh rate and backlog counter
Programmable timing parameters
Little endian
6.11.1 DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR2/mDDR
Memory Controller
No.
PARAMETER
1.3V
MIN
DDR2
1
tc(DDR_CLK)
Cycle time,
DDR_CLKP
/
DDR_CLKN
mDDR
(1)
102
MAX
1.2V
MIN
1.1V
MAX
MIN
MIN
MAX
150
—
(1)
— (1)
125
150
— (1)
— (1)
133
75
133
65
133
133
100
133
95
133
72 degree DLL
configuration
125
150
125
150
125
90 degree DLL
configuration
125
150
125
150
72 degree DLL
configuration
90
150
90
90 degree DLL
configuration
105
133
105
MAX
1.0V
UNIT
MHz
DDR2 is not supported at this voltage operating point.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.11.2 DDR2/mDDR Controller Register Description(s)
Table 6-24. DDR2/mDDR Controller Registers
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0xB000 0000
REVID
Revision ID Register
0xB000 0004
SDRSTAT
SDRAM Status Register
0xB000 0008
SDCR
SDRAM Configuration Register
0xB000 000C
SDRCR
SDRAM Refresh Control Register
0xB000 0010
SDTIMR1
SDRAM Timing Register 1
0xB000 0014
SDTIMR2
SDRAM Timing Register 2
0xB000 001C
SDCR2
SDRAM Configuration Register 2
0xB000 0020
PBBPR
Peripheral Bus Burst Priority Register
0xB000 0040
PC1
Performance Counter 1 Registers
0xB000 0044
PC2
Performance Counter 2 Register
0xB000 0048
PCC
Performance Counter Configuration Register
0xB000 004C
PCMRS
Performance Counter Master Region Select Register
0xB000 0050
PCT
Performance Counter Time Register
0xB000 00C0
IRR
Interrupt Raw Register
0xB000 00C4
IMR
Interrupt Mask Register
0xB000 00C8
IMSR
Interrupt Mask Set Register
0xB000 00CC
IMCR
Interrupt Mask Clear Register
0xB000 00E4
DRPYC1R
DDR PHY Control Register 1
0x01E2 C000
VTPIO_CTL
VTP IO Control Register
6.11.3 DDR2/mDDR Interface
This section provides the timing specification for the DDR2/mDDR interface as a PCB design and
manufacturing specification. The design rules constrain PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal
integrity, cross-talk, and signal timing. These rules, when followed, result in a reliable DDR2/mDDR
memory system without the need for a complex timing closure process. For more information regarding
guidelines for using this DDR2/mDDR specification, Understanding TI's PCB Routing Rule-Based DDR2
Timing Specification (SPRAAV0).
6.11.3.1 DDR2/mDDR Interface Schematic
Figure 6-16 shows the DDR2/mDDR interface schematic for a single-memory DDR2/mDDR system. The
dual-memory system shown in Figure 6-17. Pin numbers for the device can be obtained from the pin
description section.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
103
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller
DDR2/mDDR
ODT
DDR_D[0]
T
DQ0
DDR_D[7]
T
DQ7
DDR_DQM[0]
DDR_DQS[0]
T
T
LDM
LDQS
DDR_D[8]
T
LDQS
DQ8
DDR_D[15]
T
DQ15
DDR_DQM[1]
DDR_DQS[1]
T
UDM
UDQS
NC
T
UDQS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
50 Ω 5%
NC
DDR_BA[0]
T
BA0
DDR_BA[2]
T
BA2
DDR_A[0]
T
A0
DDR_A[13]
DDR_CS
DDR_CAS
DDR_RAS
DDR_WE
DDR_CKE
DDR_CLKP
DDR_CLKN
T
A13
T
CS
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
CK
CK
DDR_DQGATE0
DDR_DQGATE1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
DDR_ZP
(1)
VREF
T
DDR_DVDD18
(3)
0.1 μF
1 K Ω 1%
DDR_VREF
VREF
(2)
0.1 μF
T
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
0.1 μF
(2)
0.1 μF
0.1 μF
1 K Ω 1%
Terminator, if desired. See terminator comments.
See Figure 6-23 for DQGATE routing specifications.
For DDR2, one of these capacitors can be eliminated if the divider and its capacitors are placed near a device VREF pin. For mDDR,
these capacitors can be eliminated completely.
VREF applies in the case of DDR2 memories. For mDDR, the DDR_VREF pin still needs to be connected to the divider circuit.
Figure 6-16. DDR2/mDDR Single-Memory High Level Schematic
104
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller
ODT
T
DQ0 - DQ7
BA0-BA2
A0-A13
DDR_DQM[0]
DDR_DQS[0]
T
DM
DQS
DQS
NC
CK
CK
CS
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
VREF
T
DDR_CLKP
DDR_CLKN
DDR_CS
DDR_CAS
DDR_RAS
DDR_WE
DDR_CKE
T
BA0-BA2
A0-A13
T
CK
CK
CS
CAS
RAS
WE
CKE
T
T
T
T
T
T
DDR_DQM1
DDR_DQS1
T
T
NC
50 Ω 5%
DDR_D[8:15]
T
DDR_ZP
DM
DQS
DQS
DQ0 - DQ7
DDR_DVDD18
ODT
(1)
DDR_DQGATE0
DDR_DQGATE1
Upper Byte
DDR2/mDDR
DDR_BA[0:2]
DDR_A[0:13]
T
VREF
T
(3)
0.1 μF
1 K Ω 1%
DDR_VREF
VREF
(2)
0.1 μF
T
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
0.1 μF
(2)
0.1 μF
0.1 μF
1 K Ω 1%
Terminator, if desired. See terminator comments.
See Figure 6-23 for DQGATE routing specifications.
For DDR2, one of these capacitors can be eliminated if the divider and its capacitors are placed near a device VREF pin. For mDDR,
these capacitors can be eliminated completely.
VREF applies in the case of DDR2 memories. For mDDR, the DDR_VREF pin still needs to be connected to the divider circuit.
Figure 6-17. DDR2/mDDR Dual-Memory High Level Schematic
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
105
ADVANCE INFORMATION
T
Lower Byte
DDR2/mDDR
DDR_D[0:7]
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.3.2 Compatible JEDEC DDR2/mDDR Devices
Table 6-25 shows the parameters of the JEDEC DDR2/mDDR devices that are compatible with this
interface. Generally, the DDR2/mDDR interface is compatible with x16 DDR2/mDDR-400 speed grade
DDR2/mDDR devices.
The device also supports JEDEC DDR2/mDDR x8 devices in the dual chip configuration. In this case, one
chip supplies the upper byte and the second chip supplies the lower byte. Addresses and most control
signals are shared just like regular dual chip memory configurations.
Table 6-25. Compatible JEDEC DDR2/mDDR Devices
No.
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
1
JEDEC DDR2/mDDR Device Speed Grade
2
JEDEC DDR2/mDDR Device Bit Width
x8
x16
Bits
3
JEDEC DDR2/mDDR Device Count
1
2
Devices
(1)
(2)
DDR2/mDDR-400
See Note
(1)
See Note
(2)
Higher DDR2/mDDR speed grades are supported due to inherent JEDEC DDR2/mDDR backwards compatibility.
Supported configurations are one 16-bit DDR2/mDDR memory or two 8-bit DDR2/mDDR memories
6.11.3.3 PCB Stackup
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The minimum stackup required for routing the device is a six layer stack as shown in Table 6-26.
Additional layers may be added to the PCB stack up to accommodate other circuitry or to reduce the size
of the PCB footprint.Complete stack up specifications are provided in Table 6-27.
Table 6-26. Device Minimum PCB Stack Up
Layer
Type
Description
1
Signal
Top Routing Mostly Horizontal
2
Plane
Ground
3
Plane
Power
4
Signal
Internal Routing
5
Plane
Ground
6
Signal
Bottom Routing Mostly Vertical
Table 6-27. PCB Stack Up Specifications
No. Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
1
PCB Routing/Plane Layers
6
2
Signal Routing Layers
3
3
Full ground layers under DDR2/mDDR routing region
2
4
Number of ground plane cuts allowed within DDR routing region
5
Number of ground reference planes required for each DDR2/mDDR routing layer
6
Number of layers between DDR2/mDDR routing layer and reference ground plane
7
PCB Routing Feature Size
4
Mils
8
PCB Trace Width w
4
Mils
8
PCB BGA escape via pad size
18
Mils
9
PCB BGA escape via hole size
8
Mils
10
Device BGA pad size
See Note
(1)
11
DDR2/mDDR Device BGA pad size
See Note
(2)
12
Single Ended Impedance, Zo
50
13
Impedance Control
Z-5
See Note
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
106
0
1
0
Z
75
Ω
Z+5
Ω
Please refer to the Flip Chip Ball Grid Array Package Reference Guide (SPRU811) for device BGA pad size.
Please refer to the DDR2/mDDR device manufacturer documentation for the DDR2/mDDR device BGA pad size.
Z is the nominal singled ended impedance selected for the PCB specified by item 12.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.11.3.4 Placement
Figure 6-17 shows the required placement for the device as well as the DDR2/mDDR devices. The
dimensions for Figure 6-18 are defined in Table 6-28. The placement does not restrict the side of the PCB
that the devices are mounted on. The ultimate purpose of the placement is to limit the maximum trace
lengths and allow for proper routing space. For single-memory DDR2/mDDR systems, the second
DDR2/mDDR device is omitted from the placement.
X
Y
OFFSET
Y
DDR2/mDDR
Device
Y
OFFSET
DDR2/mDDR
Controller
A1
Recommended DDR2/mDDR
Device Orientation
Figure 6-18. Device and DDR2/mDDR Device Placement
Table 6-28. Placement Specifications
No.
1
Parameter
Min
X
Max
Unit
1750
Mils See Notes
Notes
(1) (2)
,
2
Y
1280
Mils See Notes
(1) (2)
3
Y Offset
650
Mils See Notes
(1) (2) (3)
4
Clearance from non-DDR2/mDDR signal to DDR2/mDDR Keepout Region
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
4
w
(4)
See Note
,
.
,
(5)
See Figure 6-18 for dimension definitions.
Measurements from center of device to center of DDR2/mDDR device.
For single memory systems it is recommended that Y Offset be as small as possible.
w = PCB trace width as defined in Table 6-27 .
Non-DDR2/mDDR signals allowed within DDR2/mDDR keepout region provided they are separated from DDR2/mDDR routing layers by
a ground plane.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
107
ADVANCE INFORMATION
A1
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.3.5 DDR2/mDDR Keep Out Region
The region of the PCB used for the DDR2/mDDR circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The
DDR2/mDDR keep out region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 6-19. The size of this
region varies with the placement and DDR routing. Additional clearances required for the keep out region
are shown in Table 6-28.
DDR2/mDDR
Device
DDR2/mDDR
Controller
A1
A1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Region should encompass all DDR2/mDDR circuitry and varies
depending on placement. Non-DDR2/mDDR signals should not be
routed on the DDR signal layers within the DDR2/mDDR keep out
region. Non-DDR2/mDDR signals may be routed in the region
provided they are routed on layers separated from DDR2/mDDR
signal layers by a ground layer. No breaks should be allowed in the
reference ground layers in this region. In addition, the 1.8 V power
plane should cover the entire keep out region.
Figure 6-19. DDR2/mDDR Keepout Region
108
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.11.3.6 Bulk Bypass Capacitors
Bulk bypass capacitors are required for moderate speed bypassing of the DDR2/mDDR and other
circuitry. Table 6-29 contains the minimum numbers and capacitance required for the bulk bypass
capacitors. Note that this table only covers the bypass needs of the device and DDR2/mDDR interfaces.
Additional bulk bypass capacitance may be needed for other circuitry.
Table 6-29. Bulk Bypass Capacitors
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
1
DDR_DVDD18 Supply Bulk Bypass Capacitor Count
3
Devices
2
DDR_DVDD18 Supply Bulk Bypass Total Capacitance
30
mF
3
DDR#1 Bulk Bypass Capacitor Count
1
Devices
4
DDR#1 Bulk Bypass Total Capacitance
22
mF
5
DDR#2 Bulk Bypass Capacitor Count
1
Devices
6
(1)
(2)
DDR#2 Bulk Bypass Total Capacitance
22
mF
Notes
See Note
(1)
See Note
(1)
See Notes
See Note
(1) (2)
,
(2)
These devices should be placed near the device they are bypassing, but preference should be given to the placement of the high-speed
(HS) bypass caps.
Only used on dual-memory systems
6.11.3.7 High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
High-speed (HS) bypass capacitors are critical for proper DDR2/mDDR interface operation. It is
particularly important to minimize the parasitic series inductance of the HS bypass cap,
device/DDR2/mDDR power, and device/DDR2/mDDR ground connections. Table 6-30 contains the
specification for the HS bypass capacitors as well as for the power connections on the PCB.
Table 6-30. High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
No.
Max
Unit
1
HS Bypass Capacitor Package Size
0402
10 Mils
2
Distance from HS bypass capacitor to device being bypassed
250
Mils
3
Number of connection vias for each HS bypass capacitor
2
4
Trace length from bypass capacitor contact to connection via
1
5
Number of connection vias for each DDR2/mDDR device power or
ground balls
6
Trace length from DDR2/mDDR device power ball to connection via
7
DDR_DVDD18 Supply HS Bypass Capacitor Count
10
Devices
8
DDR_DVDD18 Supply HS Bypass Capacitor Total Capacitance
0.6
mF
9
DDR#1 HS Bypass Capacitor Count
8
Devices
10
DDR#1 HS Bypass Capacitor Total Capacitance
11
DDR#2 HS Bypass Capacitor Count
12
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Parameter
Min
DDR#2 HS Bypass Capacitor Total Capacitance
Vias
30
(1)
See Note
(2)
See Note
(3)
See Note
(3)
Mils
Vias
1
35
Mils
0.4
mF
8
Devices
0.4
Notes
See Note
mF
See Notes
See Note
(3) (4)
,
(4)
LxW, 10 mil units, i.e., a 0402 is a 40x20 mil surface mount capacitor
An additional HS bypass capacitor can share the connection vias only if it is mounted on the opposite side of the board.
These devices should be placed as close as possible to the device being bypassed.
Only used on dual-memory systems
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
109
ADVANCE INFORMATION
No.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.3.8 Net Classes
Table 6-31 lists the clock net classes for the DDR2/mDDR interface. Table 6-32 lists the signal net
classes, and associated clock net classes, for the signals in the DDR2/mDDR interface. These net classes
are used for the termination and routing rules that follow.
Table 6-31. Clock Net Class Definitions
Clock Net Class
Pin Names
CK
DDR_CLKP / DDR_CLKN
DQS0
DDR_DQS[0]
DQS1
DDR_DQS[1]
Table 6-32. Signal Net Class Definitions
Clock Net Class
Associated Clock Net Class
Pin Names
CK
DDR_BA[2:0], DDR_A[13:0], DDR_CS, DDR_CAS, DDR_RAS, DDR_WE,
DDR_CKE
D0
DQS0
DDR_D[7:0], DDR_DQM0
D1
DQS1
DDR_D[15:8], DDR_DQM1
CK, DQS0, DQS1
DDR_DQGATE0, DDR_DQGATE1
ADDR_CTRL
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DQGATE
6.11.3.9 DDR2/mDDR Signal Termination
No terminations of any kind are required in order to meet signal integrity and overshoot requirements.
Serial terminators are permitted, if desired, to reduce EMI risk; however, serial terminations are the only
type permitted. Table 6-33 shows the specifications for the series terminators.
Table 6-33. DDR2/mDDR Signal Terminations
No.
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
10
Ω
See Note
22
Zo
Ω
See Notes
(1) (2) (3)
0
22
Zo
Ω
See Notes
(1) (2) (3) (4)
0
10
Zo
Ω
See Notes
(1) (2) (3)
1
CK Net Class
0
2
ADDR_CTRL Net Class
0
3
Data Byte Net Classes (DQS[0], DQS[1], D0, D1)
4
DQGATE Net Class (DQGATE)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
110
Typ
Notes
(1)
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Only series termination is permitted, parallel or SST specifically disallowed.
Terminator values larger than typical only recommended to address EMI issues.
Termination value should be uniform across net class.
When no termination is used on data lines (0 Ω), the DDR2/mDDR devices must be programmed to operate in 60% strength mode.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.11.3.10 VREF Routing
VREF is used as a reference by the input buffers of the DDR2/mDDR memories as well as the device.
VREF is intended to be half the DDR2/mDDR power supply voltage and should be created using a
resistive divider as shown in Figure 6-16. Other methods of creating VREF are not recommended.
Figure 6-20 shows the layout guidelines for VREF.
VREF Bypass Capacitor
DDR2/mDDR Device
A1
VREF Nominal Minimum
Trace Width is 20 Mils
DDR2/mDDR
A1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Neck down to minimum in BGA escape
regions is acceptable. Narrowing to
accomodate via congestion for short
distances is also acceptable. Best
performance is obtained if the width
of VREF is maximized.
Figure 6-20. VREF Routing and Topology
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
111
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.3.11 DDR2/mDDR CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing
Figure 6-21 shows the topology of the routing for the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes. The route is a
balanced T as it is intended that the length of segments B and C be equal. In addition, the length of A
should be maximized.
B
DDR2/mDDR
Controller
A1
T
C
A
A1
Figure 6-21. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing and Topology
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-34. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification
No.
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
2w
Unit
(1)
1
Center to Center CK-CKN Spacing
2
CK A to B/A to C Skew Length Mismatch
25
Mils
3
CK B to C Skew Length Mismatch
25
Mils
4
Center to center CK to other DDR2/mDDR trace spacing
5
CK/ADDR_CTRL nominal trace length
6
7
8
Center to center ADDR_CTRL to other DDR2/mDDR trace spacing
4w
(1)
CACLM-50
CACLM
CACLM+50
Mils
ADDR_CTRL to CK Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
ADDR_CTRL to ADDR_CTRL Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
See Note
(2)
See Note
(4)
See Note
(2)
3w
(1)
See Note
(2)
See Note
(3)
10
ADDR_CTRL A to B/A to C Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
11
ADDR_CTRL B to C Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
112
(3)
(1)
Center to center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace spacing
(3)
(4)
(2)
See Note
4w
9
(1)
(2)
Notes
See Note
w = PCB trace width as defined in Table 6-27 .
Center to center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 500 mils of routed length to accommodate BGA escape and routing
congestion.
Series terminator, if used, should be located closest to device.
CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Figure 6-22 shows the topology and routing for the DQS and DQ net class; the routes are point to point.
Skew matching across bytes is not needed nor recommended.
T
DDR2/mDDR
Controller
E0
A1
T
E1
A1
Figure 6-22. DQS and DQ Routing and Topology
Table 6-35. DQS and DQ Routing Specification
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Min
1
DQS E Skew Length Mismatch
2
Center to center DQS to other DDR2/mDDR trace
spacing
3
DQS/D nominal trace length
4w
Typ
Max
Unit
25
Mils
(1)
DQLM-50
Notes
See Note
DQLM
DQLM+50
Mils
(2)
See Notes
(3) (4)
,
4
D to DQS Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
See Note
(4)
5
D to D Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
See Note
(4)
6
Center to center D to other DDR2/mDDR trace
spacing
4w
(1)
See Notes
(2) (5)
7
Center to Center D to other D trace spacing
3w
(1)
See Notes
(6) (2)
8
(1)
(2)
Parameter
DQ/DQS E Skew Length Mismatch
100
Mils
See Note
,
,
(4)
w = PCB trace width as defined in Table 6-27 .
Center to center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 500 mils of routed length to accommodate BGA escape and routing
congestion.
Series terminator, if used, should be located closest to DDR.
There is no need and it is not recommended to skew match across data bytes, i.e., from DQS0 and data byte 0 to DQS1 and data byte
1.
D's from other DQS domains are considered other DDR2/mDDR trace.
DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of each of the DQS and D net class.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
113
ADVANCE INFORMATION
No.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Figure 6-23 shows the routing for the DQGATE net class. Table 6-36 contains the routing specification.
A1
T
DDR2/mDDR
Controller
F
T
A1
Figure 6-23. DQGATE Routing
Table 6-36. DQGATE Routing Specification
ADVANCE INFORMATION
No.
1
Parameter
2
Center to center DQGATE to any other trace spacing
3
DQS/D nominal trace length
4
DQGATE Skew
(1)
(2)
(3)
Min
DQGATE Length F
Typ
Max
Unit
CKB0B1
4w
Notes
See Note
(1)
See Note
(3)
(2)
DQLM-50
DQLM
DQLM+50
Mils
100
Mils
CKB0B1 is the sum of the length of the CK net plus the average length of the DQS0 and DQS1 nets.
w = PCB trace width as defined in Table 6-27 .
Skew from CKB0B1
6.11.3.12 MDDR/DDR2 Boundary Scan Limitations
Due to DDR implementation and timing restrictions, it was not possible to place boundary scan cells
between core logic and the IO like boundary scan cells for other IO. Instead, the boundary scan cells are
tapped-off to the DDR PHY and there is the equivalent of a multiplexer inside the DDR PHY which selects
between functional and boundary scan paths.
The implication for boundary scan is that the DDR pins will not support the SAMPLE function of the output
enable cells on the DDR pins and this is a violation of IEEE 1149.1. Full EXTEST and PRELOAD
capability is still available.
114
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.12 Memory Protection Units
The MPU performs memory protection checking. It receives requests from a bus master in the system and
checks the address against the fixed and programmable regions to see if the access is allowed. If allowed,
the transfer is passed unmodified to its output bus (to the targeted address). If the transfer is illegal (fails
the protection check) then the MPU does not pass the transfer to the output bus but rather services the
transfer internally back to the input bus (to prevent a hang) returning the fault status to the requestor as
well as generating an interrupt about the fault. The following features are supported by the MPU:
• Provides memory protection for fixed and programmable address ranges.
• Supports multiple programmable address region.
• Supports secure and debug access privileges.
• Supports read, write, and execute access privileges.
• Supports privid(8) associations with ranges.
• Generates an interrupt when there is a protection violation, and saves violating transfer parameters.
• MMR access is also protected.
MPU1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 4000
REVID
0x01E1 4004
CONFIG
0x01E1 4010
IRAWSTAT
0x01E1 4014
IENSTAT
0x01E1 4018
IENSET
Interrupt enable
0x01E1 401C
IENCLR
Interrupt enable clear
Revision ID
Configuration
Interrupt raw status/set
Interrupt enable status/clear
0x01E1 4020 - 0x01E1 41FF
-
0x01E1 4200
PROG1_MPSAR
Programmable range 1, start address
0x01E1 4204
PROG1_MPEAR
Programmable range 1, end address
Reserved
0x01E1 4208
PROG1_MPPA
0x01E1 420C - 0x01E1 420F
-
0x01E1 4210
PROG2_MPSAR
Programmable range 2, start address
0x01E1 4214
PROG2_MPEAR
Programmable range 2, end address
Programmable range 1, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
0x01E1 4218
PROG2_MPPA
0x01E1 421C - 0x01E1 421F
-
0x01E1 4220
PROG3_MPSAR
Programmable range 3, start address
0x01E1 4224
PROG3_MPEAR
Programmable range 3, end address
0x01E1 4228
PROG3_MPPA
0x01E1 422C - 0x01E1 422F
-
0x01E1 4230
PROG4_MPSAR
Programmable range 4, start address
0x01E1 4234
PROG4_MPEAR
Programmable range 4, end address
0x01E1 4238
PROG4_MPPA
0x01E1 423C - 0x01E1 423F
-
0x01E1 4240
PROG5_MPSAR
Programmable range 5, start address
0x01E1 4244
PROG5_MPEAR
Programmable range 5, end address
0x01E1 4248
PROG5_MPPA
Programmable range 2, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 3, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 4, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 5, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 424C - 0x01E1 424F
-
0x01E1 4250
PROG6_MPSAR
Programmable range 6, start address
0x01E1 4254
PROG6_MPEAR
Programmable range 6, end address
0x01E1 4258
PROG6_MPPA
0x01E1 425C - 0x01E1 42FF
-
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-37. MPU1 Configuration Registers
Reserved
Programmable range 6, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
115
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-37. MPU1 Configuration Registers (continued)
MPU1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01E1 4300
FLTADDRR
0x01E1 4304
FLTSTAT
Fault status
0x01E1 4308
FLTCLR
Fault clear
0x01E1 430C - 0x01E1 4FFF
-
Reserved
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Fault address
Table 6-38. MPU2 Configuration Registers
MPU1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01E1 5000
REVID
0x01E1 5004
CONFIG
0x01E1 5010
IRAWSTAT
0x01E1 5014
IENSTAT
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Revision ID
Configuration
Interrupt raw status/set
Interrupt enable status/clear
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E1 5018
IENSET
Interrupt enable
0x01E1 501C
IENCLR
Interrupt enable clear
0x01E1 5020 - 0x01E1 50FF
-
0x01E1 5100
FXD_MPSAR
Fixed range start address
0x01E1 5104
FXD_MPEAR
Fixed range end start address
0x01E1 5108
FXD_MPPA
0x01E1 510C - 0x01E1 51FF
-
0x01E1 5200
PROG1_MPSAR
Programmable range 1, start address
0x01E1 5204
PROG1_MPEAR
Programmable range 1, end address
0x01E1 5208
PROG1_MPPA
Reserved
Fixed range memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 1, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 520C - 0x01E1 520F
-
0x01E1 5210
PROG2_MPSAR
Reserved
Programmable range 2, start address
0x01E1 5214
PROG2_MPEAR
Programmable range 2, end address
0x01E1 5218
PROG2_MPPA
Programmable range 2, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 521C - 0x01E1 521F
-
0x01E1 5220
PROG3_MPSAR
Reserved
Programmable range 3, start address
0x01E1 5224
PROG3_MPEAR
Programmable range 3, end address
0x01E1 5228
PROG3_MPPA
0x01E1 522C - 0x01E1 522F
-
Programmable range 3, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 5230
PROG4_MPSAR
Programmable range 4, start address
0x01E1 5234
PROG4_MPEAR
Programmable range 4, end address
0x01E1 5238
PROG4_MPPA
0x01E1 523C - 0x01E1 523F
-
0x01E1 5240
PROG5_MPSAR
Programmable range 5, start address
0x01E1 5244
PROG5_MPEAR
Programmable range 5, end address
0x01E1 5248
PROG5_MPPA
0x01E1 524C - 0x01E1 524F
-
0x01E1 5250
PROG6_MPSAR
Programmable range 6, start address
0x01E1 5254
PROG6_MPEAR
Programmable range 6, end address
0x01E1 5258
PROG6_MPPA
Reserved
Programmable range 4, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 5, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 6, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 525C - 0x01E1 525F
-
0x01E1 5260
PROG7_MPSAR
Programmable range 7, start address
0x01E1 5264
PROG7_MPEAR
Programmable range 7, end address
0x01E1 5268
PROG7_MPPA
116
Reserved
Programmable range 7, memory page protection attributes
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-38. MPU2 Configuration Registers (continued)
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 526C - 0x01E1 526F
-
0x01E1 5270
PROG8_MPSAR
Reserved
Programmable range 8, start address
0x01E1 5274
PROG8_MPEAR
Programmable range 8, end address
0x01E1 5278
PROG8_MPPA
0x01E1 527C - 0x01E1 527F
-
0x01E1 5280
PROG9_MPSAR
Programmable range 9, start address
0x01E1 5284
PROG9_MPEAR
Programmable range 9, end address
0x01E1 5288
PROG9_MPPA
0x01E1 528C - 0x01E1 528F
-
0x01E1 5290
PROG10_MPSAR
Programmable range 10, start address
0x01E1 5294
PROG10_MPEAR
Programmable range 10, end address
0x01E1 5298
PROG10_MPPA
Programmable range 8, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 9, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Programmable range 10, memory page protection attributes
0x01E1 529C - 0x01E1 529F
-
0x01E1 52A0
PROG11_MPSAR
Reserved
Programmable range 11, start address
0x01E1 52A4
PROG11_MPEAR
Programmable range 11, end address
0x01E1 52A8
PROG11_MPPA
0x01E1 52AC - 0x01E1 52AF
-
0x01E1 52B0
PROG12_MPSAR
Programmable range 12, start address
0x01E1 52B4
PROG12_MPEAR
Programmable range 12, end address
Programmable range 11, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
0x01E1 52B8
PROG12_MPPA
0x01E1 52BC - 0x01E1 52FF
-
0x01E1 5300
FLTADDRR
0x01E1 5304
FLTSTAT
Fault status
0x01E1 5308
FLTCLR
Fault clear
0x01E1 530C - 0x01E1 5FFF
-
Reserved
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
MPU1
BYTE ADDRESS
Programmable range 12, memory page protection attributes
Reserved
Fault address
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
117
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.13 MMC / SD / SDIO (MMCSD0, MMCSD1)
6.13.1 MMCSD Peripheral Description
The device includes an two MMCSD controllers which are compliant with MMC V3.31, Secure Digital Part
1 Physical Layer Specification V1.1 and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V2.0 specifications.
The MMC/SD Controller have following features:
• MultiMediaCard (MMC).
• Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card.
• MMC/SD protocol support.
• SDIO protocol support.
• Programmable clock frequency.
• 512 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead.
• Slave EDMA transfer capability.
The device MMC/SD Controller does not support SPI mode.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
6.13.2
MMCSD Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-39. Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) Card Controller Registers
MMCSD0
BYTE ADDRESS
MMCSD1
BYTE ADDRESS
0x01C4 0000
0x01E1 B000
MMCCTL
MMC Control Register
0x01C4 0004
0x01E1 B004
MMCCLK
MMC Memory Clock Control Register
0x01C4 0008
0x01E1 B008
MMCST0
MMC Status Register 0
0x01C4 000C
0x01E1 B00C
MMCST1
MMC Status Register 1
0x01C4 0010
0x01E1 B010
MMCIM
0x01C4 0014
0x01E1 B014
MMCTOR
MMC Response Time-Out Register
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCSRIPTION
MMC Interrupt Mask Register
0x01C4 0018
0x01E1 B018
MMCTOD
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register
0x01C4 001C
0x01E1 B01C
MMCBLEN
MMC Block Length Register
0x01C4 0020
0x01E1 B020
MMCNBLK
MMC Number of Blocks Register
0x01C4 0024
0x01E1 B024
MMCNBLC
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register
0x01C4 0028
0x01E1 B028
MMCDRR
MMC Data Receive Register
0x01C4 002C
0x01E1 B02C
MMCDXR
MMC Data Transmit Register
0x01C4 0030
0x01E1 B030
MMCCMD
MMC Command Register
0x01C4 0034
0x01E1 B034
MMCARGHL
MMC Argument Register
0x01C4 0038
0x01E1 B038
MMCRSP01
MMC Response Register 0 and 1
0x01C4 003C
0x01E1 B03C
MMCRSP23
MMC Response Register 2 and 3
0x01C4 0040
0x01E1 B040
MMCRSP45
MMC Response Register 4 and 5
0x01C4 0044
0x01E1 B044
MMCRSP67
MMC Response Register 6 and 7
0x01C4 0048
0x01E1 B048
MMCDRSP
MMC Data Response Register
0x01C4 0050
0x01E1 B050
MMCCIDX
MMC Command Index Register
0x01C4 0064
0x01E1 B064
SDIOCTL
SDIO Control Register
0x01C4 0068
0x01E1 B068
SDIOST0
SDIO Status Register 0
0x01C4 006C
0x01E1 B06C
SDIOIEN
SDIO Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C4 0070
0x01E1 B070
SDIOIST
SDIO Interrupt Status Register
0x01C4 0074
0x01E1 B074
MMCFIFOCTL
118
MMC FIFO Control Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.13.3 MMC/SD Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-40 through Table 6-41 assume testing over recommended operating conditions.
Table 6-40. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD
(see Figure 6-25 and Figure 6-27)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tsu(CMDV-CLKH) Setup time, MMCSD_CMD valid before MMCSD_CLK high
4
4
6
ns
2
th(CLKH-CMDV)
Hold time, MMCSD_CMD valid after MMCSD_CLK high
2.5
2.5
2.5
ns
3
tsu(DATV-CLKH)
Setup time, MMCSD_DATx valid before MMCSD_CLK high
4.5
5
6
ns
4
th(CLKH-DATV)
Hold time, MMCSD_DATx valid after MMCSD_CLK high
2.5
2.5
2.5
ns
Table 6-41. Switching Characteristics for MMC/SD (see Figure 6-24 through Figure 6-27)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
1.1V
1.0V
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
0
52
0
50
0
25
MHz
0
400
0
400
0
400
KHz
7
f(CLK)
Operating frequency, MMCSD_CLK
8
f(CLK_ID)
Identification mode frequency, MMCSD_CLK
9
tW(CLKL)
Pulse width, MMCSD_CLK low
6.5
6.5
10
ns
10
tW(CLKH)
Pulse width, MMCSD_CLK high
6.5
6.5
10
ns
11
tr(CLK)
Rise time, MMCSD_CLK
3
3
10
ns
12
tf(CLK)
Fall time, MMCSD_CLK
3
3
10
ns
13
td(CLKL-CMD)
Delay time, MMCSD_CLK low to MMCSD_CMD transition
-4
2.5
-4
3
-4
4
ns
14
td(CLKL-DAT)
Delay time, MMCSD_CLK low to MMCSD_DATx transition
-4
3.3
-4
3.5
-4
4
ns
10
9
7
MMCSD_CLK
13
13
START
MMCSD_CMD
13
XMIT
Valid
Valid
13
Valid
END
Figure 6-24. MMC/SD Host Command Timing
9
7
10
MMCSD_CLK
1
2
START
MMCSD_CMD
XMIT
Valid
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 6-25. MMC/SD Card Response Timing
10
9
7
MMCSD_CLK
14
MMCSD_DATx
14
START
14
D0
D1
Dx
14
END
Figure 6-26. MMC/SD Host Write Timing
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
119
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
9
10
7
MMCSD_CLK
4
4
3
MMCSD_DATx
Start
3
D0
D1
Dx
End
Figure 6-27. MMC/SD Host Read and Card CRC Status Timing
ADVANCE INFORMATION
120
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.14 Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)
•
•
Transmit & Receive FIFO Buffers allow the McASP to operate at a higher sample rate by making it
more tolerant to DMA latency.
Dynamic Adjustment of Clock Dividers
– Clock Divider Value may be changed without resetting the McASP
Pins
Peripheral
Configuration
Bus
GIO
Control
DIT RAM
384 C
384 U
Optional
Receive Logic
C lo ck /F ra m e G e n e ra to r
State Machine
Clock Check and
Error Detection
McASP
DMA Bus
(Dedicated)
Receive
F o rm a tte r
AHCLKRx
Receive Master Clock
ACLKRx
Receive Bit Clock
AFSRx
R e c e iv e L e ft/R ig h t C lo ck o r F ra m e S y n c
AMUTEINx
The McASP DOES NOT have a
AMUTEx
dedicated AMUTEIN pin.
AFSXx
AHCLKXx
Tra n s m it L e ft/R ig h t C lo ck o r F ra m e S y n c
Tra n s m it B it C lo ck
Tra n s m it M a s te r C lo ck
Serializer 0
AXRx[0]
Tra n s m it/R e c e iv e S e ria l D a ta P in
Serializer 1
AXRx[1]
Tra n s m it/R e c e iv e S e ria l D a ta P in
Serializer y
AXRx[y]
Tra n s m it/R e c e iv e S e ria l D a ta P in
Tra n s m it L o g ic
C lo ck /F ra m e G e n e ra to r
State Machine
Tra n s m it
F o rm a tte r
Function
ACLKXx
McASP
Figure 6-28. McASP Block Diagram
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
121
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The McASP serial port is specifically designed for multichannel audio applications. Its key features are:
• Flexible clock and frame sync generation logic and on-chip dividers
• Up to sixteen transmit or receive data pins and serializers
• Large number of serial data format options, including:
– TDM Frames with 2 to 32 time slots per frame (periodic) or 1 slot per frame (burst)
– Time slots of 8,12,16, 20, 24, 28, and 32 bits
– First bit delay 0, 1, or 2 clocks
– MSB or LSB first bit order
– Left- or right-aligned data words within time slots
• DIT Mode with 384-bit Channel Status and 384-bit User Data registers
• Extensive error checking and mute generation logic
• All unused pins GPIO-capable
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.14.1 McASP Peripheral Registers Description(s)
Registers for the McASP are summarized in Table 6-42. The registers are accessed through the
peripheral configuration port. The receive buffer registers (RBUF) and transmit buffer registers (XBUF) can
also be accessed through the DMA port, as listed in Table 6-43
Registers for the McASP Audio FIFO (AFIFO) are summarized in Table 6-44. Note that the AFIFO Write
FIFO (WFIFO) and Read FIFO (RFIFO) have independent control and status registers. The AFIFO control
registers are accessed through the peripheral configuration port.
Table 6-42. McASP Registers Accessed Through Peripheral Configuration Port
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01D0 0000
REV
0x01D0 0010
PFUNC
Pin function register
0x01D0 0014
PDIR
Pin direction register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01D0 0018
PDOUT
0x01D0 001C
PDIN
0x01D0 001C
PDSET
Writes affect: Pin data set register (alternate write address: PDOUT)
0x01D0 0020
PDCLR
Pin data clear register (alternate write address: PDOUT)
0x01D0 0044
GBLCTL
Global control register
0x01D0 0048
AMUTE
Audio mute control register
0x01D0 004C
DLBCTL
Digital loopback control register
0x01D0 0050
DITCTL
DIT mode control register
0x01D0 0060
RGBLCTL
0x01D0 0064
RMASK
0x01D0 0068
RFMT
0x01D0 006C
AFSRCTL
Pin data output register
Read returns: Pin data input register
Receiver global control register: Alias of GBLCTL, only receive bits are
affected - allows receiver to be reset independently from transmitter
Receive format unit bit mask register
Receive bit stream format register
Receive frame sync control register
0x01D0 0070
ACLKRCTL
0x01D0 0074
AHCLKRCTL
0x01D0 0078
RTDM
0x01D0 007C
RINTCTL
0x01D0 0080
RSTAT
Receiver status register
0x01D0 0084
RSLOT
Current receive TDM time slot register
0x01D0 0088
RCLKCHK
Receive clock check control register
0x01D0 008C
REVTCTL
Receiver DMA event control register
XGBLCTL
Transmitter global control register. Alias of GBLCTL, only transmit bits are
affected - allows transmitter to be reset independently from receiver
0x01D0 00A0
122
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Revision identification register
Receive clock control register
Receive high-frequency clock control register
Receive TDM time slot 0-31 register
Receiver interrupt control register
0x01D0 00A4
XMASK
0x01D0 00A8
XFMT
Transmit format unit bit mask register
0x01D0 00AC
AFSXCTL
0x01D0 00B0
ACLKXCTL
0x01D0 00B4
AHCLKXCTL
0x01D0 00B8
XTDM
Transmit TDM time slot 0-31 register
0x01D0 00BC
XINTCTL
Transmitter interrupt control register
Transmit bit stream format register
Transmit frame sync control register
Transmit clock control register
Transmit high-frequency clock control register
0x01D0 00C0
XSTAT
Transmitter status register
0x01D0 00C4
XSLOT
Current transmit TDM time slot register
0x01D0 00C8
XCLKCHK
Transmit clock check control register
0x01D0 00CC
XEVTCTL
Transmitter DMA event control register
0x01D0 0100
DITCSRA0
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 0
0x01D0 0104
DITCSRA1
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 1
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-42. McASP Registers Accessed Through Peripheral Configuration Port (continued)
(1)
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01D0 0108
DITCSRA2
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 2
0x01D0 010C
DITCSRA3
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 3
0x01D0 0110
DITCSRA4
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 4
0x01D0 0114
DITCSRA5
Left (even TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 5
0x01D0 0118
DITCSRB0
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 0
0x01D0 011C
DITCSRB1
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 1
0x01D0 0120
DITCSRB2
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 2
0x01D0 0124
DITCSRB3
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 3
0x01D0 0128
DITCSRB4
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 4
0x01D0 012C
DITCSRB5
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel status register (DIT mode) 5
0x01D0 0130
DITUDRA0
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 0
0x01D0 0134
DITUDRA1
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 1
0x01D0 0138
DITUDRA2
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 2
0x01D0 013C
DITUDRA3
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 3
0x01D0 0140
DITUDRA4
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 4
0x01D0 0144
DITUDRA5
Left (even TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 5
0x01D0 0148
DITUDRB0
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 0
0x01D0 014C
DITUDRB1
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 1
0x01D0 0150
DITUDRB2
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 2
0x01D0 0154
DITUDRB3
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 3
0x01D0 0158
DITUDRB4
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 4
0x01D0 015C
DITUDRB5
Right (odd TDM time slot) channel user data register (DIT mode) 5
0x01D0 0180
SRCTL0
Serializer control register 0
0x01D0 0184
SRCTL1
Serializer control register 1
0x01D0 0188
SRCTL2
Serializer control register 2
0x01D0 018C
SRCTL3
Serializer control register 3
0x01D0 0190
SRCTL4
Serializer control register 4
0x01D0 0194
SRCTL5
Serializer control register 5
0x01D0 0198
SRCTL6
Serializer control register 6
0x01D0 019C
SRCTL7
Serializer control register 7
0x01D0 01A0
SRCTL8
Serializer control register 8
0x01D0 01A4
SRCTL9
Serializer control register 9
0x01D0 01A8
SRCTL10
Serializer control register 10
0x01D0 01AC
SRCTL11
Serializer control register 11
0x01D0 01B0
SRCTL12
Serializer control register 12
0x01D0 01B4
SRCTL13
Serializer control register 13
0x01D0 01B8
SRCTL14
Serializer control register 14
0x01D0 01BC
SRCTL15
Serializer control register 15
0x01D0 0200
XBUF0 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 0
0x01D0 0204
XBUF1 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 1
0x01D0 0208
XBUF2
(1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 2
0x01D0 020C
XBUF3 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 3
0x01D0 0210
XBUF4 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 4
0x01D0 0214
XBUF5
(1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 5
0x01D0 0218
XBUF6 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 6
0x01D0 021C
XBUF7 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 7
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
Writes to XRBUF originate from peripheral configuration port only when XBUSEL = 1 in XFMT.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
123
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-42. McASP Registers Accessed Through Peripheral Configuration Port (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(2)
(3)
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01D0 0220
XBUF8
(1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 8
0x01D0 0224
XBUF9 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 9
0x01D0 0228
XBUF10 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 10
0x01D0 022C
XBUF11
(1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 11
0x01D0 0230
XBUF12 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 12
0x01D0 0234
XBUF13 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 13
0x01D0 0238
XBUF14
(1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 14
0x01D0 023C
XBUF15 (1)
Transmit buffer register for serializer 15
0x01D0 0280
RBUF0 (2)
Receive buffer register for serializer 0
0x01D0 0284
RBUF1 (2)
Receive buffer register for serializer 1
0x01D0 0288
RBUF2
(2)
Receive buffer register for serializer 2
0x01D0 028C
RBUF3 (2)
Receive buffer register for serializer 3
0x01D0 0290
RBUF4 (2)
Receive buffer register for serializer 4
0x01D0 0294
RBUF5
(3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 5
0x01D0 0298
RBUF6 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 6
0x01D0 029C
RBUF7 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 7
0x01D0 02A0
RBUF8
(3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 8
0x01D0 02A4
RBUF9 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 9
0x01D0 02A8
RBUF10 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 10
0x01D0 02AC
RBUF11 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 11
0x01D0 02B0
RBUF12
(3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 12
0x01D0 02B4
RBUF13 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 13
0x01D0 02B8
RBUF14 (3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 14
0x01D0 02BC
(3)
Receive buffer register for serializer 15
RBUF15
Reads from XRBUF originate on peripheral configuration port only when RBUSEL = 1 in RFMT.
Reads from XRBUF originate on peripheral configuration port only when RBUSEL = 1 in RFMT.
Table 6-43. McASP Registers Accessed Through DMA Port
ACCESS TYPE
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
Read Accesses
0x01D0 2000
RBUF
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Receive buffer DMA port address. Cycles through receive
serializers, skipping over transmit serializers and inactive
serializers. Starts at the lowest serializer at the beginning of each
time slot. Reads from DMA port only if XBUSEL = 0 in XFMT.
Write Accesses
0x01D0 2000
XBUF
Transmit buffer DMA port address. Cycles through transmit
serializers, skipping over receive and inactive serializers. Starts at
the lowest serializer at the beginning of each time slot. Writes to
DMA port only if RBUSEL = 0 in RFMT.
Table 6-44. McASP AFIFO Registers Accessed Through Peripheral Configuration Port
124
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01D0 1000
AFIFOREV
AFIFO revision identification register
0x01D0 1010
WFIFOCTL
Write FIFO control register
0x01D0 1014
WFIFOSTS
Write FIFO status register
0x01D0 1018
RFIFOCTL
Read FIFO control register
0x01D0 101C
RFIFOSTS
Read FIFO status register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.14.2 McASP Electrical Data/Timing
6.14.2.1 Multichannel Audio Serial Port 0 (McASP0) Timing
Table 6-45 and Table 6-47 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 6-29 and
Figure 6-30).
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
1
tc(AHCLKRX)
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
2
tw(AHCLKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
3
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
4
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/W high or low
5
tsu(AFSRX-ACLKRX)
Setup time,
AFSR/X input to ACLKR/X
6
7
8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
th(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
tsu(AXR-ACLKRX)
th(ACLKRX-AXR)
(4)
Hold time,
AFSR/X input after ACLKR/X (4)
Setup time,
AXR0[n] input to ACLKR/X (4)
(5)
Hold time,
AXR0[n] input after ACLKR/X (4)
(2)
(5)
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
UNIT
25
28
ns
12.5
14
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
25 (3)
28 (3)
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
12.5
14
ns
AHCLKR/X int
11.5
12
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
4
5
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
4
5
ns
AHCLKR/X int
-1
-2
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
1
1
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
1
1
ns
AHCLKR/X int
11.5
12
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
4
5
ns
AHCLKR/X int
-1
-2
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
3
4
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
3
4
ns
ACLKX0 internal – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX0 external input – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0
ACLKX0 external output – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKR0 internal – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR =1
ACLKR0 external input – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0
ACLKR0 external output – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
P = SYSCLK2 period
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 2P, whichever is greater.
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=1: Receiver is clocked by its own ACLKR0
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=0: Receiver is clocked by transmitter's ACLKX0
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
125
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-45. Timing Requirements for McASP0 (1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V) (1)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-46. Timing Requirements for McASP0 (1.0V) (1)
NO.
tc(AHCLKRX)
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
2
tw(AHCLKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
3
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
4
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/W high or low
6
7
ADVANCE INFORMATION
8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
126
1.0V
PARAMETER
1
5
(2)
tsu(AFSRX-ACLKRX)
Setup time,
AFSR/X input to ACLKR/X
(4)
th(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
Hold time,
AFSR/X input after ACLKR/X (4)
tsu(AXR-ACLKRX)
Setup time,
AXR0[n] input to ACLKR/X (4)
th(ACLKRX-AXR)
(5)
Hold time,
AXR0[n] input after ACLKR/X (4)
(5)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
35
ns
17.5
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
35 (3)
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
17.5
ns
AHCLKR/X int
16
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
5.5
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
5.5
ns
AHCLKR/X int
-2
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
1
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
1
ns
AHCLKR/X int
16
ns
AHCLKR/X ext
5.5
ns
AHCLKR/X int
-2
ns
AHCLKR/X ext input
5
ns
AHCLKR/X ext output
5
ns
ACLKX0 internal – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX0 external input – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0
ACLKX0 external output – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKR0 internal – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR =1
ACLKR0 external input – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0
ACLKR0 external output – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
P = SYSCLK2 period
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 2P, whichever is greater.
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=1: Receiver is clocked by its own ACLKR0
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=0: Receiver is clocked by transmitter's ACLKX0
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-47. Switching Characteristics for McASP0 (1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V) (1)
9
tc(AHCLKRX)
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
10
tw(AHCLKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
11
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
12
tw(ACLKRX)
13
td(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
14
15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
ACLKR/X int
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to
AFSX/R output valid (6)
ACLKR/X int
1.1V
MAX
MIN
MAX
25
28
AH – 2.5 (2)
AH – 2.5 (2)
25 (3)
(4)
A – 2.5
28 (3)
(5)
UNIT
ns
ns
(4)
A – 2.5
ns
(5)
ns
ACLKR/X int
-1
6
-1
8
ns
ACLKR/X ext input
2
13.5
2
14.5
ns
ACLKR/X ext output
2
13.5
2
14.5
ns
ACLKR/X int
-1
6
-1
8
ns
ACLKR/X ext input
2
13.5
2
15
ns
ACLKR/X ext output
2
13.5
2
15
ns
0
6
0
8
ns
2
13.5
2
15
ns
td(ACLKX-AXRV)
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to
AXR output valid
tdis(ACLKX-AXRHZ)
Disable time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to ACLKR/X int
AXR high impedance following last data
ACLKR/X ext
bit
McASP0 ACLKX0 internal – ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX0 external input – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0
ACLKX0 external output – McASP0ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKR0 internal – McASP0 ACLKR0CTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR =1
ACLKR0 external input – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0
ACLKR0 external output – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
AH = (AHCLKR/X period)/2 in ns. For example, when AHCLKR/X period is 25 ns, use AH = 12.5 ns.
P = SYSCLK2 period
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 2P, whichever is greater.
A = (ACLKR/X period)/2 in ns. For example, when AHCLKR/X period is 25 ns, use AH = 12.5 ns.
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=1: Receiver is clocked by its own ACLKR0
Table 6-48. Switching Characteristics for McASP0 (1.0V) (1)
NO.
9
1.0V
PARAMETER
tc(AHCLKRX)
MIN
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
MAX
35
UNIT
ns
AH – 2.5
(2)
10
tw(AHCLKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
11
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X int
12
tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
ACLKR/X int
A – 2.5 (5)
ACLKR/X int
-0.5
10
ns
13
td(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AFSX/R output valid (6) ACLKR/X ext input
2
19
ns
2
19
ns
ACLKR/X ext output
ACLKR/X int
14
15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
td(ACLKX-AXRV)
tdis(ACLKX-AXRHZ)
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to AXR output valid
Disable time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AXR high
impedance following last data bit
35 (3)
ns
(4)
ns
ns
-0.5
10
ns
ACLKR/X ext input
2
19
ns
ACLKR/X ext output
2
19
ns
ACLKR/X int
0
10
ns
ACLKR/X ext
2
19
ns
McASP0 ACLKX0 internal – ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX0 external input – McASP0 ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0
ACLKX0 external output – McASP0ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKR0 internal – McASP0 ACLKR0CTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR =1
ACLKR0 external input – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0
ACLKR0 external output – McASP0 ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
AH = (AHCLKR/X period)/2 in ns. For example, when AHCLKR/X period is 25 ns, use AH = 12.5 ns.
P = SYSCLK2 period
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 2P, whichever is greater.
A = (ACLKR/X period)/2 in ns. For example, when AHCLKR/X period is 25 ns, use AH = 12.5 ns.
McASP0 ACLKXCTL.ASYNC=1: Receiver is clocked by its own ACLKR0
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
127
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
2
1
2
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
4
3
4
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(A)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(B)
6
5
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
8
7
AXR[n] (Data In/Receive)
A.
B.
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
A0 A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3
C31
0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
falling edge (to shift data in).
1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
rising edge (to shift data in).
Figure 6-29. McASP Input Timings
128
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
10
10
9
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
12
11
12
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(A)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(B)
13
13
13
13
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
14
15
AXR[n] (Data Out/Transmit)
A0
A.
B.
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
For CLKRP = CLKXP =
receiver is configured for
A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0
C1 C2 C3
C31
1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
rising edge (to shift data in).
0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
falling edge (to shift data in).
Figure 6-30. McASP Output Timings
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
129
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.15 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
The McBSP provides these functions:
• Full-duplex communication
• Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
• Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
• Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices
• External shift clock or an internal, programmable frequency shift clock for data transfer
• Transmit & Receive FIFO Buffers allow the McBSP to operate at a higher sample rate by making it
more tolerant to DMA latency
If internal clock source is used, the CLKGDV field of the Sample Rate Generator Register (SRGR) must
always be set to a value of 1 or greater.
6.15.1 McBSP Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-49. McBSP/FIFO Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
McBSP0
BYTE
ADDRESS
McBSP1
BYTE
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01D1 0000
0x01D1 1000
DRR
McBSP Data Receive Register (read-only)
0x01D1 0004
0x01D1 1004
DXR
McBSP Data Transmit Register
0x01D1 0008
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
McBSP Registers
0x01D1 1008
SPCR
0x01D1 000C 0x01D1 100C
RCR
McBSP Serial Port Control Register
McBSP Receive Control Register
0x01D1 0010
0x01D1 1010
XCR
McBSP Transmit Control Register
0x01D1 0014
0x01D1 1014
SRGR
0x01D1 0018
0x01D1 1018
MCR
McBSP Sample Rate Generator register
McBSP Multichannel Control Register
0x01D1 001C 0x01D1 101C
RCERE0
McBSP Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register 0 Partition A/B
0x01D1 0020
0x01D1 1020
XCERE0
McBSP Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register 0 Partition A/B
0x01D1 0024
0x01D1 1024
PCR
0x01D1 0028
0x01D1 1028
RCERE1
McBSP Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register 1 Partition C/D
0x01D1 002C 0x01D1 102C
XCERE1
McBSP Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register 1 Partition C/D
0x01D1 0030
0x01D1 1030
RCERE2
McBSP Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register 2 Partition E/F
0x01D1 0034
0x01D1 1034
XCERE2
McBSP Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register 2 Partition E/F
0x01D1 0038
0x01D1 1038
RCERE3
McBSP Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register 3 Partition G/H
0x01D1 003C 0x01D1 103C
XCERE3
McBSP Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register 3 Partition G/H
McBSP Pin Control Register
McBSP FIFO Control and Status Registers
0x01D1 0800
0x01D1 1800
BFIFOREV
BFIFO Revision Identification Register
0x01D1 0810
0x01D1 1810
WFIFOCTL
Write FIFO Control Register
0x01D1 0814
0x01D1 1814
WFIFOSTS
Write FIFO Status Register
0x01D1 0818
0x01D1 1818
RFIFOCTL
Read FIFO Control Register
0x01D1 081C 0x01D1 181C
RFIFOSTS
Read FIFO Status Register
McBSP FIFO Data Registers
0x01F1 0000
0x01F1 1000
RBUF
McBSP FIFO Receive Buffer
0x01F1 0000
0x01F1 1000
XBUF
McBSP FIFO Transmit Buffer
130
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.15.2 McBSP Electrical Data/Timing
The following assume testing over recommended operating conditions.
6.15.2.1
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 6-50. Timing Requirements for McBSP0 [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1) (see Figure 6-31)
2
3
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
MIN
2P or 20 (2)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
(4)
CLKR int
14
15.5
CLKR ext
4
5
CLKR int
6
6
CLKR ext
3
3
CLKR int
14
15.5
CLKR ext
4
5
CLKR int
3
3
CLKR ext
3
3
CLKX int
14
15.5
CLKX ext
4
5
CLKX int
6
6
CLKX ext
3
3
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR
low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
P-1
(3)
MIN
CLKR/X ext
Cycle time, CLKR/X
5
(1)
1.1V
MAX
2P or 25 (2)
P-1
MAX
(3)
(4)
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
131
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-51. Timing Requirements for McBSP0 [1.0V] (1) (see Figure 6-31)
NO.
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
2P or
26.6 (2) (3)
ns
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
P - 1 (4)
ns
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
132
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKR int
20
CLKR ext
5
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
20
CLKR ext
5
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3
CLKX int
20
CLKX ext
5
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-52. Switching Characteristics for McBSP0 [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1)
(see Figure 6-31)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal
CLKR/X generated from CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or
CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR
valid
CLKR int
CLKR ext
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX
valid
CLKX int
CLKX ext
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance
following last data bit from CLKX high
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
14
td(FXH-DXV)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(2)
1.1V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
2
14.5
2
16
2P or 20 (3)
2P or 25 (3)
(4) (5)
ns
ns
(4) (5)
C + 2 (6)
C - 2 (6)
C + 2 (6)
ns
-4
5.5
-4
5.5
ns
2
14.5
2
16
-4
5.5
-4
5.5
2
14.5
2
16
CLKX int
-4
7.5
-5.5
7.5
CLKX ext
-2
16
-22
16
CLKX int
-4 + D1 (7)
CLKX ext
C - 2 (6)
UNIT
2 + D1
(7)
5.5 + D2 (7)
14.5 + D2
(7)
-4 + D1 (7)
5.5 + D2 (7)
(7)
16 + D2 (7)
2 + D1
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
-4 (8)
5 (8)
-4 (8)
5 (8)
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
-2 (8)
14.5 (8)
-2 (8)
16 (8)
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = ASYNC period)
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
133
ADVANCE INFORMATION
www.ti.com
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-53. Switching Characteristics for McBSP0 [1.0V] (1)
(see Figure 6-31)
NO.
(2)
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
3
21.5
UNIT
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated from
CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
2P or
26.6 (3) (4)
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
C - 2 (6)
C + 2 (6)
ns
CLKR int
-4
10
ns
CLKR ext
2.5
21.5
ADVANCE INFORMATION
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from CLKX
high
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
14
td(FXH-DXV)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ns
(5)
CLKX int
-4
10
CLKX ext
2.5
21.5
CLKX int
-4
10
CLKX ext
-2
21.5
CLKX int
-4 + D1 (7)
CLKX ext
2.5 + D1
ns
10 + D2 (7)
(7)
21.5 + D2 (7)
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
-4 (8)
5 (8)
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
-2 (8)
21.5 (8)
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = ASYNC period)
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Table 6-54. Timing Requirements for McBSP1 [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1) (see Figure 6-31)
NO.
2
3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
134
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
MIN
CLKR/X ext
2P or 20 (2)
CLKR/X ext
(5)
P-1
1.1V
MAX
(3)
MIN
2P or 25 (2)
P-1
(6)
MAX
(4)
UNIT
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-54. Timing Requirements for McBSP1 [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V]
NO.
(1)
(see Figure 6-31 ) (continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR
low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
MAX
MIN
CLKR int
15
18
CLKR ext
5
5
CLKR int
6
6
CLKR ext
3
3
CLKR int
15
18
CLKR ext
5
5
CLKR int
3
3
CLKR ext
3
3
CLKX int
15
18
CLKX ext
5
5
CLKX int
6
6
CLKX ext
3
3
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
1.1V
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
135
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-55. Timing Requirements for McBSP1 [1.0V] (1) (see Figure 6-31)
NO.
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
2P or
26.6 (2) (3)
ns
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
P - 1 (4)
ns
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
136
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKR int
21
CLKR ext
10
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
21
CLKR ext
10
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3
CLKX int
21
CLKX ext
10
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock
source. The minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA
limitations and AC timing requirements.
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-56. Switching Characteristics for McBSP1 [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1)
(see Figure 6-31)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MAX
MIN
MAX
0.5
16.5
1.5
18
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal
CLKR/X generated from CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or
CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR
valid
CLKR int
CLKR ext
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX
valid
CLKX int
CLKX ext
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance
following last data bit from CLKX high
CLKX int
CLKX ext
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
CLKX int
-4 + D1 (7)
14
td(FXH-DXV)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
CLKX ext
1.1V
MIN
1
(1)
(2)
2P or 20 (3)
2P or 25 (3)
(4) (5)
C - 2 (6)
UNIT
ns
ns
(4) (5)
C + 2 (6)
C - 2 (6)
C + 2 (6)
ns
-4
6.5
-4
13
ns
1
16.5
1
18
-4
6.5
-4
13
1
16.5
1
18
-4
6.5
-4
13
-2
16.5
-2
18
1 + D1
(7)
6.5 + D2 (7)
16.5 + D2
(7)
-4 + D1 (7)
13 + D2 (7)
(7)
18 + D2 (7)
1 + D1
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
-4 (8)
6.5 (8)
-4 (8)
13 (8)
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
-2 (8)
16.5 (8)
-2 (8)
18 (9)
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = ASYNC period)
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
137
ADVANCE INFORMATION
www.ti.com
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-57. Switching Characteristics for McBSP1 [1.0V] (1)
(see Figure 6-31)
NO.
(2)
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.5
23
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated from
CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
2P or
26.6 (3) (4)
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
C - 2 (6)
C + 2 (6)
ns
CLKR int
-4
13
ns
CLKR ext
2.5
23
CLKX int
-4
13
CLKX ext
1
23
CLKX int
-4
13
CLKX ext
-2
23
CLKX int
-4 + D1 (7)
13 + D2 (8)
(8)
23 + D2 (8)
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from CLKX
high
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
14
td(FXH-DXV)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
138
CLKX ext
ns
(5)
1 + D1
ns
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
-4 (9)
13 (9)
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
-2 (9)
23 (9)
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
P = AYNC3 period in ns. For example, when the ASYNC clock domain is running at 100 MHz, use 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = ASYNC period)
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 6P, D2 = 12P
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
8
DR
Bit(n1)
(n2)
(n3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
14
13 (A)
Bit(n1)
12
DX
Bit 0
13 (A)
(n2)
(n3)
Figure 6-31. McBSP Timing(B)
Table 6-58. Timing Requirements for McBSP0 FSR When GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 6-32)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
4
4.5
5
ns
2
th(CKSH-FRH)
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
4
4
ns
Table 6-59. Timing Requirements for McBSP1 FSR When GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 6-32)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
5
5
10
ns
2
th(CKSH-FRH)
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
4
4
ns
CLKS
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 6-32. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
139
ADVANCE INFORMATION
FSX (int)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.16 Serial Peripheral Interface Ports (SPI0, SPI1)
Figure 6-33 is a block diagram of the SPI module, which is a simple shift register and buffer plus control
logic. Data is written to the shift register before transmission occurs and is read from the buffer at the end
of transmission. The SPI can operate either as a master, in which case, it initiates a transfer and drives
the SPIx_CLK pin, or as a slave. Four clock phase and polarity options are supported as well as many
data formatting options.
SPIx_SIMO
SPIx_SOMI
Peripheral
Configuration Bus
Interrupt and
DMA Requests
16-Bit Shift Register
16-Bit Buffer
SPIx_ENA
State
GPIO
Machine SPIx_SCS
Control
(all pins) Clock SPIx_CLK
Control
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Figure 6-33. Block Diagram of SPI Module
The SPI supports 3-, 4-, and 5-pin operation with three basic pins (SPIx_CLK, SPIx_SIMO, and
SPIx_SOMI) and two optional pins (SPIx_SCS, SPIx_ENA).
The optional SPIx_SCS (Slave Chip Select) pin is most useful to enable in slave mode when there are
other slave devices on the same SPI port. The device will only shift data and drive the SPIx_SOMI pin
when SPIx_SCS is held low.
In slave mode, SPIx_ENA is an optional output and can be driven in either a push-pull or open-drain
manner. The SPIx_ENA output provides the status of the internal transmit buffer (SPIDAT0/1 registers). In
four-pin mode with the enable option, SPIx_ENA is asserted only when the transmit buffer is full, indicating
that the slave is ready to begin another transfer. In five-pin mode, the SPIx_ENA is additionally qualified
by SPIx_SCS being asserted. This allows a single handshake line to be shared by multiple slaves on the
same SPI bus.
In master mode, the SPIx_ENA pin is an optional input and the master can be configured to delay the start
of the next transfer until the slave asserts SPIx_ENA. The addition of this handshake signal simplifies SPI
communications and, on average, increases SPI bus throughput since the master does not need to delay
each transfer long enough to allow for the worst-case latency of the slave device. Instead, each transfer
can begin as soon as both the master and slave have actually serviced the previous SPI transfer.
140
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Optional − Slave Chip Select
SPIx_SCS
SPIx_SCS
SPIx_ENA
SPIx_ENA
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_SOMI
SPIx_SOMI
SPIx_SIMO
SPIx_SIMO
MASTER SPI
SLAVE SPI
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Optional Enable (Ready)
Figure 6-34. Illustration of SPI Master-to-SPI Slave Connection
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
141
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.16.1 SPI Peripheral Registers Description(s)
Table 6-60 is a list of the SPI registers.
Table 6-60. SPIx Configuration Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
142
SPI0
BYTE ADDRESS
SPI1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C4 1000
0x01F0 E000
SPIGCR0
Global Control Register 0
0x01C4 1004
0x01F0 E004
SPIGCR1
Global Control Register 1
0x01C4 1008
0x01F0 E008
SPIINT0
Interrupt Register
0x01C4 100C
0x01F0 E00C
SPILVL
Interrupt Level Register
0x01C4 1010
0x01F0 E010
SPIFLG
Flag Register
0x01C4 1014
0x01F0 E014
SPIPC0
Pin Control Register 0 (Pin Function)
0x01C4 1018
0x01F0 E018
SPIPC1
Pin Control Register 1 (Pin Direction)
0x01C4 101C
0x01F0 E01C
SPIPC2
Pin Control Register 2 (Pin Data In)
0x01C4 1020
0x01F0 E020
SPIPC3
Pin Control Register 3 (Pin Data Out)
0x01C4 1024
0x01F0 E024
SPIPC4
Pin Control Register 4 (Pin Data Set)
DESCRIPTION
0x01C4 1028
0x01F0 E028
SPIPC5
Pin Control Register 5 (Pin Data Clear)
0x01C4 102C
0x01F0 E02C
Reserved
Reserved - Do not write to this register
0x01C4 1030
0x01F0 E030
Reserved
Reserved - Do not write to this register
0x01C4 1034
0x01F0 E034
Reserved
Reserved - Do not write to this register
0x01C4 1038
0x01F0 E038
SPIDAT0
Shift Register 0 (without format select)
0x01C4 103C
0x01F0 E03C
SPIDAT1
Shift Register 1 (with format select)
0x01C4 1040
0x01F0 E040
SPIBUF
Buffer Register
0x01C4 1044
0x01F0 E044
SPIEMU
Emulation Register
0x01C4 1048
0x01F0 E048
SPIDELAY
0x01C4 104C
0x01F0 E04C
SPIDEF
Default Chip Select Register
0x01C4 1050
0x01F0 E050
SPIFMT0
Format Register 0
0x01C4 1054
0x01F0 E054
SPIFMT1
Format Register 1
0x01C4 1058
0x01F0 E058
SPIFMT2
Format Register 2
0x01C4 105C
0x01F0 E05C
SPIFMT3
Format Register 3
0x01C4 1060
0x01F0 E060
INTVEC0
Interrupt Vector for SPI INT0
0x01C4 1064
0x01F0 E064
INTVEC1
Interrupt Vector for SPI INT1
Delay Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.16.2 SPI Electrical Data/Timing
6.16.2.1 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Timing
Table 6-61 through Table 6-76 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 6-35
through Figure 6-38).
Table 6-61. General Timing Requirements for SPI0 Master Modes (1)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20 (2)
256P
30 (2)
256P
40 (2)
256P
UNIT
1
tc(SPC)M
Cycle Time, SPI0_CLK, All Master
Modes
2
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse Width High, SPI0_CLK, All
Master Modes
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
ns
3
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse Width Low, SPI0_CLK, All
Master Modes
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
5
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+6
td(SIMO_SPC)M
Delay,
initial
data bit
valid on
SPI0_SI
MO after
initial
edge on
SPI0_CL
K (3)
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
5
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+6
Delay,
subsequ
ent bits
valid on
SPI0_SI
MO after
transmit
edge of
SPI0_CL
K
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
5
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
5
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
5
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
5
5
6
Output
hold
time,
SPI0_SI
MO valid
after
receive
edge of
SPI0_CL
K
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Input
Setup
Time,
SPI0_S
OMI
valid
before
receive
edge of
SPI0_CL
K
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
4
5
6
7
(1)
(2)
(3)
td(SPC_SIMO)M
toh(SPC_SIMO)M
tsu(SOMI_SPC)M
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 3P, whichever is greater.
First bit may be MSB or LSB depending upon SPI configuration. MO(0) refers to first bit and MO(n) refers to last bit output on
SPI0_SIMO. MI(0) refers to the first bit input and MI(n) refers to the last bit input on SPI0_SOMI.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
143
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-61. General Timing Requirements for SPI0 Master Modes
NO.
8
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tih(SPC_SOMI)M
Input
Hold
Time,
SPI0_S
OMI
valid
after
receive
edge of
SPI0_CL
K
MIN
(1)
(continued)
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
4
4
5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
4
4
5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
4
4
5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
4
4
5
MAX
UNIT
ns
Table 6-62. General Timing Requirements for SPI0 Slave Modes (1)
NO.
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
40 (2)
256P
50 (2)
256P
60 (2)
256P
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
9
tc(SPC)S
Cycle Time, SPI0_CLK, All Slave Modes
10
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse Width High, SPI0_CLK, All Slave Modes
18
22
27
ns
11
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse Width Low, SPI0_CLK, All Slave Modes
18
22
27
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
2P
2P
2P
12
13
14
15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
144
tsu(SOMI_SPC)S
td(SPC_SOMI)S
toh(SPC_SOMI)S
tsu(SIMO_SPC)S
Setup time, transmit
data written to SPI
before initial clock
edge from
master. (3) (4)
Delay, subsequent
bits valid on
SPI0_SOMI after
transmit edge of
SPI0_CLK
Output hold time,
SPI0_SOMI valid
after
receive edge of
SPI0_CLK
Input Setup Time,
SPI0_SIMO valid
before
receive edge of
SPI0_CLK
ns
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
17
20
27
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
17
20
27
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
17
20
27
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
17
20
27
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5S-6
0.5S-16
0.5S-20
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5S-6
0.5S-16
0.5S-20
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5S-6
0.5S-16
0.5S-20
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5S-6
0.5S-16
0.5S-20
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
ns
ns
P = SYSCLK2 period; S = tc(SPC)S (SPI slave bit clock period)
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 3P, whichever is greater.
First bit may be MSB or LSB depending upon SPI configuration. SO(0) refers to first bit and SO(n) refers to last bit output on
SPI0_SOMI. SI(0) refers to the first bit input and SI(n) refers to the last bit input on SPI0_SIMO.
Measured from the termination of the write of new data to the SPI module, In analyzing throughput requirements, additional internal bus
cycles must be accounted for to allow data to be written to the SPI module by the CPU.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-62. General Timing Requirements for SPI0 Slave Modes
NO.
PARAMETER
tih(SPC_SIMO)S
Input Hold Time,
SPI0_SIMO valid
after
receive edge of
SPI0_CLK
MIN
MAX
(continued)
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
4
4
5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
4
4
5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
4
4
5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
4
4
5
MAX
UNIT
ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
16
1.3V, 1.2V
(1)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
145
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-63. Additional SPI0 Master Timings, 4-Pin Enable Option
NO.
17
ADVANCE INFORMATION
18
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(ENA_SPC)M
td(SPC_ENA)M
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
Delay from slave assertion of SPI0_ENA active to first
SPI0_CLK from master. (4)
Max delay for slave to deassert SPI0_ENA after final SPI0_CLK
edge to ensure master does not begin the next transfer. (5)
MAX
146
MIN
MAX
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P+5
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P+5
P+5
P+6
UNIT
ns
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-61 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI0_ENA assertion.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI0_EN A deassertion.
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1.0V
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
Table 6-64. Additional SPI0 Master Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option
19
1.1V
MIN
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SCS_SPC)M
Delay from SPI0_SCS active to first SPI0_CLK
MIN
(4) (5)
(1) (2) (3)
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
2P-1
2P-2
2P-3
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
2P-1
2P-2
2P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-3
MAX
UNIT
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-61 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI0_SCS assertion.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.C2TDELAY[4:0].
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-64. Additional SPI0 Master Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option
20
(6)
(7)
PARAMETER
td(SPC_SCS)M
MIN
Delay from final SPI0_CLK edge to master deasserting
SPI0_SCS (6) (7)
21
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-3
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P-1
P-2
P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P-1
P-2
P-3
UNIT
ns
Except for modes when SPIDAT1.CSHOLD is enabled and there is additional data to transmit. In this case, SPI0_SCS will remain asserted.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.T2CDELAY[4:0].
NO.
20
1.1V
MAX
Table 6-65. Additional SPI0 Master Timings, 5-Pin Option
18
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SPC_ENA)M
td(SPC_SCS)M
Max delay for slave to deassert
SPI0_ENA after final SPI0_CLK edge
to ensure master does not begin the
next transfer. (4)
Delay from final SPI0_CLK edge to
master deasserting SPI0_SCS (5) (6)
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P+5
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P+5
P+5
P+6
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-3
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P-2
P-2
P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-2
0.5M+P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P-2
P-2
P-3
Max delay for slave SPI to drive SPI0_ENA valid after master
td(SCSL_ENAL)M asserts SPI0_SCS to delay the master from beginning the next
transfer,
UNIT
ns
C2TDELAY+P
C2TDELAY+P
C2TDELAY+P
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-62 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI0_ENA deassertion.
Except for modes when SPIDAT1.CSHOLD is enabled and there is additional data to transmit. In this case, SPI0_SCS will remain asserted.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.T2CDELAY[4:0].
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
147
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
(1) (2) (3)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-65. Additional SPI0 Master Timings, 5-Pin Option
NO.
22
td(SCS_SPC)M
ADVANCE INFORMATION
23
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
td(ENA_SPC)M
Delay from assertion of SPI0_ENA
low to first SPI0_CLK edge. (10)
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
Delay from SPI0_SCS active to first
SPI0_CLK (7) (8) (9)
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
1.1V
MAX
MIN
MAX
148
MAX
2P-2
2P-2
2P-3
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
2P-2
2P-2
2P-3
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-2
0.5M+2P-3
UNIT
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK falling
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
ns
If SPI0_ENA is asserted immediately such that the transmission is not delayed by SPI0_ENA.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI0_SCS assertion.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.C2TDELAY[4:0].
If SPI0_ENA was initially deasserted high and SPI0_CLK is delayed.
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI0_CLK rising
Table 6-66. Additional SPI0 Slave Timings, 4-Pin Enable Option
24
1.0V
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SPC_ENAH)S
Delay from final
SPI0_CLK edge to
slave deasserting
SPI0_ENA.
(1) (2) (3)
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
1.5P-3
2.5P+17.5
1.5P-3
2.5P+20
1.5P-3
2.5P+27
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
–
0.5M+2.5P+17.
5
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
–
0.5M+2.5P+20
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
–
0.5M+2.5P+27
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
1.5P-3
2.5P+17.5
1.5P-3
2.5P+20
1.5P-3
2.5P+27
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
–
0.5+2.5P+17.5
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
– 0.5+2.5P+20
– 0.5M+1.5P-3
– 0.5+2.5P+27
UNIT
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-62 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-67. Additional SPI0 Slave Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option
25
td(SCSL_SPC)S
26
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SPC_SCSH)S
MIN
Required delay from SPI0_SCS asserted at slave to first SPI0_CLK edge at slave.
Required delay from final SPI0_CLK edge before SPI0_SCS is
deasserted.
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
P + 1.5
P + 1.5
P + 1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P+4
P+4
P+5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P+4
P+4
P+5
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
27
tena(SCSL_SOMI)S
Delay from master asserting SPI0_SCS to slave driving SPI0_SOMI valid
P+17.
5
P+20
P+27
ns
28
tdis(SCSH_SOMI)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI0_SCS to slave 3-stating SPI0_SOMI
P+17.
5
P+20
P+27
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-62 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Table 6-68. Additional SPI0 Slave Timings, 5-Pin Option
NO.
25
26
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SCSL_SPC)S
td(SPC_SCSH)S
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
Required delay from SPI0_SCS asserted at slave to first SPI0_CLK edge at slave.
Required delay from final SPI0_CLK edge before SPI0_SCS is
deasserted.
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
P + 1.5
P + 1.5
P + 1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
0.5M+P
+4
0.5M+P
+4
0.5M+P
+5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
P+4
P+4
P+5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
0.5M+P
+4
0.5M+P
+4
0.5M+P
+5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK rising
P+4
P+4
P+5
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
27
tena(SCSL_SOMI)S
Delay from master asserting SPI0_SCS to slave driving SPI0_SOMI valid
P+17.5
P+20
P+27
ns
28
tdis(SCSH_SOMI)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI0_SCS to slave 3-stating SPI0_SOMI
P+17.5
P+20
P+27
ns
29
tena(SCSL_ENA)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI0_SCS to slave driving SPI0_ENA valid
17.5
20
27
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-62 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
149
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
(1) (2) (3)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-68. Additional SPI0 Slave Timings, 5-Pin Option
NO.
30
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(4)
150
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tdis(SPC_ENA)S
(1) (2) (3)
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK falling
2.5P+17
.5
2.5P+20
2.5P+27
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
Delay from final clock receive edge on SPI0_CLK to slave 3-stating from SPI0_CLK rising
or driving high SPI0_ENA. (4)
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI0_CLK rising
2.5P+17
.5
2.5P+20
2.5P+27
2.5P+17
.5
2.5P+20
2.5P+27
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI0_CLK falling
2.5P+17
.5
2.5P+20
2.5P+27
UNIT
ns
SPI0_ENA is driven low after the transmission completes if the SPIINT0.ENABLE_HIGHZ bit is programmed to 0. Otherwise it is tri-stated. If tri-stated, an external pullup resistor should
be used to provide a valid level to the master. This option is useful when tying several SPI slave devices to a single master.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-69. General Timing Requirements for SPI1 Master Modes (1)
1
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20 (2)
256P
30 (2)
256P
40 (2)
256P
UNIT
tc(SPC)M
Cycle Time, SPI1_CLK, All Master Modes
2
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse Width High, SPI1_CLK, All Master
Modes
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
ns
3
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse Width Low, SPI1_CLK, All Master
Modes
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
0.5M-1
ns
4,5
5
td(SIMO_SPC)M
td(SPC_SIMO)M
Delay, initial data
bit valid on
SPI1_SIMO to
initial edge on
SPI1_CLK (3)
Polarity = 0, Phase =
0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
5
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase =
1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+6
Polarity = 1, Phase =
0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
5
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase =
1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+5
-0.5M+6
Polarity = 0, Phase =
0,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
5
5
6
5
5
6
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase =
1,
Delay, subsequent from SPI1_CLK
bits valid on
falling
SPI1_SIMO after
Polarity = 1, Phase =
transmit edge of
0,
SPI1_CLK
from SPI1_CLK
falling
ns
Polarity = 1, Phase =
1,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
6
(1)
(2)
(3)
toh(SPC_SIMO)M
Output hold time,
SPI1_SIMO valid
after
receive edge of
SPI1_CLK
ns
5
5
6
5
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase =
0,
from SPI1_CLK
falling
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 0, Phase =
1,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 1, Phase =
0,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
Polarity = 1, Phase =
1,
from SPI1_CLK
falling
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
0.5M-3
ns
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 3P, whichever is greater.
First bit may be MSB or LSB depending upon SPI configuration. MO(0) refers to first bit and MO(n) refers to last bit output on
SPI1_SIMO. MI(0) refers to the first bit input and MI(n) refers to the last bit input on SPI1_SOMI.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
151
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-69. General Timing Requirements for SPI1 Master Modes
NO.
7
ADVANCE INFORMATION
8
152
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tsu(SOMI_SPC)M
tih(SPC_SOMI)M
Input Setup Time,
SPI1_SOMI valid
before
receive edge of
SPI1_CLK
Input Hold Time,
SPI1_SOMI valid
after
receive edge of
SPI1_CLK
MIN
MAX
(1)
(continued)
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase =
0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase =
1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase =
0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase =
1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase =
0,
from SPI1_CLK
falling
4
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase =
1,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
4
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase =
0,
from SPI1_CLK
rising
4
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase =
1,
from SPI1_CLK
falling
4
5
6
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-70. General Timing Requirements for SPI1 Slave Modes (1)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
40 (2)
256P
50 (2)
256P
60 (2)
256P
UNIT
9
tc(SPC)S
Cycle Time, SPI1_CLK, All Slave Modes
10
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse Width High, SPI1_CLK, All Slave Modes
18
22
27
ns
11
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse Width Low, SPI1_CLK, All Slave Modes
18
22
27
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
2P
2P
2P
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
2P
2P
2P
12
tsu(SOMI_SPC)S
Setup time, transmit data
written to SPI before initial
clock edge from
master. (3) (4)
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
13
td(SPC_SOMI)S
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
Delay, subsequent bits valid from SPI1_CLK falling
on SPI1_SOMI after
transmit edge of SPI1_CLK Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
14
15
16
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
toh(SPC_SOMI)S
tsu(SIMO_SPC)S
tih(SPC_SIMO)S
Input Setup Time,
SPI1_SIMO valid before
receive edge of SPI1_CLK
Input Hold Time,
SPI1_SIMO valid after
receive edge of SPI1_CLK
15
17
19
15
17
19
15
17
19
15
17
19
ns
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
Output hold time,
SPI1_SOMI valid after
receive edge of SPI1_CLK
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5S-4
0.5S-10
0.5S-12
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5S-4
0.5S-10
0.5S-12
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5S-4
0.5S-10
0.5S-12
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5S-4
0.5S-10
0.5S-12
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
1.5
1.5
1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
4
5
6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
4
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
4
5
6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
4
5
6
ns
ns
ns
P = SYSCLK2 period; S = tc(SPC)S (SPI slave bit clock period)
This timing is limited by the timing shown or 3P, whichever is greater.
First bit may be MSB or LSB depending upon SPI configuration. SO(0) refers to first bit and SO(n) refers to last bit output on
SPI1_SOMI. SI(0) refers to the first bit input and SI(n) refers to the last bit input on SPI1_SIMO.
Measured from the termination of the write of new data to the SPI module, In analyzing throughput requirements, additional internal bus
cycles must be accounted for to allow data to be written to the SPI module by the CPU.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
153
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-71. Additional (1) SPI1 Master Timings, 4-Pin Enable Option (2)
NO.
17
td(EN
18
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
A_SPC)M
td(SPC_ENA)M
Delay from slave
assertion of SPI1_ENA
active to first
SPI1_CLK from
master. (4)
Max delay for slave to
deassert SPI1_ENA
after final SPI1_CLK
edge to ensure master
does not begin the
next transfer. (5)
MIN
(3)
1.1V
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P+5
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P+5
P+5
P+6
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-69 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI1_ENA assertion.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI1_ENA deassertion.
NO.
20
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
154
UNIT
ns
Table 6-72. Additional (1) SPI1 Master Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option (2)
19
MAX
PARAMETER
td(SCS_SPC)M
td(SPC_SCS)M
Delay from
SPI1_SCS active
to first
SPI1_CLK (4) (5)
Delay from final
SPI1_CLK edge to
master
deasserting
SPI1_SCS (6) (7)
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
(3)
1.0V
MAX
MIN
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
2P-1
2P-5
2P-6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-5
0.5M+2P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
2P-1
2P-5
2P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-5
0.5M+2P-6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-5
0.5M+P-6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P-1
P-5
P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-5
0.5M+P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P-1
P-5
P-6
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-69 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI1_SCS assertion.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.C2TDELAY[4:0].
Except for modes when SPIDAT1.CSHOLD is enabled and there is additional data to transmit. In this case, SPI1_SCS will remain
asserted.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.T2CDELAY[4:0].
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-73. Additional (1) SPI1 Master Timings, 5-Pin Option (2)
18
20
21
22
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SPC_ENA)M
td(SPC_SCS)M
MIN
Max delay for slave to deassert SPI1_ENA after final
SPI1_CLK edge to ensure master does not begin the next
transfer. (4)
Delay from final SPI1_CLK edge to
master deasserting SPI1_SCS (5) (6)
td(SCS_SPC)M
Delay from SPI1_SCS active to first SPI1_CLK
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P+5
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P+5
P+5
P+6
UNIT
ns
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-5
0.5M+P-6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P-1
P-5
P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P-1
0.5M+P-5
0.5M+P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P-1
P-5
P-6
ns
Max delay for slave SPI to drive SPI1_ENA valid after master asserts SPI1_SCS to
td(SCSL_ENAL)M delay the
master from beginning the next transfer,
(7) (8) (9)
1.1V
MAX
C2TDELAY+P
C2TDELAY+P
C2TDELAY+P
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
2P-1
2P-5
2P-6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-5
0.5M+2P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
2P-1
2P-5
2P-6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+2P-1
0.5M+2P-5
0.5M+2P-6
ns
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI master modes ( Table 6-70 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four master clocking modes.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI1_ENA deassertion.
Except for modes when SPIDAT1.CSHOLD is enabled and there is additional data to transmit. In this case, SPI1_SCS will remain asserted.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.T2CDELAY[4:0].
If SPI1_ENA is asserted immediately such that the transmission is not delayed by SPI1_ENA.
In the case where the master SPI is ready with new data before SPI1_SCS assertion.
This delay can be increased under software control by the register bit field SPIDELAY.C2TDELAY[4:0].
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
155
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
(3)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-73. Additional
NO.
23
(1)
SPI1 Master Timings, 5-Pin Option
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(ENA_SPC)M
(2) (3)
MIN
Delay from assertion of SPI1_ENA low to first SPI1_CLK
edge. (10)
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK rising
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
to SPI1_CLK falling
3P+5
3P+5
3P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
to SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+5
0.5M+3P+6
UNIT
ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(10) If SPI1_ENA was initially deasserted high and SPI1_CLK is delayed.
Table 6-74. Additional (1) SPI1 Slave Timings, 4-Pin Enable Option (2)
NO.
24
(1)
(2)
(3)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SPC_ENAH)S
Delay from final
SPI1_CLK edge to slave
deasserting SPI1_ENA.
(3)
1.1V
1.0V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
1.5P-3
2.5P+15
1.5P-10
2.5P+17
1.5P-12
2.5P+19
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
–0.5M+1.5P-3
–0.5M+2.5P+15
–0.5M+1.5P-10
–0.5M+2.5P+17
–0.5M+1.5P-12
–0.5M+2.5P+19
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
1.5P-3
2.5P+15
1.5P-10
2.5P+17
1.5P-12
2.5P+19
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
–0.5M+1.5P-3
–0.5M+2.5P+15
–0.5M+1.5P-10
–0.5M+2.5P+17
–0.5M+1.5P-12
–0.5M+2.5P+19
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-70 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Table 6-75. Additional (1) SPI1 Slave Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option (2)
NO.
25
(1)
(2)
(3)
156
UNIT
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SCSL_SPC)S
(3)
MIN
Required delay from SPI1_SCS asserted at slave to first SPI1_CLK edge at slave.
P+1.5
MAX
1.1V
MIN
P+1.5
1.0V
MAX
MIN
P+1.5
MAX
UNIT
ns
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-70 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
NO.
26
(1)
SPI1 Slave Timings, 4-Pin Chip Select Option
td(SPC_SCSH)S
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
Required delay from final SPI1_CLK edge before
SPI1_SCS is deasserted.
(2) (3)
MIN
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P+4
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P+4
P+5
P+6
UNIT
ns
27
tena(SCSL_SOMI)S
Delay from master asserting SPI1_SCS to slave driving SPI1_SOMI valid
P+15
P+17
P+19
ns
28
tdis(SCSH_SOMI)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI1_SCS to slave 3-stating SPI1_SOMI
P+15
P+17
P+19
ns
Table 6-76. Additional (1) SPI1 Slave Timings, 5-Pin Option (2)
NO.
25
26
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
td(SCSL_SPC)S
td(SPC_SCSH)S
MIN
Required delay from SPI1_SCS asserted at slave to first SPI1_CLK edge at slave.
Required delay from final SPI1_CLK edge before
SPI1_SCS is deasserted.
(3)
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
P+1.5
P+1.5
P+1.5
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
P+4
P+5
P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
0.5M+P+4
0.5M+P+5
0.5M+P+6
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
P+4
P+5
P+6
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
27
tena(SCSL_SOMI)S Delay from master asserting SPI1_SCS to slave driving SPI1_SOMI valid
P+15
P+17
P+19
ns
28
tdis(SCSH_SOMI)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI1_SCS to slave 3-stating SPI1_SOMI
P+15
P+17
P+19
ns
29
tena(SCSL_ENA)S
Delay from master deasserting SPI1_SCS to slave driving SPI1_ENA valid
15
17
19
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
These parameters are in addition to the general timings for SPI slave modes ( Table 6-70 ).
P = SYSCLK2 period; M = tc(SPC)M (SPI master bit clock period)
Figure shows only Polarity = 0, Phase = 0 as an example. Table gives parameters for all four slave clocking modes.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
157
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-75. Additional
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-76. Additional
NO.
30
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(4)
158
(1)
SPI1 Slave Timings, 5-Pin Option
(continued)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
tdis(SPC_ENA)S
(2) (3)
MIN
Delay from final clock receive edge on SPI1_CLK to slave
3-stating or driving high SPI1_ENA. (4)
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
Polarity = 0, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK falling
2.5P+15
2.5P+17
2.5P+19
Polarity = 0, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK rising
2.5P+15
2.5P+17
2.5P+19
Polarity = 1, Phase = 0,
from SPI1_CLK rising
2.5P+15
2.5P+17
2.5P+19
Polarity = 1, Phase = 1,
from SPI1_CLK falling
2.5P+15
2.5P+17
2.5P+19
UNIT
ns
SPI1_ENA is driven low after the transmission completes if the SPIINT0.ENABLE_HIGHZ bit is programmed to 0. Otherwise it is tri-stated. If tri-stated, an external pullup resistor should
be used to provide a valid level to the master. This option is useful when tying several SPI slave devices to a single master.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
1
2
MASTER MODE
POLARITY = 0 PHASE = 0
3
SPIx_CLK
5
4
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
7
SPIx_SOMI
6
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MO(n)
8
MI(0)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MI(n)
MASTER MODE
POLARITY = 0 PHASE = 1
4
6
5
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
7
SPIx_SOMI
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SPIx_CLK
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MO(n)
8
MI(0)
MI(n)
4
MASTER MODE
POLARITY = 1 PHASE = 0
SPIx_CLK
5
SPIx_SIMO
6
MO(0)
7
SPIx_SOMI
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MO(n)
8
MI(0)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MI(n)
MASTER MODE
POLARITY = 1 PHASE = 1
SPIx_CLK
5
4
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
7
SPIx_SOMI
MI(0)
6
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MO(n)
8
MI(n)
Figure 6-35. SPI Timings—Master Mode
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
159
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
9
12
10
SLAVE MODE
POLARITY = 0 PHASE = 0
11
SPIx_CLK
15
SPIx_SIMO
16
SI(0)
SI(1)
SI(n−1)
13
SPIx_SOMI
SO(0)
SI(n)
14
SO(1)
SO(n−1)
12
SO(n)
SLAVE MODE
POLARITY = 0 PHASE = 1
SPIx_CLK
15
16
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SPIx_SIMO
SI(0)
SPIx_SOMI
SO(0)
SI(1)
13
SI(n−1)
SI(n)
SO(n−1)
SO(n)
14
SO(1)
SLAVE MODE
POLARITY = 1 PHASE = 0
12
SPIx_CLK
15
SPIx_SIMO
16
SI(0)
SI(1)
SI(n−1)
13
SPIx_SOMI
SO(0)
SO(1)
SI(n)
14
SO(n−1)
SO(n)
SLAVE MODE
POLARITY = 1 PHASE = 1
12
SPIx_CLK
15
16
SPIx_SIMO
SI(0)
SPIx_SOMI
SO(0)
SI(1)
13
SI(n−1)
SI(n)
14
SO(1)
SO(n−1)
SO(n)
Figure 6-36. SPI Timings—Slave Mode
160
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
MASTER MODE 4 PIN WITH ENABLE
17
18
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
SPIx_SOMI
MI(0)
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MO(n)
MI(n)
SPIx_ENA
MASTER MODE 4 PIN WITH CHIP SELECT
19
20
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
SPIx_SOMI
MI(0)
MO(1)
MO(n−1)
MO(n)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MI(n)
SPIx_SCS
MASTER MODE 5 PIN
20
ADVANCE INFORMATION
22
MO(1)
23
18
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_SIMO
MO(0)
MO(n−1)
MO(n)
SPIx_SOMI
21
SPIx_ENA
MI(0)
MI(1)
MI(n−1)
MI(n)
DESEL(A)
DESEL(A)
SPIx_SCS
A. DESELECTED IS PROGRAMMABLE EITHER HIGH OR
3−STATE (REQUIRES EXTERNAL PULLUP)
Figure 6-37. SPI Timings—Master Mode (4-Pin and 5-Pin)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
161
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
SLAVE MODE 4 PIN WITH ENABLE
24
SPIx_CLK
SPIx_SOMI
SO(0)
SO(1)
SO(n−1)
SO(n)
SPIx_SIMO
SI(0)
SPIx_ENA
SI(1)
SI(n−1) SI(n)
SLAVE MODE 4 PIN WITH CHIP SELECT
26
25
SPIx_CLK
27
SPIx_SOMI
28
SO(n−1)
SO(0)
SO(1)
SO(n)
SPIx_SIMO
SI(0)
SPIx_SCS
SI(1)
SI(n−1)
SI(n)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SLAVE MODE 5 PIN
26
30
25
SPIx_CLK
27
SPIx_SOMI
28
SO(1)
SO(0)
SO(n−1)
SO(n)
SPIx_SIMO
29
SPIx_ENA
SI(0)
SI(1)
SI(n−1)
SI(n)
DESEL(A)
DESEL(A)
SPIx_SCS
A. DESELECTED IS PROGRAMMABLE EITHER HIGH OR
3−STATE (REQUIRES EXTERNAL PULLUP)
Figure 6-38. SPI Timings—Slave Mode (4-Pin and 5-Pin)
162
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.17 Inter-Integrated Circuit Serial Ports (I2C)
6.17.1 I2C Device-Specific Information
Each I2C port supports:
• Compatible with Philips® I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
• Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
• Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
• Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
• Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
• Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
• General-Purpose I/O Capability if not used as I2C
Figure 6-39 is block diagram of the device I2C Module.
I2CPSCx
Control
Prescaler
Register
I2CCOARx
Own Address
Register
I2CSARx
Slave Address
Register
Bit Clock Generator
I2Cx_SCL
Noise
Filter
I2CCLKHx
Clock Divide
High Register
I2CCMDRx
Mode Register
I2CCLKLx
Clock Divide
Low Register
I2CEMDRx
Extended Mode
Register
I2CCNTx
Data Count
Register
I2CPID1
Peripheral ID
Register 1
I2CPID2
Peripheral ID
Register 2
Transmit
I2Cx_SDA
Noise
Filter
I2CXSRx
Transmit Shift
Register
I2CDXRx
Transmit Buffer
Interrupt/DMA
Receive
I2CIERx
I2CDRRx
Receive Buffer
I2CSTRx
I2CRSRx
Receive Shift
Register
I2CSRCx
I2CPFUNC
Pin Function
Register
I2CPDOUT
Interrupt Enable
Register
Interrupt Status
Register
Interrupt Source
Register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Clock Prescaler
Peripheral
Configuration
Bus
Interrupt DMA
Requests
Control
I2CPDIR
I2CPDIN
Pin Direction
Register
Pin Data In
Register
I2CPDSET
I2CPDCLR
Pin Data Out
Register
Pin Data Set
Register
Pin Data Clear
Register
Figure 6-39. I2C Module Block Diagram
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
163
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.17.2 I2C Peripheral Registers Description(s)
Table 6-77 is the list of the I2C registers.
Table 6-77. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
164
I2C0
BYTE ADDRESS
I2C1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C2 2000
0x01E2 8000
ICOAR
I2C Own Address Register
0x01C2 2004
0x01E2 8004
ICIMR
I2C Interrupt Mask Register
0x01C2 2008
0x01E2 8008
ICSTR
I2C Interrupt Status Register
0x01C2 200C
0x01E2 800C
ICCLKL
I2C Clock Low-Time Divider Register
0x01C2 2010
0x01E2 8010
ICCLKH
I2C Clock High-Time Divider Register
0x01C2 2014
0x01E2 8014
ICCNT
I2C Data Count Register
0x01C2 2018
0x01E2 8018
ICDRR
I2C Data Receive Register
0x01C2 201C
0x01E2 801C
ICSAR
I2C Slave Address Register
0x01C2 2020
0x01E2 8020
ICDXR
I2C Data Transmit Register
0x01C2 2024
0x01E2 8024
ICMDR
I2C Mode Register
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C2 2028
0x01E2 8028
ICIVR
I2C Interrupt Vector Register
0x01C2 202C
0x01E2 802C
ICEMDR
I2C Extended Mode Register
0x01C2 2030
0x01E2 8030
ICPSC
I2C Prescaler Register
0x01C2 2034
0x01E2 8034
REVID1
I2C Revision Identification Register 1
0x01C2 2038
0x01E2 8038
REVID2
I2C Revision Identification Register 2
0x01C2 2048
0x01E2 8048
ICPFUNC
I2C Pin Function Register
0x01C2 204C
0x01E2 804C
ICPDIR
I2C Pin Direction Register
0x01C2 2050
0x01E2 8050
ICPDIN
I2C Pin Data In Register
0x01C2 2054
0x01E2 8054
ICPDOUT
I2C Pin Data Out Register
0x01C2 2058
0x01E2 8058
ICPDSET
I2C Pin Data Set Register
0x01C2 205C
0x01E2 805C
ICPDCLR
I2C Pin Data Clear Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.17.3 I2C Electrical Data/Timing
6.17.3.1 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Timing
Table 6-78 and Table 6-79 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 6-40 and
Figure 6-41).
Table 6-78. Timing Requirements for I2C Input
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
Standard Mode
MIN
MAX
Fast Mode
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, I2Cx_SCL
10
2.5
ms
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, I2Cx_SCL high before I2Cx_SDA low
4.7
0.6
ms
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)
Hold time, I2Cx_SCL low after I2Cx_SDA low
4
0.6
ms
4
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SCL low
4.7
1.3
ms
5
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SCL high
4
0.6
ms
6
tsu(SDA-SCLH)
Setup time, I2Cx_SDA before I2Cx_SCL high
250
100
ns
7
th(SDA-SCLL)
Hold time, I2Cx_SDA after I2Cx_SCL low
8
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SDA high
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, I2Cx_SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
10
tr(SCL)
Rise time, I2Cx_SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
11
tf(SDA)
Fall time, I2Cx_SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
ns
12
tf(SCL)
Fall time, I2Cx_SCL
300
20 + 0.1Cb
300
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, I2Cx_SCL high before I2Cx_SDA high
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
15
Cb
Capacitive load for each bus line
0
0
4.7
1.3
4
0.9
ms
0.6
N/A
ns
ms
0
400
Table 6-79. Switching Characteristics for I2C
ms
50
ns
400
pF
(1)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
NO.
PARAMETER
Standard Mode
MIN
MAX
Fast Mode
MIN
UNIT
MAX
16
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, I2Cx_SCL
10
2.5
ms
17
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, I2Cx_SCL high before I2Cx_SDA low
4.7
0.6
ms
18
th(SDAL-SCLL)
Hold time, I2Cx_SCL low after I2Cx_SDA low
4
0.6
ms
19
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SCL low
4.7
1.3
ms
20
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SCL high
4
0.6
ms
21
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, I2Cx_SDA valid before I2Cx_SCL high
250
100
22
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Hold time, I2Cx_SDA valid after I2Cx_SCL low
0
0
23
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, I2Cx_SDA high
4.7
1.3
ms
28
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, I2Cx_SCL high before I2Cx_SDA high
4
0.6
ms
(1)
ns
0.9
ms
I2C must be configured correctly to meet the timings in Table 6-79 .
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
165
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
11
9
I2Cx_SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
I2Cx_SCL
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 6-40. I2C Receive Timings
26
24
ADVANCE INFORMATION
I2Cx_SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
I2Cx_SCL
16
27
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 6-41. I2C Transmit Timings
166
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.18
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Each UART has the following features:
• 16-byte storage space for both the transmitter and receiver FIFOs
• 1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA
• DMA signaling capability for both received and transmitted data
• Programmable auto-rts and auto-cts for autoflow control
• Programmable Baud Rate up to 3MBaud
• Programmable Oversampling Options of x13 and x16
• Frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65,535 to generate appropriate baud rates
• Prioritized interrupts
• Programmable serial data formats
– 5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters
– Even, odd, or no parity bit generation and detection
– 1, 1.5, or 2 stop bit generation
• False start bit detection
• Line break generation and detection
• Internal diagnostic capabilities
– Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation
– Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation
• Modem control functions (CTS, RTS)
The UART registers are listed in Section 6.18.1
6.18.1 UART Peripheral Registers Description(s)
Table 6-80 is the list of UART registers.
Table 6-80. UART Registers
UART0
BYTE ADDRESS
UART1
BYTE ADDRESS
UART2
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C4 2000
0x01D0 C000
0x01D0 D000
RBR
Receiver Buffer Register (read only)
0x01C4 2000
0x01D0 C000
0x01D0 D000
THR
Transmitter Holding Register (write only)
0x01C4 2004
0x01D0 C004
0x01D0 D004
IER
Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C4 2008
0x01D0 C008
0x01D0 D008
IIR
Interrupt Identification Register (read only)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C4 2008
0x01D0 C008
0x01D0 D008
FCR
FIFO Control Register (write only)
0x01C4 200C
0x01D0 C00C
0x01D0 D00C
LCR
Line Control Register
0x01C4 2010
0x01D0 C010
0x01D0 D010
MCR
Modem Control Register
0x01C4 2014
0x01D0 C014
0x01D0 D014
LSR
Line Status Register
0x01C4 2018
0x01D0 C018
0x01D0 D018
MSR
Modem Status Register
0x01C4 201C
0x01D0 C01C
0x01D0 D01C
SCR
Scratchpad Register
0x01C4 2020
0x01D0 C020
0x01D0 D020
DLL
Divisor LSB Latch
0x01C4 2024
0x01D0 C024
0x01D0 D024
DLH
Divisor MSB Latch
0x01C4 2028
0x01D0 C028
0x01D0 D028
REVID1
0x01C4 2030
0x01D0 C030
0x01D0 D030
PWREMU_MGMT
0x01C4 2034
0x01D0 C034
0x01D0 D034
MDR
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Revision Identification Register 1
Power and Emulation Management Register
Mode Definition Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
167
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.18.2 UART Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-81. Timing Requirements for UART Receive (1) (see Figure 6-42)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
4
tw(URXDB)
Pulse duration, receive data bit (RXDn)
0.96U
1.05U
ns
5
tw(URXSB)
Pulse duration, receive start bit
0.96U
1.05U
ns
(1)
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
Table 6-82. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UARTx Transmit (1)
(see Figure 6-42)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
(2) (3)
1
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
2
tw(UTXDB)
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (TXDn)
U-2
U+2
ns
3
tw(UTXSB)
Pulse duration, transmit start bit
U-2
U+2
ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
D/E
UNIT
MBaud
(4)
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
D = UART input clock in MHz.
For UART0, the UART input clock is SYSCLK2.
For UART1 or UART2, the UART input clock is ASYNC3 (either PLL0_SYCLK2 or PLL1_SYSCLK2).
E = UART divisor x UART sampling rate. The UART divisor is set through the UART divisor latch registers (DLL and DLH). The UART
sampling rate is set through the over-sampling mode select bit (OSM_SEL) of the UART mode definition register (MDR).
Baud rate is not indicative of data rate. Actual data rate will be limited by system factors such as EDMA loading, EMIF/DDR loading,
system frequency, etc.
3
2
UART_TXDn
Start
Bit
Data Bits
5
4
UART_RXDn
Start
Bit
Data Bits
Figure 6-42. UART Transmit/Receive Timing
168
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.19 Universal Serial Bus OTG Controller (USB0) [USB2.0 OTG]
The USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:
• USB 2.0 peripheral at speeds high speed (HS: 480 Mb/s) and full speed (FS: 12 Mb/s)
• USB 2.0 host at speeds HS, FS, and low speed (LS: 1.5 Mb/s)
• All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous)
• 4 Transmit (TX) and 4 Receive (RX) endpoints in addition to endpoint 0
• FIFO RAM
– 4K endpoint
– Programmable size
• Integrated USB 2.0 High Speed PHY
• Connects to a standard Charge Pump for VBUS 5 V generation
• RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB
Table 6-83 is the list of USB OTG registers.
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E0 0000
REVID
Revision Register
0x01E0 0004
CTRLR
Control Register
0x01E0 0008
STATR
Status Register
0x01E0 000C
EMUR
Emulation Register
0x01E0 0010
MODE
Mode Register
0x01E0 0014
AUTOREQ
0x01E0 0018
SRPFIXTIME
SRP Fix Time Register
0x01E0 001C
TEARDOWN
Teardown Register
0x01E0 0020
INTSRCR
USB Interrupt Source Register
0x01E0 0024
INTSETR
USB Interrupt Source Set Register
Autorequest Register
0x01E0 0028
INTCLRR
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register
0x01E0 002C
INTMSKR
USB Interrupt Mask Register
0x01E0 0030
INTMSKSETR
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x01E0 0034
INTMSKCLRR
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register
0x01E0 0038
INTMASKEDR
0x01E0 003C
EOIR
USB End of Interrupt Register
0x01E0 0040
INTVECTR
USB Interrupt Vector Register
0x01E0 0050
GENRNDISSZ1
Generic RNDIS Size EP1
0x01E0 0054
GENRNDISSZ2
Generic RNDIS Size EP2
0x01E0 0058
GENRNDISSZ3
Generic RNDIS Size EP3
0x01E0 005C
GENRNDISSZ4
Generic RNDIS Size EP4
0x01E0 0400
FADDR
Function Address Register
0x01E0 0401
POWER
Power Management Register
0x01E0 0402
INTRTX
Interrupt Register for Endpoint 0 plus Transmit Endpoints 1 to 4
0x01E0 0404
INTRRX
Interrupt Register for Receive Endpoints 1 to 4
0x01E0 0406
INTRTXE
Interrupt enable register for INTRTX
0x01E0 0408
INTRRXE
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRRX
0x01E0 040A
INTRUSB
Interrupt Register for Common USB Interrupts
0x01E0 040B
INTRUSBE
0x01E0 040C
FRAME
Frame Number Register
0x01E0 040E
INDEX
Index Register for Selecting the Endpoint Status and Control Registers
0x01E0 040F
TESTMODE
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRUSB
Register to Enable the USB 2.0 Test Modes
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
169
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Indexed Registers
These registers operate on the endpoint selected by the INDEX register
0x01E0 0410
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1-4 only)
0x01E0 0412
PERI_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral Mode. (Index register set to select Endpoint
0)
HOST_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Host Mode.
(Index register set to select Endpoint 0)
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints
1-4)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Transmit Endpoint.
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E0 0414
RXMAXP
0x01E0 0416
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints
1-4)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Receive Endpoint.
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)
0x01E0 0418
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1-4 only)
COUNT0
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO.
(Index register set to select Endpoint 0)
RXCOUNT
0x01E0 041A
Number of Bytes in Host Receive Endpoint FIFO.
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1- 4)
HOST_TYPE0
HOST_TXTYPE
0x01E0 041B
HOST_NAKLIMIT0
Defines the speed of Endpoint 0
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Transmit endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
Sets the NAK response timeout on Endpoint 0.
(Index register set to select Endpoint 0)
HOST_TXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Transmit endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
0x01E0 041C
0x01E0 041D
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Receive endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
HOST_RXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Receive endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
0x01E0 041F
CONFIGDATA
Returns details of core configuration. (Index register set to select Endpoint 0)
0x01E0 0420
FIFO0
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register for Endpoint 0
0x01E0 0424
FIFO1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register for Endpoint 1
0x01E0 0428
FIFO2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register for Endpoint 2
0x01E0 042C
FIFO3
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register for Endpoint 3
0x01E0 0430
FIFO4
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register for Endpoint 4
0x01E0 0460
DEVCTL
0x01E0 0462
TXFIFOSZ
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Size
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
0x01E0 0463
RXFIFOSZ
Receive Endpoint FIFO Size
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
0x01E0 0464
TXFIFOADDR
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Address
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
FIFO
OTG Device Control
Device Control Register
Dynamic FIFO Control
0x01E0 0464
HWVERS
Hardware Version Register
0x01E0 0466
RXFIFOADDR
Receive Endpoint FIFO Address
(Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4 only)
Target Endpoint 0 Control Registers, Valid Only in Host Mode
170
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E0 0480
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit
Endpoint.
0x01E0 0482
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0483
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0484
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Receive
Endpoint.
0x01E0 0486
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0487
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0488
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit
Endpoint.
0x01E0 048A
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 048B
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 048C
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Receive
Endpoint.
0x01E0 048E
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 048F
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0490
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit
Endpoint.
0x01E0 0492
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0493
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0494
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Receive
Endpoint.
0x01E0 0496
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0497
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
Target Endpoint 2 Control Registers, Valid Only in Host Mode
Target Endpoint 3 Control Registers, Valid Only in Host Mode
0x01E0 0498
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit
Endpoint.
0x01E0 049A
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 049B
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 049C
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Receive
Endpoint.
0x01E0 049E
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 049F
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 04A0
TXFUNCADDR
Target Endpoint 4 Control Registers, Valid Only in Host Mode
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit
Endpoint.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
171
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Target Endpoint 1 Control Registers, Valid Only in Host Mode
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E0 04A2
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 04A3
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Transmit Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 04A4
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated Receive
Endpoint.
0x01E0 04A6
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is
used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 04A7
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated Receive Endpoint. This is used
only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high-speed hub.
0x01E0 0502
PERI_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral Mode
HOST_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Host Mode
COUNT0
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 0
0x01E0 0508
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E0 050A
HOST_TYPE0
Defines the Speed of Endpoint 0
0x01E0 050B
HOST_NAKLIMIT0
Sets the NAK Response Timeout on Endpoint 0
0x01E0 050F
CONFIGDATA
Returns details of core configuration.
0x01E0 0510
TXMAXP
0x01E0 0512
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Transmit Endpoint
(host mode)
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 1
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
0x01E0 0514
RXMAXP
0x01E0 0516
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Receive Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0518
RXCOUNT
0x01E0 051A
HOST_TXTYPE
0x01E0 051B
0x01E0 051C
0x01E0 051D
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Transmit endpoint.
HOST_TXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Transmit endpoint.
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Receive endpoint.
HOST_RXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Receive endpoint.
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 2
0x01E0 0520
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
0x01E0 0522
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Transmit Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0524
RXMAXP
0x01E0 0526
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Receive Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0528
RXCOUNT
0x01E0 052A
HOST_TXTYPE
0x01E0 052B
0x01E0 052C
172
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Transmit endpoint.
HOST_TXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Transmit endpoint.
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Receive endpoint.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
0x01E0 052D
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
HOST_RXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Receive endpoint.
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 3
0x01E0 0530
TXMAXP
0x01E0 0532
PERI_TXCSR
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Transmit Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0534
RXMAXP
0x01E0 0536
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Receive Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0538
RXCOUNT
0x01E0 053A
HOST_TXTYPE
0x01E0 053C
0x01E0 053D
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Transmit endpoint.
HOST_TXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Transmit endpoint.
HOST_RXTYPE
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E0 053B
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Receive endpoint.
HOST_RXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Receive endpoint.
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 4
0x01E0 0540
TXMAXP
0x01E0 0542
PERI_TXCSR
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Transmit Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0544
RXMAXP
0x01E0 0546
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host Receive Endpoint
(host mode)
0x01E0 0548
RXCOUNT
0x01E0 054A
HOST_TXTYPE
0x01E0 054B
0x01E0 054C
0x01E0 054D
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Transmit endpoint.
HOST_TXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Transmit endpoint.
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number for the host
Receive endpoint.
HOST_RXINTERVAL Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response timeout on Bulk
transactions for host Receive endpoint.
DMA Registers
0x01E0 1000
DMAREVID
DMA Revision Register
0x01E0 1004
TDFDQ
0x01E0 1008
DMAEMU
DMA Emulation Control Register
0x01E0 1800
TXGCR[0]
Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 1808
RXGCR[0]
Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 180C
RXHPCRA[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register A
0x01E0 1810
RXHPCRB[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register B
0x01E0 1820
TXGCR[1]
Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 1828
RXGCR[1]
Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 182C
RXHPCRA[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register A
0x01E0 1830
RXHPCRB[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register B
0x01E0 1840
TXGCR[2]
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DMA Teardown Free Descriptor Queue Control Register
Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
173
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-83. Universal Serial Bus OTG (USB0) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E0 1848
RXGCR[2]
0x01E0 184C
RXHPCRA[2]
Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register A
0x01E0 1850
RXHPCRB[2]
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register B
0x01E0 1860
TXGCR[3]
Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 1868
RXGCR[3]
Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register
0x01E0 186C
RXHPCRA[3]
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register A
RXHPCRB[3]
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register B
0x01E0 1870
0x01E0 2C00
DMA_SCHED_CTRL DMA Scheduler Control Register
0x01E0 2D00
ENTRY[0]
DMA Scheduler Table Word 0
0x01E0 2D04
ENTRY[1]
DMA Scheduler Table Word 1
...
...
0x01E0 2DFC
ENTRY[63]
...
DMA Scheduler Table Word 63
Queue Manager Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E0 4000
QMGRREVID
0x01E0 4008
DIVERSION
Queue Manager Revision Register
0x01E0 4020
FDBSC0
Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 0
0x01E0 4024
FDBSC1
Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 1
0x01E0 4028
FDBSC2
Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 2
0x01E0 402C
FDBSC3
Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 3
0x01E0 4080
LRAM0BASE
Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register
0x01E0 4084
LRAM0SIZE
Linking RAM Region 0 Size Register
0x01E0 4088
LRAM1BASE
Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register
0x01E0 4090
PEND0
Queue Pending Register 0
0x01E0 4094
PEND1
Queue Pending Register 1
0x01E0 5000
QMEMRBASE[0]
Memory Region 0 Base Address Register
0x01E0 5004
QMEMRCTRL[0]
Memory Region 0 Control Register
0x01E0 5010
QMEMRBASE[1]
Memory Region 1 Base Address Register
0x01E0 5014
QMEMRCTRL[1]
Memory Region 1 Control Register
...
...
0x01E0 5070
QMEMRBASE[7]
Memory Region 7 Base Address Register
Memory Region 7 Control Register
Queue Diversion Register
...
0x01E0 5074
QMEMRCTRL[7]
0x01E0 600C
CTRLD[0]
Queue Manager Queue 0 Control Register D
0x01E0 601C
CTRLD[1]
Queue Manager Queue 1 Control Register D
...
...
0x01E0 63FC
CTRLD[63]
Queue Manager Queue 63 Status Register D
0x01E0 6800
QSTATA[0]
Queue Manager Queue 0 Status Register A
0x01E0 6804
QSTATB[0]
Queue Manager Queue 0 Status Register B
0x01E0 6808
QSTATC[0]
Queue Manager Queue 0 Status Register C
0x01E0 6810
QSTATA[1]
Queue Manager Queue 1 Status Register A
0x01E0 6814
QSTATB[1]
Queue Manager Queue 1 Status Register B
0x01E0 6818
QSTATC[1]
Queue Manager Queue 1 Status Register C
...
...
0x01E0 6BF0
QSTATA[63]
Queue Manager Queue 63 Status Register A
0x01E0 6BF4
QSTATB[63]
Queue Manager Queue 63 Status Register B
0x01E0 6BF8
QSTATC[63]
Queue Manager Queue 63 Status Register C
174
...
...
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.19.1 USB0 [USB2.0] Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-84. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB0 [USB2.0] (see
Figure 6-43)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
PARAMETER
HIGH SPEED
480 Mbps
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
1
tr(D)
Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (1)
75
300
4
20
0.5
ns
2
tf(D)
Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (1)
75
300
4
20
0.5
ns
80
120
90
111
–
–
1.3
2
1.3
2
–
–
(2)
3
trfM
Rise/Fall time, matching
4
VCRS
Output signal cross-over voltage (1)
5
tjr(source)NT
Source (Host) Driver jitter, next transition
2
tjr(FUNC)NT
Function Driver jitter, next transition
tjr(source)PT
Source (Host) Driver jitter, paired transition (4)
tjr(FUNC)PT
Function Driver jitter, paired transition
7
tw(EOPT)
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter
8
tw(EOPR)
Pulse duration, EOP receiver
9
t(DRATE)
Data Rate
10
ZDRV
Driver Output Resistance
ZINP
Receiver Input Impedance
6
11
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
FULL SPEED
12 Mbps
1250
V
(3)
2
ns
25
2
1
1
(3)
ns
10
1
(3)
ns
–
ns
1500
160
175
82
–
–
–
1.5
100k
%
(3)
670
–
MAX
12
40.5
49.5
100k
ns
ns
480 Mb/s
40.5
49.5
Ω
-
-
Ω
Low Speed: CL = 200 pF, Full Speed: CL = 50 pF, High Speed: CL = 50 pF
tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]
For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0, Chapter 7. Electrical.
tjr = tpx(1) - tpx(0)
USB_DM
VCRS
USB_DP
tper − tjr
90% VOH
10% VOL
tr
tf
Figure 6-43. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
175
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
LOW SPEED
1.5 Mbps
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.20 LCD Controller (LCDC)
The LCD controller consists of two independent controllers, the Raster Controller and the LCD Interface
Display Driver (LIDD) controller. Each controller operates independently from the other and only one of
them is active at any given time.
• The Raster Controller handles the synchronous LCD interface. It provides timing and data for constant
graphics refresh to a passive display. It supports a wide variety of monochrome and full-color display
types and sizes by use of programmable timing controls, a built-in palette, and a gray-scale/serializer.
Graphics data is processed and stored in frame buffers. A frame buffer is a contiguous memory block
in the system. A built-in DMA engine supplies the graphics data to the Raster engine which, in turn,
outputs to the external LCD device.
• The LIDD Controller supports the asynchronous LCD interface. It provides full-timing programmability
of control signals (CS, WE, OE, ALE) and output data.
Table 6-85 lists the LCD Controller registers.
Table 6-85. LCD Controller Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01E1 3000
REVID
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 3004
LCD_CTRL
LCD Control Register
LCD Revision Identification Register
0x01E1 3008
LCD_STAT
LCD Status Register
0x01E1 300C
LIDD_CTRL
LCD LIDD Control Register
0x01E1 3010
LIDD_CS0_CONF
LCD LIDD CS0 Configuration Register
0x01E1 3014
LIDD_CS0_ADDR
LCD LIDD CS0 Address Read/Write Register
0x01E1 3018
LIDD_CS0_DATA
LCD LIDD CS0 Data Read/Write Register
0x01E1 301C
LIDD_CS1_CONF
LCD LIDD CS1 Configuration Register
0x01E1 3020
LIDD_CS1_ADDR
LCD LIDD CS1 Address Read/Write Register
0x01E1 3024
LIDD_CS1_DATA
LCD LIDD CS1 Data Read/Write Register
0x01E1 3028
RASTER_CTRL
0x01E1 302C
RASTER_TIMING_0
LCD Raster Timing 0 Register
0x01E1 3030
RASTER_TIMING_1
LCD Raster Timing 1 Register
0x01E1 3034
RASTER_TIMING_2
LCD Raster Timing 2 Register
0x01E1 3038
RASTER_SUBPANEL
0x01E1 3040
LCDDMA_CTRL
0x01E1 3044
LCDDMA_FB0_BASE
0x01E1 3048
LCDDMA_FB0_CEILING
0x01E1 304C
LCDDMA_FB1_BASE
0x01E1 3050
LCDDMA_FB1_CEILING
176
LCD Raster Control Register
LCD Raster Subpanel Display Register
LCD DMA Control Register
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Base Address Register
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Ceiling Address Register
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Base Address Register
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Ceiling Address Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.20.1 LCD Interface Display Driver (LIDD Mode)
Table 6-86. Timing Requirements for LCD LIDD Mode
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V,
1.1V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.0V
MIN
UNIT
MAX
16
tsu(LCD_D)
Setup time, LCD_D[15:0] valid before LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high
7
8
ns
17
th(LCD_D)
Hold time, LCD_D[15:0] valid after LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high
0
0
ns
Table 6-87. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for LCD LIDD Mode
1.3V, 1.2V,
1.1V
PARAMETER
1.0V
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
4
td(LCD_D_V)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_D[15:0] valid (write)
0
7
0
9
ns
5
td(LCD_D_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_D[15:0] invalid (write)
0
7
0
9
ns
6
td(LCD_E_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_AC_ENB_CS low
0
7
0
9
ns
7
td(LCD_E_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_AC_ENB_CS high
0
7
0
9
ns
8
td(LCD_A_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_VSYNC low
0
7
0
9
ns
9
td(LCD_A_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_VSYNC high
0
7
0
9
ns
10
td(LCD_W_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_HSYNC low
0
7
0
9
ns
11
td(LCD_W_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_HSYNC high
0
7
0
9
ns
12
td(LCD_STRB_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_PCLK high
0
7
0
9
ns
13
td(LCD_STRB_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_PCLK low
0
7
0
9
ns
14
td(LCD_D_Z)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_D[15:0] in 3-state
0
7
0
9
ns
15
td(Z_LCD_D)
Delay time, LCD_CLK (SYSCLK2) high to LCD_D[15:0] (valid from 3-state)
0
7
0
9
ns
1
W_SU
(0 to 31)
2
3
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
CS_DELAY
(0 to 3)
W_STROBE
(1 to 63)
R_SU
(0 to 31)
4
R_HOLD
(1 to 15)
R_STROBE
(1 to 63)
W_HOLD
(1 to 15)
5
14
17
16
LCD_D[15:0]
CS_DELAY
(0 to 3)
15
Data[7:0]
Write Data
Read Status
LCD_PCLK
Not Used
8
9
LCD_VSYNC
RS
10
11
LCD_HSYNC
R/W
12
12
13
13
E0
E1
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
Figure 6-44. Character Display HD44780 Write
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
177
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
W_HOLD
(1–15)
R_SU
(0–31)
1
2
R_STROBE
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1–63)
(1–5)
(0−3)
(0–31)
W_SU
17
15
4
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
(1–63)
(0 − 3)
3
Not
Used
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
14
16
LCD_D[7:0]
5
Data[7:0]
Write Instruction
Read
Data
LCD_PCLK
Not
Used
8
9
ADVANCE INFORMATION
RS
LCD_VSYNC
10
11
LCD_HSYNC
R/W
12
12
13
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
13
E0
E1
Figure 6-45. Character Display HD44780 Read
178
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
W_HOLD
(1−15)
W_HOLD
(1−15)
1
2
W_SU
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
W_SU
W_STROBE
(0−31)
(1−63)
(0−3)
(0−31)
(1−63)
CS_DELAY
(0−3)
3
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
5
5
4
Write Address
Write Data
7
6
Data[15:0]
6
7
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
(async mode)
CS0
CS1
A0
LCD_VSYNC
10
11
11
10
R/W
LCD_HSYNC
12
13
12
13
E
LCD_PCLK
Figure 6-46. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Write
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
179
ADVANCE INFORMATION
9
8
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
W_HOLD
(1−15)
1
2
W_SU
W_STROBE
(0−31)
(1−63)
R_SU
(0−31)
CS_DELAY
R_STROBE
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1−15)
(0−3)
(1−63
(0−3)
3
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
5
14
16
17
15
Write Address
Data[15:0]
6
7
Read
Data
6
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
(async mode)
7
CS0
CS1
9
8
ADVANCE INFORMATION
LCD_VSYNC
A0
11
10
LCD_HSYNC
R/W
12
13
12
13
E
LCD_PCLK
Figure 6-47. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Read
180
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
R_SU
(0−31)
R_SU
(0−31)
R_STROBE R_HOLD CS_DELAY
R_STROBE R_HOLD CS_DELAY
1
2
(1−63)
3
(1−15)
(0−3)
(1−63)
(1−15)
(0−3)
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
14
16
17
15
14
17
16
15
LCD_D[15:0]
Data[15:0]
Read
Data
6
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
(async mode)
7
Read
Status
6
7
CS0
CS1
8
9
A0
LCD_HSYNC
ADVANCE INFORMATION
LCD_VSYNC
R/W
12
13
12
13
E
LCD_PCLK
Figure 6-48. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Status
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
181
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
W_HOLD
(1−15)
W_HOLD
(1−15)
1
2
W_SU
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
W_SU
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
(0−31)
3
(1−63)
(0−3)
(0−31)
(1−63)
(0 − 3)
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
(async mode)
5
4
Write Address
5
DATA[15:0]
Write Data
7
6
6
7
CS0
CS1
8
9
ADVANCE INFORMATION
LCD_VSYNC
A0
10
11
10
LCD_HSYNC
11
WR
LCD_PCLK
RD
Figure 6-49. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Write
182
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
W_HOLD
(1−15)
W_SU
W_STROBE
R_SU
(0−31)
CS_DELAY
R_STROBE
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
1
2
3
(0−31)
(1−63)
(0−3)
(1−63)
(1−15)
16
17
(0−3)
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
5
14
15
Data[15:0]
Write Address
6
7
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
(async mode)
6
Read
Data
7
CS0
CS1
LCD_VSYNC
A0
10
11
WR
LCD_HSYNC
12
13
RD
LCD_PCLK
Figure 6-50. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Read
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
183
ADVANCE INFORMATION
9
8
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
R_SU
(0−31)
R_SU
(0−31)
R_STROBE
1
2
(1−63)
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1−15)
(0−3)
R_STROBE R_HOLD
(1−63)
CS_DELAY
(1−15)
(0−3)
3
Clock
LCD_CLK
(SYSCLK2)
14
16
17
15
14
16
17
15
Data[15:0]
LCD_D[15:0]
Read Data
Read Status
7
6
6
7
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
CS0
CS1
8
9
ADVANCE INFORMATION
A0
LCD_VSYNC
WR
LCD_HSYNC
12
13
12
13
RD
LCD_PCLK
Figure 6-51. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Status
184
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.20.2 LCD Raster Mode
Table 6-88. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for LCD Raster Mode
See Figure 6-52 through Figure 6-56
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V,
1.1V
MIN
fclock(PIXEL_CLK)
Clock frequency, pixel clock
1
tc(PIXEL_CLK)
Cycle time, pixel clock
2
tw(PIXEL_CLK_H)
3
4
MAX
1.0V
MIN
F/2 (1)
UNIT
MAX
F/2 (1)
MHz
26.66
33.33
ns
Pulse duration, pixel clock high
10
10
ns
tw(PIXEL_CLK_L)
Pulse duration, pixel clock low
10
td(LCD_D_V)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK high to LCD_D[15:0] valid (write)
0
7
0
9
ns
5
td(LCD_D_IV)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK high to LCD_D[15:0] invalid (write)
0
7
0
9
ns
6
td(LCD_AC_ENB_CS_A)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK low to LCD_AC_ENB_CS high
0
7
0
9
ns
7
td(LCD_AC_ENB_CS_I)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK low to LCD_AC_ENB_CS high
0
7
0
9
ns
8
td(LCD_VSYNC_A)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK low to LCD_VSYNC high
0
7
0
9
ns
10
ns
9
td(LCD_VSYNC_I)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK low to LCD_VSYNC low
0
7
0
9
ns
10
td(LCD_HSYNC_A)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK high to LCD_HSYNC high
0
7
0
9
ns
11
td(LCD_HSYNC_I)
Delay time, LCD_PCLK high to LCD_HSYNC low
0
7
0
9
ns
(1)
F = frequency of LCD_PCLK in ns
Frame-to-frame timing is derived through the following parameters in the LCD (RASTER_TIMING_1)
register:
• Vertical front porch (VFP)
• Vertical sync pulse width (VSW)
• Vertical back porch (VBP)
• Lines per panel (LPP)
Line-to-line timing is derived through the following parameters in the LCD (RASTER_TIMING_0) register:
• Horizontal front porch (HFP)
• Horizontal sync pulse width (HSW)
• Horizontal back porch (HBP)
• Pixels per panel (PPL)
LCD_AC_ENB_CS timing is derived through the following parameter in the LCD (RASTER_TIMING_2)
register:
• AC bias frequency (ACB)
The display format produced in raster mode is shown in Figure 6-52. An entire frame is delivered one line
at a time. The first line delivered starts at data pixel (1, 1) and ends at data pixel (P, 1). The last line
delivered starts at data pixel (1, L) and ends at data pixel (P, L). The beginning of each new frame is
denoted by the activation of I/O signal LCD_VSYNC. The beginning of each new line is denoted by the
activation of I/O signal LCD_HSYNC.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
185
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Data Pixels (From 1 to P)
1, 1
2, 1
1, 2
2, 2
P−2,
1
3, 1
P−1,
1
P, 1
P−1,
2
P, 2
P, 3
Data Lines (From 1 to L)
1, 3
LCD
ADVANCE INFORMATION
P,
L−2
1,
L−2
1,
L−1
2,
L−1
1, L
2, L
P−1,
L−1
P−2,
L
3, L
P−1,
L
P,
L−1
P, L
Figure 6-52. LCD Raster-Mode Display Format
186
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Frame Time ~ 70Hz
Active TFT
VBP
(0 to 255)
VSW
(1 to 64)
Line
Time
LPP
VFP
(1 to 1024)
(0 to 255)
VSW
(1 to 64)
Hsync
LCD_HSYNC
LCD_VSYNC
Vsync
Data
LCD_D[15:0]
1, L−1
P, L−1
1, 2
P, 2
1, L
P, L
Enable
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
ACB
ACB
(0 to 255)
(0 to 255)
10
11
Hsync
LCD_HSYNC
CLK
LCD_PCLK
Data
LCD_D[15:0]
1, 1
2, 1
1, 2
P, 1
PLL
HFP
16 y (1 to 1024)
(1 to 256)
2, 2
HSW
HBP
PLL
(1 to 64)
(1 to 256)
16 y (1 to 1024)
Line 1
P, 2
Line 2
Figure 6-53. LCD Raster-Mode Active
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
187
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1, 1
P, 1
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Frame Time ~ 70Hz
VBP = 0
VFP = 0
VBP = 0
VFP = 0
Passive STN VSW = 1
(1 to 64)
VSW = 1
(1 to 64)
LPP
(1 to 1024)
Line
Time
LCD_HSYNC
LP
LCD_VSYNC
FP
1, L
Data
LCD_D[7:0]
1, 1:
P, 1
1, L:
P, L
1, 2:
P, 2
1, 3:
P, 3
1, 4:
P, 4
1, 5:
P, 5
1, L
P, L
1, 6:
P, 6
1, L−1
P, L−1
1, L−4
P, L−4
1, 1
P, 1
1, 2
P, 2
1, L−3 1, L−2 1, L−1
P, L−3 P, L−2 P, L−1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
M
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
ACB
ACB
(0 to 255)
(0 to 255)
11
10
LCD_HSYNC
LP
LCD_PCLK
CP
Data
LCD_D[7:0]
1, 5
2, 5
1, 6
P, 5
PPL
16 y (1 to 1024)
2, 6
HFP
HSW
HBP
PPL
(1 to 256)
(1 to 64)
(1 to 256)
16 y (1 to 2024)
Line 5
P, 6
Line 6
Figure 6-54. LCD Raster-Mode Passive
188
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
8
LCD_VSYNC
10
11
LCD_HSYNC
1
2
3
LCD_PCLK
(passive mode)
1, L
2, L
P, L
1, 1
2, 1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
5
4
LCD_D[7:0]
(passive mode)
P, 1
1
2
3
LCD_PCLK
(active mode)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
(active mode)
VBP = 0
VFP = 0
VSW = 1
1, L
2, L
PPL
16 × (1 to 1024)
Line L
5
P, L
HFP
(1 to 256
HSW
(1 to 64)
HBP
(1 to 256)
PPL
16 ×(1 to 1024)
Line 1 (Passive Only)
Figure 6-55. LCD Raster-Mode Control Signal Activation
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
189
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
7
LCD_AC_ENB_CS
9
LCD_VSYNC
10
11
LCD_HSYNC
1
3
4
LCD_PCLK
(passive mode)
5
ADVANCE INFORMATION
4
LCD_D[7:0]
(passive mode)
1, 1
2, 1
P, 1
1, 2
2, 2
P, 2
1
2
3
LCD_PCLK
(active mode)
4
LCD_D[15:0]
(active mode)
VBP = 0
VFP = 0
VSW = 1
5
1, 1
PPL
16 × (1 to 1024)
HFP
(1 to 256
HSW
(1 to 64)
HBP
(1 to 256)
Line 1 for passive
2, 1
P, 1
PPL
16 ×(1 to 1024)
Line 1 for active
Line 2 for passive
Figure 6-56. LCD Raster-Mode Control Signal Deactivation
190
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.21 Host-Port Interface (UHPI)
6.21.1 HPI Device-Specific Information
The device includes a user-configurable 16-bit Host-port interface (HPI16).
The host port interface (UHPI) provides a parallel port interface through which an external host processor
can directly access the processor's resources (configuration and program/data memories). The external
host device is asynchronous to the CPU clock and functions as a master to the HPI interface. The UHPI
enables a host device and the processor to exchange information via internal or external memory.
Dedicated address (HPIA) and data (HPID) registers within the UHPI provide the data path between the
external host interface and the processor resources. A UHPI control register (HPIC) is available to the
host and the CPU for various configuration and interrupt functions.
6.21.2 HPI Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-89. HPI Control Registers
(1)
ACRONYM
0x01E1 0000
PID
0x01E1 0004
PWREMU_MGMT
0x01E1 0008
-
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
COMMENTS
Peripheral Identification Register
HPI power and emulation management register
The CPU has read/write access
to the PWREMU_MGMT register.
Reserved
0x01E1 000C
GPIO_EN
0x01E1 0010
GPIO_DIR1
General Purpose IO Enable Register
General Purpose IO Direction Register 1
0x01E1 0014
GPIO_DAT1
General Purpose IO Data Register 1
0x01E1 0018
GPIO_DIR2
General Purpose IO Direction Register 2
0x01E1 001C
GPIO_DAT2
General Purpose IO Data Register 2
0x01E1 0020
GPIO_DIR3
General Purpose IO Direction Register 3
0x01E1 0024
GPIO_DAT3
General Purpose IO Data Register 3
01E1 0028
-
Reserved
01E1 002C
-
Reserved
01E1 0030
HPIC
HPI control register
01E1 0034
HPIA
(HPIAW) (1)
HPI address register
(Write)
01E1 0038
HPIA
(HPIAR) (1)
HPI address register
(Read)
01E1 000C - 01E1 07FF
-
The Host and the CPU both have
read/write access to the HPIC
register.
The Host has read/write access
to the HPIA registers. The CPU
has only read access to the HPIA
registers.
Reserved
There are two 32-bit HPIA registers: HPIAR for read operations and HPIAW for write operations. The HPI can be configured such that
HPIAR and HPIAW act as a single 32-bit HPIA (single-HPIA mode) or as two separate 32-bit HPIAs (dual-HPIA mode) from the
perspective of the Host. The CPU can access HPIAW and HPIAR independently.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
191
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.21.3 HPI Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-90. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface [1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1)
(2)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
Setup time, select signals (3) valid before UHPI_HSTROBE low
5
ns
2
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Hold time, select signals (3) valid after UHPI_HSTROBE low
2
ns
3
tw(HSTBL)
Pulse duration, UHPI_HSTROBE active low
15
ns
4
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, UHPI_HSTROBE inactive high between consecutive accesses
2M
ns
9
tsu(SELV-HASL)
Setup time, selects signals valid before UHPI_HAS low
5
10
th(HASL-SELV)
Hold time, select signals valid after UHPI_HAS low
2
11
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
Setup time, host data valid before UHPI_HSTROBE high
5
ns
12
th(HSTBH-HDV)
Hold time, host data valid after UHPI_HSTROBE high
2
ns
13
th(HRDYL-HSTBH)
Hold time, UHPI_HSTROBE high after UHPI_HRDY low. UHPI_HSTROBE
should not be inactivated until UHPI_HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes
will not complete properly.
2
ns
16
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
Setup time, UHPI_HAS low before UHPI_HSTROBE low
5
th(HSTBL-HASH)
Hold time, UHPI_HAS low after UHPI_HSTROBE low
2
17
(1)
(2)
(3)
192
UHPI_HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2: [NOT(UHPI_HDS1 XOR
UHPI_HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.
M=SYSCLK2 period in ns.
Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0], HR/W and HHWIL.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-91. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Host-Port Interface
[1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V] (1) (2) (3)
NO.
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
MAX
UNIT
For HPI Write, HRDY can go high (not
ready) for these HPI Write conditions;
otherwise, HRDY stays low (ready):
Case 1: Back-to-back HPIA writes (can
be either first or second half-word)
Case 2: HPIA write following a
PREFETCH command (can be either
first or second half-word)
Case 3: HPID write when FIFO is full or
flushing (can be either first or second
half-word)
Case 4: HPIA write and Write FIFO not
empty
5
td(HSTBL-HRDYV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to
HRDY valid
5a
td(HASL-HRDYV)
Delay time, HAS low to HRDY valid
6
ten(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Enable time, HD driven from HSTROBE low
7
td(HRDYL-HDV)
Delay time, HRDY low to HD valid
8
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
14
tdis(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Disable time, HD high-impedance from HSTROBE high
15
18
(1)
(2)
(3)
td(HSTBL-HDV)
td(HSTBH-HRDYV)
15
17
15
1.5
17
1.5
0
1.5
ns
ns
0
1.5
ns
ns
15
17
ns
Delay time, HSTROBE low to
HD valid
For HPI Read. Applies to conditions
where data is already residing in
HPID/FIFO:
Case 1: HPIC or HPIA read
Case 2: First half-word of HPID read
with auto-increment and data is already
in Read FIFO
Case 3: Second half-word of HPID read
with or without auto-increment
15
17
ns
Delay time, HSTROBE high to
HRDY valid
For HPI Write, HRDY can go high (not
ready) for these HPI Write conditions;
otherwise, HRDY stays low (ready):
Case 1: HPID write when Write FIFO is
full (can happen to either half-word)
Case 2: HPIA write (can happen to
either half-word)
Case 3: HPID write without
auto-increment (only happens to
second half-word)
15
17
ns
M=SYSCLK2 period in ns.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
By design, whenever HCS is driven inactive (high), HPI will drive HRDY active (low).
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
193
ADVANCE INFORMATION
For HPI Read, HRDY can go high (not
ready) for these HPI Read conditions:
Case 1: HPID read (with
auto-increment) and data not in Read
FIFO (can only happen to first half-word
of HPID access)
Case 2: First half-word access of HPID
Read without auto-increment
For HPI Read, HRDY stays low (ready)
for these HPI Read conditions:
Case 1: HPID read with auto-increment
and data is already in Read FIFO
(applies to either half-word of HPID
access)
Case 2: HPID read without
auto-increment and data is already in
Read FIFO (always applies to second
half-word of HPID access)
Case 3: HPIC or HPIA read (applies to
either half-word access)
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-92. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Host-Port Interface
[1.0V] (1) (2) (3)
NO.
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
For HPI Write, HRDY can go high (not ready) for
these HPI Write conditions; otherwise, HRDY
stays low (ready):
Case 1: Back-to-back HPIA writes (can be either
first or second half-word)
Case 2: HPIA write following a PREFETCH
command (can be either first or second
half-word)
Case 3: HPID write when FIFO is full or flushing
(can be either first or second half-word)
Case 4: HPIA write and Write FIFO not empty
ADVANCE INFORMATION
For HPI Read, HRDY can go high (not ready) for
these HPI Read conditions:
Case 1: HPID read (with auto-increment) and
data not in Read FIFO (can only happen to first
half-word of HPID access)
Case 2: First half-word access of HPID Read
without auto-increment
For HPI Read, HRDY stays low (ready) for these
HPI Read conditions:
Case 1: HPID read with auto-increment and data
is already in Read FIFO (applies to either
half-word of HPID access)
Case 2: HPID read without auto-increment and
data is already in Read FIFO (always applies to
second half-word of HPID access)
Case 3: HPIC or HPIA read (applies to either
half-word access)
5
td(HSTBL-HRDYV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY
valid
5a
td(HASL-HRDYV)
Delay time, HAS low to HRDY valid
6
ten(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Enable time, HD driven from HSTROBE low
7
td(HRDYL-HDV)
Delay time, HRDY low to HD valid
8
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
14
tdis(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Disable time, HD high-impedance from HSTROBE high
15
18
(1)
(2)
(3)
194
td(HSTBL-HDV)
td(HSTBH-HRDYV)
22
ns
22
1.5
ns
0
1.5
ns
ns
22
ns
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD
valid
For HPI Read. Applies to conditions where data
is already residing in HPID/FIFO:
Case 1: HPIC or HPIA read
Case 2: First half-word of HPID read with
auto-increment and data is already in Read
FIFO
Case 3: Second half-word of HPID read with or
without auto-increment
22
ns
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HRDY
valid
For HPI Write, HRDY can go high (not ready) for
these HPI Write conditions; otherwise, HRDY
stays low (ready):
Case 1: HPID write when Write FIFO is full (can
happen to either half-word)
Case 2: HPIA write (can happen to either
half-word)
Case 3: HPID write without auto-increment (only
happens to second half-word)
22
ns
M=SYSCLK2 period in ns.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
By design, whenever HCS is driven inactive (high), HPI will drive HRDY active (low).
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
UHPI_HCS
UHPI_HAS(D)
2
2
1
1
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]
2
1
2
1
UHPI_HR/W
2
2
1
1
UHPI_HHWIL
4
3
3
UHPI_HSTROBE(A)(C)
14
14
6
8
ADVANCE INFORMATION
15
15
6
8
UHPI_HD[15:0]
(output)
5
13
7
1st Half-Word
2nd Half-Word
UHPI_HRDY(B)
A. UHPI_HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2: [NOT(HDS1
XOR HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.
B. Depending on the type of write or read operation (HPID without auto-incrementing; HPIA, HPIC, or HPID with
auto-incrementing) and the state of the FIFO, transitions on UHPI_HRDY may or may not occur.
C. UHPI_HCS reflects typical UHPI_HCS behavior when UHPI_HSTROBE assertion is caused by UHPI_HDS1 or
UHPI_HDS2. UHPI_HCS timing requirements are reflected by parameters for UHPI_HSTROBE.
D The diagram above assumes UHPI_HAS has been pulled high.
Figure 6-57. UHPI Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
195
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
UHPI_HAS(A)
17
10
17
9
10
9
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]
10
10
9
9
UHPI_HR/W
10
10
9
9
UHPI_HHWIL
4
3
UHPI_HSTROBE(B)
16
16
UHPI_HCS
14
UHPI_HD[15:0]
6
(output)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
5a
8
1st half-word
14
15
7
8
2nd half-word
UHPI_HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the UHPI_HAS signal only once per UHPI_HSTROBE active cycle.
UHPI_HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2:
[NOT(UHPI_HDS1 XOR UHPI_HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.
Figure 6-58. UHPI Read Timing (HAS Used)
196
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
UHPI_HCS
UHPI_HAS(D)
1
1
2
2
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
UHPI_HR/W
1
1
2
2
UHPI_HHWIL
3
4
UHPI_HSTROBE(A)(C)
11
UHPI_HD[15:0]
(input)
11
12
12
1st Half-Word
5
13
2nd Half-Word
18
13
18
5
UHPI_HRDY(B)
A. UHPI_HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR
UHPI_HCS.
B. Depending on the type of write or read operation (HPID without auto-incrementing; HPIA, HPIC, or HPID with auto-incrementing) and the
state of the FIFO, transitions on UHPI_HRDY may or may not occur.
C. UHPI_HCS reflects typical UHPI_HCS behavior when UHPI_HSTROBE assertion is caused by UHPI_HDS1 or UHPI_HDS2. UHPI_HCS
timing requirements are reflected by parameters for UHPI_HSTROBE.
D The diagram above assumes UHPI_HAS has been pulled high.
Figure 6-59. UHPI Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
197
ADVANCE INFORMATION
3
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
17
UHPI_HAS†
17
10
10
9
9
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]
10
10
9
9
UHPI_HR/W
10
10
9
9
UHPI_HHWIL
3
4
UHPI_HSTROBE‡
16
16
UHPI_HCS
11
(input)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1st half-word
5a
11
12
UHPI_HD[15:0]
12
2nd half-word
13
UHPI_HRDY
A.
B.
For correct operation, strobe the UHPI_HAS signal only once per UHPI_HSTROBE active cycle.
UHPI_HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2:
[NOT(UHPI_HDS1 XOR UHPI_HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.
Figure 6-60. UHPI Write Timing (HAS Used)
198
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.22 Universal Parallel Port (uPP)
The Universal Parallel Port (uPP) peripheral is a multichannel, high-speed parallel interface with dedicated
data lines and minimal control signals. It is designed to interface cleanly with high-speed analog-to-digital
converters (ADCs) or digital-to-analog converters (DACs) with up to 16-bit data width (per channel). It may
also be interconnected with field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other uPP devices to achieve
high-speed digital data transfer. It can operate in receive mode, transmit mode, or duplex mode, in which
its individual channels operate in opposite directions.
The uPP peripheral includes an internal DMA controller to maximize throughput and minimize CPU
overhead during high-speed data transmission. All uPP transactions use the internal DMA to provide data
to or retrieve data from the I/O channels. The DMA controller includes two DMA channels, which typically
service separate I/O channels. The uPP peripheral also supports data interleave mode, in which all DMA
resources service a single I/O channel. In this mode, only one I/O channel may be used.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The features of the uPP include:
• Programmable data width per channel (from 8 to 16 bits inclusive)
• Programmable data justification
– Right-justify with zero extend
– Right-justify with sign extend
– Left-justify with zero fill
• Supports multiplexing of interleaved data during SDR transmit
• Optional frame START signal with programmable polarity
• Optional data ENABLE signal with programmable polarity
• Optional synchronization WAIT signal with programmable polarity
• Single Data Rate (SDR) or Double data Rate (DDR, interleaved) interface
– Supports multiplexing of interleaved data during SDR transmit
– Supports demultiplexing and multiplexing of interleaved data during DDR transfers
199
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.22.1 uPP Register Descriptions
Table 6-93 shows the uPP registers.
Table 6-93. Universal Parallel Port (uPP) Registers
BYTE ADDRESS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
200
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 6000
UPPID
uPP Peripheral Identification Register
0x01E1 6004
UPPCR
uPP Peripheral Control Register
0x01E1 6008
UPDLB
uPP Digital Loopback Register
0x01E1 6010
UPCTL
uPP Channel Control Register
0x01E1 6014
UPICR
uPP Interface Configuration Register
0x01E1 6018
UPIVR
uPP Interface Idle Value Register
0x01E1 601C
UPTCR
uPP Threshold Configuration Register
0x01E1 6020
UPISR
uPP Interrupt Raw Status Register
0x01E1 6024
UPIER
uPP Interrupt Enabled Status Register
0x01E1 6028
UPIES
uPP Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01E1 602C
UPIEC
uPP Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01E1 6030
UPEOI
uPP End-of-Interrupt Register
0x01E1 6040
UPID0
uPP DMA Channel I Descriptor 0 Register
0x01E1 6044
UPID1
uPP DMA Channel I Descriptor 1 Register
0x01E1 6048
UPID2
uPP DMA Channel I Descriptor 2 Register
0x01E1 6050
UPIS0
uPP DMA Channel I Status 0 Register
0x01E1 6054
UPIS1
uPP DMA Channel I Status 1 Register
0x01E1 6058
UPIS2
uPP DMA Channel I Status 2 Register
0x01E1 6060
UPQD0
uPP DMA Channel Q Descriptor 0 Register
0x01E1 6064
UPQD1
uPP DMA Channel Q Descriptor 1 Register
0x01E1 6068
UPQD2
uPP DMA Channel Q Descriptor 2 Register
0x01E1 6070
UPQS0
uPP DMA Channel Q Status 0 Register
0x01E1 6074
UPQS1
uPP DMA Channel Q Status 1 Register
0x01E1 6078
UPQS2
uPP DMA Channel Q Status 2 Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.22.2 uPP Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-94. Timing Requirements for uPP (see Figure 6-61, Figure 6-62, Figure 6-63, Figure 6-64)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
SDR mode
13.33
20
26.66
DDR mode
26.66
40
53.33
1
tc(INCLK)
Cycle time, CHn_CLK
2
tw(INCLKH)
Pulse width, CHn_CLK high
3
tw(INCLKL)
Pulse width, CHn_CLK low
4
tsu(STV-INCLKH)
Setup time, CHn_START valid before CHn_CLK high
5
th(INCLKH-STV)
Hold time, CHn_START valid after CHn_CLK high
6
tsu(ENV-INCLKH)
Setup time, CHn_ENABLE valid before CHn_CLK high
7
th(INCLKH-ENV)
Hold time, CHn_ENABLE valid after CHn_CLK high
8
tsu(DV-INCLKH)
Setup time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid before CHn_CLK
high
MAX
UNIT
ns
SDR mode
5
8
10
DDR mode
10
16
20
ns
SDR mode
5
8
10
DDR mode
10
16
20
4
5.5
6.5
ns
0.8
0.8
0.8
ns
4
5.5
6.5
ns
0.8
0.8
0.8
ns
4
5.5
6.5
ns
0.8
0.8
0.8
ns
4
5.5
6.5
ns
0.8
0.8
0.8
ns
ns
9
th(INCLKH-DV)
Hold time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid after CHn_CLK high
10
tsu(DV-INCLKL)
Setup time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid before CHn_CLK low
11
th(INCLKL-DV)
Hold time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid after CHn_CLK low
19
tsu(WTV-INCLKL)
Setup time, CHn_WAIT valid before CHn_CLK high
10
12
14
ns
20
th(INCLKL-WTV)
Hold time, CHn_WAIT valid after CHn_CLK high
0.8
0.8
0.8
ns
21
tc(2xTXCLK)
Cycle time, 2xTXCLK input clock (1)
6.66
10
13.33
ns
(1)
2xTXCLK is an alternate transmit clock source that must be at least 2 times the required uPP transmit clock rate (as it is is divided down
by 2 inside the uPP). 2xTXCLK has no specified skew relationship to the CHn_CLOCK and therefore is not shown in the timing diagram.
Table 6-95. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for uPP
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
SDR mode
13.33
20
26.66
DDR mode
26.66
40
53.33
MAX
UNIT
ns
12
tc(OUTCLK)
Cycle time, CHn_CLK
13
tw(OUTCLKH)
Pulse width, CHn_CLK high
14
tw(OUTCLKL)
Pulse width, CHn_CLK low
15
td(OUTCLKH-STV)
Delay time, CHn_START valid after CHn_CLK high
2
11
2
15
2
21
ns
16
td(OUTCLKH-ENV)
Delay time, CHn_ENABLE valid after CHn_CLK high
2
11
2
15
2
21
ns
17
td(OUTCLKH-DV)
Delay time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid after CHn_CLK high
2
11
2
15
2
21
ns
18
td(OUTCLKL-DV)
Delay time, CHn_DATA/XDATA valid after CHn_CLK low
2
11
2
15
2
21
ns
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
SDR mode
5
8
10
DDR mode
10
16
20
SDR mode
5
8
10
DDR mode
10
16
20
ns
ns
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
201
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
1
2
3
CHx_CLK
4
5
CHx_START
6
7
CHx_ENABLE
CHx_WAIT
8
9
CHx_DATA[n:0]
CHx_XDATA[n:0]
Data1
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data7
Data6
Data8
Data9
Figure 6-61. uPP Single Data Rate (SDR) Receive Timing
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
2
3
CHx_CLK
4
5
CHx_START
6
7
CHx_ENABLE
CHx_WAIT
8
CHx_DATA[n:0]
CHx_XDATA[n:0]
I1
Q1
I2
Q2
I3
Q3
10
9
I4
Q4
I5
Q5
I6
Q6
I7
11
Q7
I8
Q8
I9
Q9
Figure 6-62. uPP Double Data Rate (DDR) Receive Timing
202
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
12
13
14
CHx_CLK
15
CHx_START
16
CHx_ENABLE
19
20
CHx_WAIT
17
CHx_DATA[n:0]
CHx_XDATA[n:0]
Data1
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data6
Data7
Data8
Data9
12
13
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Figure 6-63. uPP Single Data Rate (SDR) Transmit Timing
14
CHx_CLK
15
CHx_START
16
CHx_ENABLE
19
20
CHx_WAIT
17
CHx_DATA[n:0]
CHx_XDATA[n:0]
I1
Q1
18
I2
Q2
I3
Q3
I4
Q4
I5
Q5
I6
Q6
I7
Q7
I8
Q8
I9
Q9
Figure 6-64. uPP Double Data Rate (DDR) Transmit Timing
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
203
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.23 Video Port Interface (VPIF)
The Video Port Interface (VPIF) allows the capture and display of digital video streams. Features include:
• Up to 2 Video Capture Channels (Channel 0 and Channel 1)
– Two 8-bit Standard-Definition (SD) Video with embedded timing codes (BT.656)
– Single 16-bit High-Definition (HD) Video with embedded timing codes (BT.1120)
– Single Raw Video (8-/10-/12-bit)
• Up to 2 Video Display Channels (Channel 2 and Channel 3)
– Two 8-bit SD Video Display with embedded timing codes (BT.656)
– Single 16-bit HD Video Display with embedded timing codes (BT.1120)
The VPIF capture channel input data format is selectable based on the settings of the specific Channel
Control Register (Channels 0–3). The VPIF Raw Video data-bus width is selectable based on the settings
of the Channel 0 Control Register.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
204
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.23.1 VPIF Register Descriptions
Table 6-96 shows the VPIF registers.
Table 6-96. Video Port Interface (VPIF) Registers
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 7000
PID
0x01E1 7004
CH0_CTRL
Peripheral identification register
Channel 0 control register
0x01E1 7008
CH1_CTRL
Channel 1 control register
0x01E1 700C
CH2_CTRL
Channel 2 control register
0x01E1 7010
CH3_CTRL
Channel 3 control register
0x01E1 7014 - 0x01E1 701F
-
Reserved
0x01E1 7020
INTEN
0x01E1 7024
INTENSET
Interrupt enable
Interrupt enable set
0x01E1 7028
INTENCLR
Interrupt enable clear
0x01E1 702C
INTSTAT
0x01E1 7030
INTSTATCLR
0x01E1 7034
EMU_CTRL
Emulation control
0x01E1 7038
DMA_SIZE
DMA size control
0x01E1 703C - 0x01E1 703F
-
Interrupt status
Interrupt status clear
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BYTE ADDRESS
Reserved
CAPTURE CHANNEL 0 REGISTERS
0x01E1 7040
CH0_TY_STRTADR
Channel 0 Top Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 7044
CH0_BY_STRTADR
Channel 0 Bottom Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 7048
CH0_TC_STRTADR
Channel 0 Top Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 704C
CH0_BC_STRTADR
Channel 0 Bottom Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 7050
CH0_THA_STRTADR
Channel 0 Top Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7054
CH0_BHA_STRTADR
Channel 0 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7058
CH0_TVA_STRTADR
Channel 0 Top Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 705C
CH0_BVA_STRTADR
Channel 0 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7060
CH0_SUBPIC_CFG
0x01E1 7064
CH0_IMG_ADD_OFST
Channel 0 sub-picture configuration
Channel 0 image data address offset
0x01E1 7068
CH0_HA_ADD_OFST
Channel 0 horizontal ancillary data address offset
0x01E1 706C
CH0_HSIZE_CFG
Channel 0 horizontal data size configuration
0x01E1 7070
CH0_VSIZE_CFG0
Channel 0 vertical data size configuration (0)
0x01E1 7074
CH0_VSIZE_CFG1
Channel 0 vertical data size configuration (1)
0x01E1 7078
CH0_VSIZE_CFG2
Channel 0 vertical data size configuration (2)
0x01E1 707C
CH0_VSIZE
Channel 0 vertical image size
CAPTURE CHANNEL 1 REGISTERS
0x01E1 7080
CH1_TY_STRTADR
Channel 1 Top Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 7084
CH1_BY_STRTADR
Channel 1 Bottom Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 7088
CH1_TC_STRTADR
Channel 1 Top Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 708C
CH1_BC_STRTADR
Channel 1 Bottom Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 7090
CH1_THA_STRTADR
Channel 1 Top Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7094
CH1_BHA_STRTADR
Channel 1 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7098
CH1_TVA_STRTADR
Channel 1 Top Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 709C
CH1_BVA_STRTADR
Channel 1 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 70A0
CH1_SUBPIC_CFG
0x01E1 70A4
CH1_IMG_ADD_OFST
Channel 1 image data address offset
0x01E1 70A8
CH1_HA_ADD_OFST
Channel 1 horizontal ancillary data address offset
0x01E1 70AC
CH1_HSIZE_CFG
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Channel 1 sub-picture configuration
Channel 1 horizontal data size configuration
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
205
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-96. Video Port Interface (VPIF) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 70B0
CH1_VSIZE_CFG0
Channel 1 vertical data size configuration (0)
0x01E1 70B4
CH1_VSIZE_CFG1
Channel 1 vertical data size configuration (1)
0x01E1 70B8
CH1_VSIZE_CFG2
Channel 1 vertical data size configuration (2)
0x01E1 70BC
CH1_VSIZE
Channel 1 vertical image size
DISPLAY CHANNEL 2 REGISTERS
0x01E1 70C0
CH2_TY_STRTADR
Channel 2 Top Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 70C4
CH2_BY_STRTADR
Channel 2 Bottom Field luma buffer start address
0x01E1 70C8
CH2_TC_STRTADR
Channel 2 Top Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 70CC
CH2_BC_STRTADR
Channel 2 Bottom Field chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 70D0
CH2_THA_STRTADR
Channel 2 Top Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 70D4
CH2_BHA_STRTADR
Channel 2 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 70D8
CH2_TVA_STRTADR
Channel 2 Top Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 70DC
CH2_BVA_STRTADR
Channel 2 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data buffer start address
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E1 70E0
CH2_SUBPIC_CFG
0x01E1 70E4
CH2_IMG_ADD_OFST
Channel 2 sub-picture configuration
Channel 2 image data address offset
0x01E1 70E8
CH2_HA_ADD_OFST
Channel 2 horizontal ancillary data address offset
0x01E1 70EC
CH2_HSIZE_CFG
Channel 2 horizontal data size configuration
0x01E1 70F0
CH2_VSIZE_CFG0
Channel 2 vertical data size configuration (0)
0x01E1 70F4
CH2_VSIZE_CFG1
Channel 2 vertical data size configuration (1)
0x01E1 70F8
CH2_VSIZE_CFG2
Channel 2 vertical data size configuration (2)
0x01E1 70FC
CH2_VSIZE
0x01E1 7100
CH2_THA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 7104
CH2_THA_SIZE
0x01E1 7108
CH2_BHA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 710C
CH2_BHA_SIZE
0x01E1 7110
CH2_TVA_STRTPOS
Channel 2 vertical image size
Channel 2 Top Field horizontal ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 2 Top Field horizontal ancillary data size
Channel 2 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 2 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data size
Channel 2 Top Field vertical ancillary data insertion start position
0x01E1 7114
CH2_TVA_SIZE
0x01E1 7118
CH2_BVA_STRTPOS
Channel 2 Top Field vertical ancillary data size
0x01E1 711C
CH2_BVA_SIZE
0x01E1 7120 - 0x01E1 713F
-
0x01E1 7140
CH3_TY_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 0 luma buffer start address
0x01E1 7144
CH3_BY_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 1 luma buffer start address
Channel 2 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 2 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data size
Reserved
DISPLAY CHANNEL 3 REGISTERS
206
0x01E1 7148
CH3_TC_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 0 chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 714C
CH3_BC_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 1 chroma buffer start address
0x01E1 7150
CH3_THA_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 0 horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7154
CH3_BHA_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 1 horizontal ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7158
CH3_TVA_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 0 vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 715C
CH3_BVA_STRTADR
Channel 3 Field 1 vertical ancillary data buffer start address
0x01E1 7160
CH3_SUBPIC_CFG
0x01E1 7164
CH3_IMG_ADD_OFST
Channel 3 image data address offset
0x01E1 7168
CH3_HA_ADD_OFST
Channel 3 horizontal ancillary data address offset
0x01E1 716C
CH3_HSIZE_CFG
Channel 3 horizontal data size configuration
0x01E1 7170
CH3_VSIZE_CFG0
Channel 3 vertical data size configuration (0)
0x01E1 7174
CH3_VSIZE_CFG1
Channel 3 vertical data size configuration (1)
0x01E1 7178
CH3_VSIZE_CFG2
Channel 3 vertical data size configuration (2)
0x01E1 717C
CH3_VSIZE
Channel 3 sub-picture configuration
Channel 3 vertical image size
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-96. Video Port Interface (VPIF) Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E1 7180
CH3_THA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 7184
CH3_THA_SIZE
0x01E1 7188
CH3_BHA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 718C
CH3_BHA_SIZE
0x01E1 7190
CH3_TVA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 7194
CH3_TVA_SIZE
0x01E1 7198
CH3_BVA_STRTPOS
0x01E1 719C
CH3_BVA_SIZE
0x01E1 71A0 - 0x01E1 71FF
-
Channel 3 Top Field horizontal ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 3 Top Field horizontal ancillary data size
Channel 3 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 3 Bottom Field horizontal ancillary data size
Channel 3 Top Field vertical ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 3 Top Field vertical ancillary data size
Channel 3 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data insertion start position
Channel 3 Bottom Field vertical ancillary data size
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
207
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.23.2 VPIF Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-97. Timing Requirements for VPIF VP_CLKINx Inputs (1) (see Figure 6-65)
NO.
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Cycle time, VP_CLKIN0
13.3
20
37
ns
Cycle time, VP_CLKIN1/2/3
13.3
20
37
ns
tw(VKIH)
Pulse duration, VP_CLKINx high
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
ns
tw(VKIL)
Pulse duration, VP_CLKINx low
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
tt(VKI)
Transition time, VP_CLKINx
1
tc(VKI)
2
3
4
(1)
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
5
5
ns
5
ns
C = VP_CLKINx period in ns.
1
4
3
2
VP_CLKINx
ADVANCE INFORMATION
4
Figure 6-65. Video Port Capture VP_CLKINx Timing
208
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-98. Timing Requirements for VPIF Channels 0/1 Video Capture Data and Control Inputs
(see Figure 6-66)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tsu(VDINV-VKIH)
Setup time, VP_DINx valid before VP_CLKIN0/1 high
4
6
7
ns
2
th(VKIH-VDINV)
Hold time, VP_DINx valid after VP_CLKIN0/1 high
0
0
0
ns
VP_CLKIN0/1
1
2
VP_DINx/FIELD/
HSYNC/VSYNC
Table 6-99. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Video Data Shown
With Respect to VP_CLKOUT2/3 (1)
(see Figure 6-67)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V
PARAMETER
MIN
1.1V
MAX
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(VKO)
Cycle time, VP_CLKOUT2/3
13.3
20
37
ns
2
tw(VKOH)
Pulse duration, VP_CLKOUT2/3 high
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
ns
3
tw(VKOL)
Pulse duration, VP_CLKOUT2/3 low
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
ns
4
tt(VKO)
Transition time, VP_CLKOUT2/3
11
td(VKOH-VPDOUTV)
Delay time,
VP_CLKOUT2/3 high to VP_DOUTx valid
12
td(VCLKOH-VPDOUTIV)
Delay time,
VP_CLKOUT2/3 high to VP_DOUTx invalid
(1)
5
5
5
ns
8.5
12
17
ns
1.5
1.5
1.5
ns
C = VP_CLKO2/3 period in ns.
2
1
VP_CLKOUTx
(Positive Edge
Clocking)
3
4
4
VP_CLKOUTx
(Negative Edge
Clocking)
11
12
VP_DOUTx
Figure 6-67. VPIF Channels 2/3 Video Display Data Output Timing With Respect to VP_CLKOUT2/3
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
209
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Figure 6-66. VPIF Channels 0/1 Video Capture Data and Control Input Timing
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.24 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Peripheral
The device contains up to three enhanced capture (eCAP) modules. Figure 6-68 shows a functional block
diagram of a module.
Uses for ECAP include:
• Speed measurements of rotating machinery (e.g. toothed sprockets sensed via Hall sensors)
• Elapsed time measurements between position sensor triggers
• Period and duty cycle measurements of pulse train signals
• Decoding current or voltage amplitude derived from duty cycle encoded current/voltage sensors
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The ECAP module described in this specification includes the following features:
• 32 bit time base
• 4 event time-stamp registers (each 32 bits)
• Edge polarity selection for up to 4 sequenced time-stamp capture events
• Interrupt on either of the 4 events
• Single shot capture of up to 4 event time-stamps
• Continuous mode capture of time-stamps in a 4 deep circular buffer
• Absolute time-stamp capture
• Difference mode time-stamp capture
• All the above resources are dedicated to a single input pin
The eCAP modules are clocked at the ASYNC3 clock domain rate.
210
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
SYNC
www.ti.com
SYNCIn
SYNCOut
CTRPHS
(phase register−32 bit)
TSCTR
(counter−32 bit)
APWM mode
OVF
RST
CTR_OVF
Delta−mode
CTR [0−31]
PRD [0−31]
PWM
compare
logic
CMP [0−31]
32
CTR=PRD
CTR [0−31]
CTR=CMP
32
LD1
CAP1
(APRD active)
APRD
shadow
32
32
Polarity
select
LD
32
CMP [0−31]
CAP2
(ACMP active)
32
LD
LD2
Polarity
select
Event
qualifier
ACMP
shadow
32
CAP3
(APRD shadow)
LD
32
CAP4
(ACMP shadow)
LD
eCAPx
ADVANCE INFORMATION
32
MODE SELECT
PRD [0−31]
Event
Pre-scale
Polarity
select
LD3
LD4
Polarity
select
4
Capture events
4
CEVT[1:4]
to Interrupt
Controller
Interrupt
Trigger
and
Flag
control
CTR_OVF
Continuous /
Oneshot
Capture Control
CTR=PRD
CTR=CMP
Figure 6-68. eCAP Functional Block Diagram
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
211
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-100 is the list of the ECAP registers.
Table 6-100. ECAPx Configuration Registers
ECAP0
BYTE ADDRESS
ECAP1
BYTE ADDRESS
ECAP2
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01F0 6000
0x01F0 7000
0x01F0 8000
TSCTR
0x01F0 6004
0x01F0 7004
0x01F0 8004
CTRPHS
0x01F0 6008
0x01F0 7008
0x01F0 8008
CAP1
Capture 1 Register
0x01F0 600C
0x01F0 700C
0x01F0 800C
CAP2
Capture 2 Register
0x01F0 6010
0x01F0 7010
0x01F0 8010
CAP3
Capture 3 Register
0x01F0 6014
0x01F0 7014
0x01F0 8014
CAP4
Capture 4 Register
0x01F0 6028
0x01F0 7028
0x01F0 8028
ECCTL1
Capture Control Register 1
0x01F0 602A
0x01F0 702A
0x01F0 802A
ECCTL2
Capture Control Register 2
0x01F0 602C
0x01F0 702C
0x01F0 802C
ECEINT
Capture Interrupt Enable Register
0x01F0 602E
0x01F0 702E
0x01F0 802E
ECFLG
Capture Interrupt Flag Register
0x01F0 6030
0x01F0 7030
0x01F0 8030
ECCLR
Capture Interrupt Clear Register
DESCRIPTION
Time-Stamp Counter
Counter Phase Offset Value Register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01F0 6032
0x01F0 7032
0x01F0 8032
ECFRC
Capture Interrupt Force Register
0x01F0 605C
0x01F0 705C
0x01F0 805C
REVID
Revision ID
Table 6-101 shows the eCAP timing requirement and Table 6-102 shows the eCAP switching
characteristics.
Table 6-101. Timing Requirements for Enhanced Capture (eCAP)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
MIN
tw(CAP)
Capture input pulse width
MAX
UNIT
Asynchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Table 6-102. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for eCAP
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
tw(APWM)
212
Pulse duration, APWMx output high/low
MAX
20
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
1.1V
MIN
20
1.0V
MAX
MIN
20
UNIT
MAX
ns
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.25 Enhanced High-Resolution Pulse-Width Modulator (eHRPWM)
The device contains two enhanced PWM Modules (eHRPWM). Figure 6-69 shows a block diagram of
multiple eHRPWM modules. Figure 4-4 shows the signal interconnections with the eHRPWM.
EPWMSYNCI
EPWM0INT
EPWM0SYNCI
EPWM0A
ePWM0 module
EPWM0B
TZ
Interrupt
Controllers
EPWM0SYNCO
GPIO
MUX
EPWM1A
ePWM1 module
EPWM1SYNCO
To eCAP0
module
(sync in)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EPWM1SYNCI
EPWM1INT
EPWM1B
TZ
EPWMSYNCO
Peripheral Bus
Figure 6-69. Multiple PWM Modules in a C6748 System
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
213
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Time−base (TB)
Sync
in/out
select
Mux
CTR=ZERO
CTR=CMPB
Disabled
TBPRD shadow (16)
TBPRD active (16)
CTR=PRD
EPWMSYNCO
TBCTL[SYNCOSEL]
TBCTL[CNTLDE]
EPWMSYNCI
Counter
up/down
(16 bit)
CTR=ZERO
CTR_Dir
TBCNT
active (16)
TBPHSHR (8)
16
8
TBPHS active (24)
Phase
control
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Counter compare (CC)
CTR=CMPA
CMPAHR (8)
16
TBCTL[SWFSYNC]
(software forced sync)
Action
qualifier
(AQ)
CTR = PRD
CTR = ZERO
CTR = CMPA
CTR = CMPB
CTR_Dir
8
Event
trigger
and
interrupt
(ET)
EPWMxINT
HiRes PWM (HRPWM)
CMPA active (24)
EPWMxA
EPWMA
CMPA shadow (24)
CTR=CMPB
Dead
band
(DB)
16
PWM
chopper
(PC)
EPWMxB
EPWMB
CMPB active (16)
CMPB shadow (16)
Trip
zone
(TZ)
EPWMxTZINT
CTR = ZERO
TZ
Figure 6-70. eHRPWM Sub-Modules Showing Critical Internal Signal Interconnections
214
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-103. eHRPWM Module Control and Status Registers Grouped by Submodule
eHRPWM0
BYTE ADDRESS
eHRPWM1
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
SHADOW
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Time-Base Submodule Registers
0x01F0 0000
0x01F0 2000
TBCTL
No
Time-Base Control Register
0x01F0 0002
0x01F0 2002
TBSTS
No
Time-Base Status Register
0x01F0 0004
0x01F0 2004
No
Extension for HRPWM Phase Register
0x01F0 0006
0x01F0 2006
TBPHS
No
Time-Base Phase Register
0x01F0 0008
0x01F0 2008
TBCNT
No
Time-Base Counter Register
0x01F0 000A
0x01F0 200A
TBPRD
Yes
Time-Base Period Register
TBPHSHR
(1)
Counter-Compare Submodule Registers
0x01F0 000E
0x01F0 200E
CMPCTL
No
Counter-Compare Control Register
0x01F0 0010
0x01F0 2010
CMPAHR
No
Extension for HRPWM Counter-Compare A Register
0x01F0 0012
0x01F0 2012
CMPA
Yes
Counter-Compare A Register
0x01F0 0014
0x01F0 2014
CMPB
Yes
Counter-Compare B Register
(1)
0x01F0 0016
0x01F0 2016
AQCTLA
No
Action-Qualifier Control Register for Output A (eHRPWMxA)
0x01F0 0018
0x01F0 2018
AQCTLB
No
Action-Qualifier Control Register for Output B (eHRPWMxB)
0x01F0 001A
0x01F0 201A
AQSFRC
No
Action-Qualifier Software Force Register
0x01F0 001C
0x01F0 201C
AQCSFRC
Yes
Action-Qualifier Continuous S/W Force Register Set
Dead-Band Generator Submodule Registers
0x01F0 001E
0x01F0 201E
DBCTL
No
Dead-Band Generator Control Register
0x01F0 0020
0x01F0 2020
DBRED
No
Dead-Band Generator Rising Edge Delay Count Register
0x01F0 0022
0x01F0 2022
DBFED
No
Dead-Band Generator Falling Edge Delay Count Register
0x01F0 003C
0x01F0 203C
PCCTL
PWM-Chopper Submodule Registers
No
PWM-Chopper Control Register
Trip-Zone Submodule Registers
0x01F0 0024
0x01F0 2024
TZSEL
No
Trip-Zone Select Register
0x01F0 0028
0x01F0 2028
TZCTL
No
Trip-Zone Control Register
0x01F0 002A
0x01F0 202A
TZEINT
No
Trip-Zone Enable Interrupt Register
0x01F0 002C
0x01F0 202C
TZFLG
No
Trip-Zone Flag Register
0x01F0 002E
0x01F0 202E
TZCLR
No
Trip-Zone Clear Register
0x01F0 0030
0x01F0 2030
TZFRC
No
Trip-Zone Force Register
Event-Trigger Submodule Registers
0x01F0 0032
0x01F0 2032
ETSEL
No
Event-Trigger Selection Register
0x01F0 0034
0x01F0 2034
ETPS
No
Event-Trigger Pre-Scale Register
0x01F0 0036
0x01F0 2036
ETFLG
No
Event-Trigger Flag Register
0x01F0 0038
0x01F0 2038
ETCLR
No
Event-Trigger Clear Register
0x01F0 003A
0x01F0 203A
ETFRC
No
Event-Trigger Force Register
High-Resolution PWM (HRPWM) Submodule Registers
0x01F0 1020
(1)
0x01F0 3020
HRCNFG
No
HRPWM Configuration Register
(1)
These registers are only available on eHRPWM instances that include the high-resolution PWM (HRPWM) extension; otherwise, these
locations are reserved.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
215
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Action-Qualifier Submodule Registers
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.25.1 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (eHRPWM) Timing
PWM refers to PWM outputs on eHRPWM1-6. Table 6-104 shows the PWM timing requirements and
Table 6-105, switching characteristics.
Table 6-104. Timing Requirements for eHRPWM
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
MIN
tw(SYNCIN)
Sync input pulse width
UNIT
MAX
Asynchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Table 6-105. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for eHRPWM
PARAMETER
TEST
CONDITIONS
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
MAX
1.1V
MIN
1.0V
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
ADVANCE INFORMATION
tw(PWM)
Pulse duration, PWMx output
high/low
tw(SYNCOUT)
Sync output pulse width
td(PWM)TZA
Delay time, trip input active to
PWM forced high
Delay time, trip input active to
PWM forced low
no pin load; no
additional
programmable
delay
25
25
25
Delay time, trip input active to
PWM Hi-Z
no additional
programmable
delay
20
20
20
td(TZ-PWM)HZ
216
20
20
26.6
8tc(SCO)
8tc(SCO)
8tc(SCO)
ns
cycles
ns
ns
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.25.2 Trip-Zone Input Timing
tw(TZ)
TZ
td(TZ-PWM)HZ
PWM(A)
A.
PWM refers to all the PWM pins in the device. The state of the PWM pins after TZ is taken high depends on the PWM
recovery software.
Figure 6-71. PWM Hi-Z Characteristics
Table 6-106. Trip-Zone input Timing Requirements
TEST CONDITIONS
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V, 1.0V
MIN
tw(TZ)
Pulse duration, TZx input low
MAX
UNIT
Asynchronous
1tc(SCO)
cycles
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Table 6-107 shows the high-resolution PWM switching characteristics.
Table 6-107. High Resolution PWM Characteristics at SYSCLKOUT = (60 - 100 MHz)
PARAMETER
1.3V, 1.2V
MIN
Micro Edge Positioning (MEP) step size (1)
(1)
TYP
200
1.1V
MAX
MIN
TYP
200
1.0V
MAX
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
200
ps
MEP step size will increase with low voltage and high temperature and decrease with high voltage and cold temperature. Applications
that use the HRPWM feature should use MEP Scale Factor Optimizer (SFO) estimation software functions. See the TI software libraries
for details of using SFO function in end applications. SFO functions help to estimate the number of MEP steps per SYSCLKOUT period
dynamically while the HRPWM is in operation.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
217
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PARAMETER
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.26 Timers
The timers support the following features:
• Configurable as single 64-bit timer or two 32-bit timers
• Period timeouts generate interrupts, DMA events or external pin events
• 8 32-bit compare registers
• Compare matches generate interrupt events
• Capture capability
• 64-bit Watchdog capability (Timer64P1 only)
Table 6-108 lists the timer registers.
Table 6-108. Timer Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
TIMER64P 0
BYTE
ADDRESS
TIMER64P 1
BYTE
ADDRESS
0x01C2 0000
0x01C2 1000
0x01F0 C000
0x01F0 D000
0x01C2 0004
0x01C2 1004
0x01F0 C004
0x01F0 D004
EMUMGT
0x01C2 0008
0x01C2 1008
0x01F0 C008
0x01F0 D008
GPINTGPEN
0x01C2 000C
0x01C2 100C
0x01F0 C00C
0x01F0 D00C
0x01C2 0010
0x01C2 1010
0x01F0 C010
0x01F0 D010
TIM12
Timer Counter Register 12
0x01C2 0014
0x01C2 1014
0x01F0 C014
0x01F0 D014
TIM34
Timer Counter Register 34
0x01C2 0018
0x01C2 1018
0x01F0 C018
0x01F0 D018
PRD12
Timer Period Register 12
0x01C2 001C
0x01C2 101C
0x01F0 C01C
0x01F0 D01C
PRD34
Timer Period Register 34
0x01C2 0020
0x01C2 1020
0x01F0 C020
0x01F0 D020
TCR
0x01C2 0024
0x01C2 1024
0x01F0 C024
0x01F0 D024
TGCR
0x01C2 0028
0x01C2 1028
0x01F0 C028
0x01F0 D028
WDTCR
0x01C2 0034
0x01C2 1034
0x01F0 C034
0x01F0 D034
REL12
Timer Reload Register 12
0x01C2 0038
0x01C2 1038
0x01F0 C038
0x01F0 D038
REL34
Timer Reload Register 34
0x01C2 003C
0x01C2 103C
0x01F0 C03C
0x01F0 D03C
CAP12
Timer Capture Register 12
0x01C2 0040
0x01C2 1040
0x01F0 C040
0x01F0 D040
CAP34
Timer Capture Register 34
0x01C2 0044
0x01C2 1044
0x01F0 C044
0x01F0 D044
INTCTLSTAT
0x01C2 0060
0x01C2 1060
0x01F0 C060
0x01F0 D060
CMP0
Compare Register 0
0x01C2 0064
0x01C2 1064
0x01F0 C064
0x01F0 D064
CMP1
Compare Register 1
0x01C2 0068
0x01C2 1068
0x01F0 C068
0x01F0 D068
CMP2
Compare Register 2
0x01C2 006C
0x01C2 106C
0x01F0 C06C
0x01F0 D06C
CMP3
Compare Register 3
0x01C2 0070
0x01C2 1070
0x01F0 C070
0x01F0 D070
CMP4
Compare Register 4
0x01C2 0074
0x01C2 1074
0x01F0 C074
0x01F0 D074
CMP5
Compare Register 5
0x01C2 0078
0x01C2 1078
0x01F0 C078
0x01F0 D078
CMP6
Compare Register 6
0x01C2 007C
0x01C2 107C
0x01F0 C07C
0x01F0 D07C
CMP7
Compare Register 7
218
TIMER64P 2 BYTE
TIMER64P 3
ADDRESS
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REV
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Revision Register
Emulation Management Register
GPIO Interrupt and GPIO Enable Register
GPDATGPDIR GPIO Data and GPIO Direction Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Timer Control Register
Timer Global Control Register
Watchdog Timer Control Register
Timer Interrupt Control and Status Register
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
6.26.1
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Timer Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-109. Timing Requirements for Timer Input (1)
NO.
(2)
(see Figure 6-72)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V,
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(TM64Px_IN12) Cycle time, TM64Px_IN12
2
tw(TINPH)
Pulse duration, TM64Px_IN12 high
0.45C
0.55C
ns
3
tw(TINPL)
Pulse duration, TM64Px_IN12 low
0.45C
0.55C
ns
tt(TM64Px_IN12)
Transition time, TM64Px_IN12
0.05C
ns
4
(1)
(2)
4P
ns
P = OSCIN cycle time in ns. For example, when OSCIN frequency is 27 MHz, use P = 37.037 ns.
C = TM64P0_IN12 cycle time in ns. For example, when TM64Px_IN12 frequency is 27 MHz, use C = 37.037 ns
1
2
3
TM64P0_IN12
Figure 6-72. Timer Timing
Table 6-110. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Timer Output
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V,
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
5
6
(1)
(1)
UNIT
MAX
tw(TOUTH)
Pulse duration, TM64P0_OUT12 high
4P
ns
tw(TOUTL)
Pulse duration, TM64P0_OUT12 low
4P
ns
P = OSCIN cycle time in ns. For example, when OSCIN frequency is 27 MHz, use P = 37.037 ns.
5
6
TM64P0_OUT12
Figure 6-73. Timer Timing
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
219
ADVANCE INFORMATION
4
4
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.27 Real Time Clock (RTC)
The RTC provides a time reference to an application running on the device. The current date and time is
tracked in a set of counter registers that update once per second. The time can be represented in 12-hour
or 24-hour mode. The calendar and time registers are buffered during reads and writes so that updates do
not interfere with the accuracy of the time and date.
Alarms are available to interrupt the CPU at a particular time, or at periodic time intervals, such as once
per minute or once per day. In addition, the RTC can interrupt the CPU every time the calendar and time
registers are updated, or at programmable periodic intervals.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The real-time clock (RTC) provides the following features:
• 100-year calendar (xx00 to xx99)
• Counts seconds, minutes, hours, day of the week, date, month, and year with leap year compensation
• Binary-coded-decimal (BCD) representation of time, calendar, and alarm
• 12-hour clock mode (with AM and PM) or 24-hour clock mode
• Alarm interrupt
• Periodic interrupt
• Single interrupt to the CPU
• Supports external 32.768-kHz crystal or external clock source of the same frequency
• Separate isolated power supply
Figure 6-74 shows a block diagram of the RTC.
RTC_XI
Counter
32 kHz
Oscillator
Compensation
Seconds
Minutes
Week
Days
XTAL
RTC_XO
Hours
Days
Months
Years
Oscillator
Alarm
Alarm
Interrupts
Timer
Periodic
Interrupts
Figure 6-74. Real-Time Clock Block Diagram
220
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.27.1 Clock Source
The clock reference for the RTC is an external 32.768-kHz crystal or an external clock source of the same
frequency. The RTC also has a separate power supply that is isolated from the rest of the system. When
the CPU and other peripherals are without power, the RTC can remain powered to preserve the current
time and calendar information. Even if the RTC is not used, it must remain powered when the rest of the
device is powered.
The source for the RTC reference clock may be provided by a crystal or by an external clock source. The
RTC has an internal oscillator buffer to support direct operation with a crystal. The crystal is connected
between pins RTC_XI and RTC_XO. RTC_XI is the input to the on-chip oscillator and RTC_XO is the
output from the oscillator back to the crystal.
An external 32.768-kHz clock source may be used instead of a crystal. In such a case, the clock source is
connected to RTC_XI, and RTC_XO is left unconnected.
If the RTC is not used, the RTC_XI pin should be held either low or high, RTC_XO should be left
unconnected, RTC_CVDD should be connected to the device CVDD and RTC_VSS should remain
grounded.
+1.2V
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Switch for Device
Core Power
CVDD
Real Time Clock
C2
XTAL
32.768
kHz
RTC_CVDD
RTC_XI
RTC_XO
32K
OSC
C1
Real
Time
Clock
(RTC)
Module
RTC_VSS
Isolated RTC
Power Domain
Figure 6-75. Clock Source
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
221
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.27.2 Registers
Table 6-111 lists the memory-mapped registers for the RTC. See the device-specific data manual for the
memory address of these registers.
Table 6-111. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Registers
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01C2 3000
SECOND
Seconds Register
0x01C2 3004
MINUTE
Minutes Register
0x01C2 3008
HOUR
ADVANCE INFORMATION
222
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Hours Register
0x01C2 300C
DAY
0x01C2 3010
MONTH
Day of the Month Register
0x01C2 3014
YEAR
Year Register
0x01C2 3018
DOTW
Day of the Week Register
0x01C2 3020
ALARMSECOND
Alarm Seconds Register
0x01C2 3024
ALARMMINUTE
Alarm Minutes Register
Month Register
0x01C2 3028
ALARMHOUR
Alarm Hours Register
0x01C2 302C
ALARMDAY
Alarm Days Register
0x01C2 3030
ALARMMONTH
0x01C2 3034
ALARMYEAR
Alarm Months Register
Alarm Years Register
0x01C2 3040
CTRL
Control Register
0x01C2 3044
STATUS
Status Register
0x01C2 3048
INTERRUPT
Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C2 304C
COMPLSB
Compensation (LSB) Register
0x01C2 3050
COMPMSB
Compensation (MSB) Register
0x01C2 3054
OSC
0x01C2 3060
SCRATCH0
Scratch 0 (General-Purpose) Register
0x01C2 3064
SCRATCH1
Scratch 1 (General-Purpose) Register
0x01C2 3068
SCRATCH2
Scratch 2 (General-Purpose) Register
0x01C2 306C
KICK0
Kick 0 (Write Protect) Register
0x01C2 3070
KICK1
Kick 1 (Write Protect) Register
Oscillator Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.28 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
The device GPIO peripheral supports the following:
• Up to 144 Pins configurable as GPIO
• External Interrupt and DMA request Capability
– Every GPIO pin may be configured to generate an interrupt request on detection of rising and/or
falling edges on the pin.
– The interrupt requests within each bank are combined (logical or) to create eight unique bank level
interrupt requests.
– The bank level interrupt service routine may poll the INTSTATx register for its bank to determine
which pin(s) have triggered the interrupt.
– GPIO Banks 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 Interrupts assigned to ARM INTC Interrupt Requests 42, 43,
44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49 and 50 respectively
– GPIO Banks 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are assigned to EDMA events 6, 7, 22, 23, 28, 29, and 29
respectively on Channel Controller 0 and GPIO Banks 6, 7, and 8 are assigned to EDMA events
16, 17, and 18 respectively on Channel Controller 1.
• Set/clear functionality: Firmware writes 1 to corresponding bit position(s) to set or to clear GPIO
signal(s). This allows multiple firmware processes to toggle GPIO output signals without critical section
protection (disable interrupts, program GPIO, re-enable interrupts, to prevent context switching to
anther process during GPIO programming).
• Separate Input/Output registers
• Output register in addition to set/clear so that, if preferred by firmware, some GPIO output signals can
be toggled by direct write to the output register(s).
• Output register, when read, reflects output drive status. This, in addition to the input register reflecting
pin status and open-drain I/O cell, allows wired logic be implemented.
The memory map for the GPIO registers is shown in Table 6-112.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
223
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
When configured as an output, a write to an internal register can control the state driven on the output pin.
When configured as an input, the state of the input is detectable by reading the state of an internal
register. In addition, the GPIO peripheral can produce CPU interrupts and EDMA events in different
interrupt/event generation modes. The GPIO peripheral provides generic connections to external devices.
The GPIO pins are grouped into banks of 16 pins per bank (i.e., bank 0 consists of GPIO [0:15]).
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.28.1 GPIO Register Description(s)
Table 6-112. GPIO Registers
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01E2 6000
REV
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E2 6004
RESERVED
0x01E2 6008
BINTEN
0x01E2 6010
DIR01
0x01E2 6014
OUT_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Output Data Register
Peripheral Revision Register
Reserved
GPIO Interrupt Per-Bank Enable Register
GPIO Banks 0 and 1
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Direction Register
0x01E2 6018
SET_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Data Register
0x01E2 601C
CLR_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear Data Register
0x01E2 6020
IN_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Input Data Register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x01E2 6024
SET_RIS_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6028
CLR_RIS_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 602C
SET_FAL_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6030
CLR_FAL_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6034
INTSTAT01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Interrupt Status Register
GPIO Banks 2 and 3
0x01E2 6038
DIR23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Direction Register
0x01E2 603C
OUT_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Output Data Register
0x01E2 6040
SET_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Data Register
0x01E2 6044
CLR_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Data Register
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Input Data Register
0x01E2 6048
IN_DATA23
0x01E2 604C
SET_RIS_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6050
CLR_RIS_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6054
SET_FAL_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6058
CLR_FAL_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 605C
INTSTAT23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Interrupt Status Register
GPIO Banks 4 and 5
224
0x01E2 6060
DIR45
0x01E2 6064
OUT_DATA45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Direction Register
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Output Data Register
0x01E2 6068
SET_DATA45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Set Data Register
0x01E2 606C
CLR_DATA45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Clear Data Register
0x01E2 6070
IN_DATA45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Input Data Register
0x01E2 6074
SET_RIS_TRIG45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6078
CLR_RIS_TRIG45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 607C
SET_FAL_TRIG45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6080
CLR_FAL_TRIG45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 6084
INTSTAT45
GPIO Banks 4 and 5 Interrupt Status Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-112. GPIO Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01E2 6088
DIR67
0x01E2 608C
OUT_DATA67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Output Data Register
0x01E2 6090
SET_DATA67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Set Data Register
0x01E2 6094
CLR_DATA67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Clear Data Register
0x01E2 6098
IN_DATA67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Input Data Register
GPIO Banks 6 and 7
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Direction Register
0x01E2 609C
SET_RIS_TRIG67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60A0
CLR_RIS_TRIG67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60A4
SET_FAL_TRIG67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60A8
CLR_FAL_TRIG67
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60AC
INTSTAT67
0x01E2 60B0
DIR8
0x01E2 60B4
OUT_DATA8
GPIO Bank 8 Output Data Register
0x01E2 60B8
SET_DATA8
GPIO Bank 8 Set Data Register
0x01E2 60BC
CLR_DATA8
GPIO Bank 8 Clear Data Register
0x01E2 60C0
IN_DATA8
GPIO Bank 8 Input Data Register
0x01E2 60C4
SET_RIS_TRIG8
GPIO Bank 8 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60C8
CLR_RIS_TRIG8
GPIO Bank 8 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60CC
SET_FAL_TRIG8
GPIO Bank 8 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60D0
CLR_FAL_TRIG8
GPIO Bank 8 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register
0x01E2 60D4
INTSTAT8
GPIO Banks 6 and 7 Interrupt Status Register
GPIO Bank 8
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ADVANCE INFORMATION
GPIO Bank 8 Direction Register
GPIO Bank 8 Interrupt Status Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
225
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.28.2
www.ti.com
GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-113. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (1) (see Figure 6-76)
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V,
1.0V
NO.
MIN
1
tw(GPIH)
2
(1)
tw(GPIL)
2C (1)
Pulse duration, GPn[m] as input high
Pulse duration, GPn[m] as input low
2C
UNIT
MAX
(2)
ns
(1) (2)
ns
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the device
recognize the GPIx changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to allow the device
enough time to access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
C=SYSCLK4 period in ns.
(2)
Table 6-114. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs
(see Figure 6-76)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V,
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
ADVANCE INFORMATION
(1)
UNIT
MAX
3
tw(GPOH)
Pulse duration, GPn[m] as output high
2C (1)
(2)
ns
4
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GPn[m] as output low
2C (1)
(2)
ns
This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.
C=SYSCLK4 period in ns.
(2)
2
1
GPn[m]
as input
4
3
GPn[m]
as output
Figure 6-76. GPIO Port Timing
6.28.3
GPIO Peripheral External Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-115. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts (1) (see Figure 6-77)
NO.
1.3V, 1.2V, 1.1V,
1.0V
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tw(ILOW)
Width of the external interrupt pulse low
2C (1)
(2)
ns
2
tw(IHIGH)
Width of the external interrupt pulse high
2C (1)
(2)
ns
(1)
(2)
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate an interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the device recognize the
GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIO duration must be extended to allow the device enough time to
access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
C=SYSCLK4 period in ns.
2
GPn[m]
as input
1
Figure 6-77. GPIO External Interrupt Timing
226
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
6.29 Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS)
The Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) consists of
• Two Programmable Real-Time Units (PRU0 and PRU1) and their associated memories
• An Interrupt Controller (INTC) for handling system interrupt events. The INTC also supports posting
events back to the device level host CPU.
• A Switched Central Resource (SCR) for connecting the various internal and external masters to the
resources inside the PRUSS.
The two PRUs can operate completely independently or in coordination with each other. The PRUs can
also work in coordination with the device level host CPU. This is determined by the nature of the program
which is loaded into the PRUs instruction memory. Several different signaling mechanisms are available
between the two PRUs and the device level host CPU.
The PRUSS comprises various distinct addressable regions. Externally the subsystem presents a single
64Kbyte range of addresses. The internal interconnect bus (also called switched central resource, or SCR)
of the PRUSS decodes accesses for each of the individual regions. The PRUSS memory map is
documented in Table 6-116 and in Table 6-117. Note that these two memory maps are implemented
inside the PRUSS and are local to the components of the PRUSS.
Table 6-116. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) Local Instruction Space Memory Map
BYTE ADDRESS
PRU0
PRU1
0x0000 0000 - 0x0000 0FFF
PRU0 Instruction RAM
PRU1 Instruction RAM
Table 6-117. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) Local Data Space Memory Map
BYTE ADDRESS
0x0000 0000 - 0x0000 01FF
(1)
PRU0
Data RAM 0
0x0000 0200 - 0x0000 1FFF
Reserved
0x0000 2000 - 0x0000 21FF
Data RAM 1
PRU1
(1)
Data RAM 1
(1)
Data RAM 0
(1)
Reserved
(1)
0x0000 2200 - 0x0000 3FFF
Reserved
Reserved
0x0000 4000 - 0x0000 6FFF
INTC Registers
INTC Registers
0x0000 7000 - 0x0000 73FF
PRU0 Control Registers
PRU0 Control Registers
0x0000 7400 - 0x0000 77FF
Reserved
Reserved
0x0000 7800 - 0x0000 7BFF
PRU1 Control Registers
PRU1 Control Registers
0x0000 7C00 - 0xFFFF FFFF
Reserved
Reserved
Note that PRU0 accesses Data RAM0 at address 0x0000 0000, also PRU1 accesses Data RAM1 at address 0x0000 0000. Data RAM0
is intended to be the primary data memory for PRU0 and Data RAM1 is intended to be the primary data memory for PRU1. However for
passing information between PRUs, each PRU can access the data ram of the ‘other’ PRU through address 0x0000 2000.
The global view of the PRUSS internal memories and control ports is documented in Table 6-118. The
offset addresses of each region are implemented inside the PRUSS but the global device memory
mapping places the PRUSS slave port in the address range 0x01C3 0000-0x01C3 FFFF. The PRU0 and
PRU1 can use either the local or global addresses to access their internal memories, but using the local
addresses will provide access time several cycles faster than using the global addresses. This is because
when accessing via the global address the access needs to be routed through the switch fabric outside
PRUSS and back in through the PRUSS slave port.
Table 6-118. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) Global Memory Map
BYTE ADDRESS
REGION
0x01C3 0000 - 0x01C3 01FF
Data RAM 0
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
227
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The PRUs are optimized for performing embedded tasks that require manipulation of packed memory
mapped data structures, handling of system events that have tight realtime constraints and interfacing with
systems external to the device.
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-118. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) Global Memory Map (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
REGION
0x01C3 0200 - 0x01C3 1FFF
Reserved
0x01C3 2000 - 0x01C3 21FF
Data RAM 1
0x01C3 2200 - 0x01C3 3FFF
Reserved
0x01C3 4000 - 0x01C3 6FFF
INTC Registers
0x01C3 7000 - 0x01C3 73FF
PRU0 Control Registers
0x01C3 7400 - 0x01C3 77FF
PRU0 Debug Registers
0x01C3 7800 - 0x01C3 7BFF
PRU1 Control Registers
0x01C3 7C00 - 0x01C3 7FFF
PRU1 Debug Registers
0x01C3 8000 - 0x01C3 8FFF
PRU0 Instruction RAM
0x01C3 9000 - 0x01C3 BFFF
Reserved
0x01C3 C000 - 0x01C3 CFFF
PRU1 Instruction RAM
0x01C3 D000 - 0x01C3 FFFF
Reserved
Each of the PRUs can access the rest of the device memory (including memory mapped peripheral and
configuration registers) using the global memory space addresses
ADVANCE INFORMATION
6.29.1 PRUSS Register Descriptions
Table 6-119. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem (PRUSS) Control / Status Registers
PRU0 BYTE ADDRESS
PRU1 BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C3 7000
0x01C3 7800
CONTROL
PRU Control Register
0x01C3 7004
0x01C3 7804
STATUS
PRU Status Register
0x01C3 7008
0x01C3 7808
WAKEUP
PRU Wakeup Enable Register
0x01C3 700C
0x01C3 780C
CYCLCNT
PRU Cycle Count
0x01C3 7010
0x01C3 7810
STALLCNT
PRU Stall Count
0x01C3 7020
0x01C3 7820
CONTABBLKIDX0
0x01C3 7028
0x01C3 7828
CONTABPROPTR0
PRU Constant Table Programmable
Pointer Register 0
0x01C3 702C
0x01C3 782C
CONTABPROPTR1
PRU Constant Table Programmable
Pointer Register 1
0x01C37400 - 0x01C3747C
0x01C3 7C00 - 0x01C3 7C7C
INTGPR0 – INTGPR31
PRU Internal General Purpose
Register 0 (for Debug)
0x01C37480 - 0x01C374FC
0x01C3 7C80 - 0x01C3 7CFC
INTCTER0 – INTCTER31
PRU Internal General Purpose
Register 0 (for Debug)
PRU Constant Table Block Index
Register 0
Table 6-120. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem Interrupt Controller (PRUSS INTC) Registers
BYTE ADDRESS
228
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C3 4000
REVID
0x01C3 4004
CONTROL
Revision ID Register
0x01C3 4010
GLBLEN
0x01C3 401C
GLBLNSTLVL
Global Nesting Level Register
0x01C3 4020
STATIDXSET
System Interrupt Status Indexed Set Register
0x01C3 4024
STATIDXCLR
System Interrupt Status Indexed Clear Register
0x01C3 4028
ENIDXSET
System Interrupt Enable Indexed Set Register
0x01C3 402C
ENIDXCLR
System Interrupt Enable Indexed Clear Register
0x01C3 4034
HSTINTENIDXSET
Host Interrupt Enable Indexed Set Register
0x01C3 4038
HSTINTENIDXCLR
Host Interrupt Enable Indexed Clear Register
0x01C3 4080
GLBLPRIIDX
Control Register
Global Enable Register
Global Prioritized Index Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-120. Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem Interrupt Controller (PRUSS INTC)
Registers (continued)
BYTE ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x01C3 4200
STATSETINT0
System Interrupt Status Raw/Set Register 0
0x01C3 4204
STATSETINT1
System Interrupt Status Raw/Set Register 1
0x01C3 4280
STATCLRINT0
System Interrupt Status Enabled/Clear Register 0
0x01C3 4284
STATCLRINT1
System Interrupt Status Enabled/Clear Register 1
0x01C3 4300
ENABLESET0
System Interrupt Enable Set Register 0
0x01C3 4304
ENABLESET1
System Interrupt Enable Set Register 1
0x01C3 4380
ENABLECLR0
System Interrupt Enable Clear Register 0
System Interrupt Enable Clear Register 1
0x01C3 4384
ENABLECLR1
0x01C3 4400 - 0x01C3 4440
CHANMAP0 - CHANMAP15
0x01C3 4800 - 0x01C3 4808
HOSTMAP0 - HOSTMAP2
0x01C3 4900 - 0x01C3 4928
HOSTINTPRIIDX0 HOSTINTPRIIDX9
0x01C3 4D00
POLARITY0
System Interrupt Polarity Register 0
0x01C3 4D04
POLARITY1
System Interrupt Polarity Register 1
0x01C3 4D80
TYPE0
System Interrupt Type Register 0
0x01C3 4D84
TYPE1
System Interrupt Type Register 1
0x01C3 5100 - 0x01C3 5128
HOSTINTNSTLVL0HOSTINTNSTLVL9
0x01C3 5500
HOSTINTEN
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Channel Map Registers 0-15
Host Map Register 0-2
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Host Interrupt Prioritized Index Registers 0-9
Host Interrupt Nesting Level Registers 0-9
Host Interrupt Enable Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
229
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
6.30 Emulation Logic
This section describes the steps to use a third party debugger on the ARM926EJ-S within the device. The
debug capabilities and features for ARM are as shown below.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ARM:
• Basic Debug
– Execution Control
– System Visibility
• Advanced Debug
– Global Start
– Global Stop
• Advanced System Control
– Subsystem reset via debug
– Peripheral notification of debug events
– Cache-coherent debug accesses
• Program Trace
– Program flow corruption
– Code coverage
– Path coverage
– Thread/interrupt synchronization problems
• Data Trace
– Memory corruption
• Timing Trace
– Profiling
• Analysis Actions
– Stop program execution
– Control trace streams
– Generate debug interrupt
– Benchmarking with counters
– External trigger generation
– Debug state machine state transition
– Combinational and Sequential event generation
• Analysis Events
– Program event detection
– Data event detection
– External trigger Detection
– System event detection (i.e. cache miss)
– Debug state machine state detection
• Analysis Configuration
– Application access
– Debugger access
230
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Table 6-121. ARM Debug Features
Category
Hardware Feature
Availability
Software breakpoint
Unlimited
Up to 14 HWBPs, including:
2 precise (1) HWBP inside ARM core which are shared with watch points.
Basic Debug
Hardware breakpoint
8 imprecise (1) HWBPs from ETM’s address comparators, which are shared with trace
function, and can be used as watch points.
4 imprecise (1) HWBPs from ICECrusher.
Up to 6 watch points, including:
2 from ARM core which is shared with HWBPs and can be associated with a data.
Watch point
8 from ETM’s address comparators, which are shared with trace function, and
HWBPs.
Trace Control
8 watch points from ETM can be associated with a data comparator, and ETM has
total 4 data comparators.
Counters/timers
3x32-bit (1 cycle ; 2 event)
External Event Trigger In
1
External Event Trigger Out
1
Address range for trace
4
Data qualification for trace
2
System events for trace control
20
Counters/Timers for trace control
2x16-bit
State Machines/Sequencers
1x3-State State Machine
Context/Thread ID Comparator
1
Independent trigger control units
12
Capture depth PC
4k bytes ETB
Capture depth PC + Timing
4k bytes ETB
Application accessible
Y
On-chip Trace
Capture
(1)
Watch point with Data
Precise hardware breakpoints will halt the processor immediately prior to the execution of the selected instruction. Imprecise breakpoints
will halt the processor some number of cycles after the selected instruction depending on device conditions.
6.30.1 JTAG Port Description
The device target debug interface uses the five standard IEEE 1149.1(JTAG) signals (TRST, TCK, TMS,
TDI, and TDO), a return clock (RTCK) due to the clocking requirements of the ARM926EJ-S and
emulation signals EMU0 and EMU1. TRST holds the debug and boundary scan logic in reset when pulled
low (its default state). Since TRST has an internal pull-down resistor, this ensures that at power up the
device functions in its normal (non-test) operation mode if TRST is not connected. Otherwise, TRST
should be driven inactive by the emulator or boundary scan controller. Boundary scan test cannot be
performed while the TRST pin is pulled low.
Table 6-122. JTAG Port Description
PIN
TYPE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
TRST
I
Test Logic Reset
When asserted (active low) causes all test and debug logic in the device to be reset
along with the IEEE 1149.1 interface
TCK
I
Test Clock
This is the test clock used to drive an IEEE 1149.1 TAP state machine and logic.
Depending on the emulator attached to , this is a free running clock or a gated clock
depending on RTCK monitoring.
RTCK
O
Returned Test Clock
Synchronized TCK. Depending on the emulator attached to, the JTAG signals are
clocked from RTCK or RTCK is monitored by the emulator to gate TCK.
TMS
I
Test Mode Select
Directs the next state of the IEEE 1149.1 test access port state machine
TDI
I
Test Data Input
Scan data input to the device
TDO
O
Test Data Output
Scan data output of the device
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
231
ADVANCE INFORMATION
2 from ARM core which is shared with HWBPs.
Analysis
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-122. JTAG Port Description (continued)
PIN
TYPE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
EMU0
I/O
Emulation 0
Channel 0 trigger + HSRTDX
EMU1
I/O
Emulation 1
Channel 1 trigger + HSRTDX
6.30.2 Scan Chain Configuration Parameters
Table 6-123 shows the TAP configuration details required to configure the router/emulator for this device.
Table 6-123. JTAG Port Description
Router Port ID
Default TAP
TAP Name
Tap IR Length
17
18
No
C674x
38
No
ARM926
19
4
No
ETB
4
The router is revision C and has a 6-bit IR length.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
6.30.3 Initial Scan Chain Configuration
The first level of debug interface that sees the scan controller is the TAP router module. The debugger
can configure the TAP router for serially linking up to 16 TAP controllers or individually scanning one of
the TAP controllers without disrupting the IR state of the other TAPs.
6.30.3.1 Adding TAPS to the Scan Chain
The TAP router must be programmed to add additional TAPs to the scan chain. The following JTAG scans
must be completed to add the ARM926EJ-S to the scan chain.
A Power-On Reset (POR) or the JTAG Test-Logic Reset state configures the TAP router to contain only
the router’s TAP.
Router
TDO
TDI
CLK
Steps
TMS
Router
ARM926EJ-S/ETM
Figure 6-78. Adding ARM926EJ-S to the scan chain
Pre-amble: The device whose data reaches the emulator first is listed first in the board configuration file.
This device is a pre-amble for all the other devices. This device has the lowest device ID.
Post-amble: The device whose data reaches the emulator last is listed last in the board configuration file.
This device is a post-amble for all the other devices. This device has the highest device ID.
• Function : Update the JTAG preamble and post-amble counts.
– Parameter : The IR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The IR post-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The DR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The DR post-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The IR main count is '6'.
232
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Parameter : The DR main count is '1'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-ir'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000007'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-dr'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-dr'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '8'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000089'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-ir'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000002'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Embed the port address in next command.
– Parameter : The port address field is '0x0f000000'.
– Parameter : The port address value is '3'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-dr'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-dr'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '32'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0xa2002108'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only all-ones JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'run-test/idle'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is 'all-ones'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Wait for a minimum number of TCLK pulses.
– Parameter : The count of TCLK pulses is '10'.
Function : Update the JTAG preamble and post-amble counts.
– Parameter : The IR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The IR post-amble count is '6'.
– Parameter : The DR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The DR post-amble count is '1'.
– Parameter : The IR main count is '4'.
– Parameter : The DR main count is '1'.
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
ADVANCE INFORMATION
•
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
233
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
The initial scan chain contains only the TAP router module. The following steps must be completed in
order to add ETB TAP to the scan chain.
Router
TDI
ARM926EJ-S/ETM
TDO
CLK
Steps
TMS
Router
•
ADVANCE INFORMATION
•
•
•
•
•
234
ARM926EJ-S/ETM
ETB
Figure 6-79. Adding ETB to the scan chain
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-ir'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000007'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-dr'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-dr'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '8'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000089'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-ir'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0x00000002'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Embed the port address in next command.
– Parameter : The port address field is '0x0f000000'.
– Parameter : The port address value is '3'.
Function : Do a send-only JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The route to JTAG shift state is 'shortest transition'.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-dr'.
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'pause-dr'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '32'.
– Parameter : The send data value is '0xa3302108'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Do a send-only all-ones JTAG IR/DR scan.
– Parameter : The JTAG shift state is 'shift-ir'.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
•
– Parameter : The JTAG destination state is 'run-test/idle'.
– Parameter : The bit length of the command is '6'.
– Parameter : The send data value is 'all-ones'.
– Parameter : The actual receive data is 'discarded'.
Function : Wait for a minimum number of TCLK pulses.
– Parameter : The count of TCLK pulses is '10'.
Function : Update the JTAG preamble and post-amble counts.
– Parameter : The IR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The IR post-amble count is '6 + 4'.
– Parameter : The DR pre-amble count is '0'.
– Parameter : The DR post-amble count is '1 + 1'.
– Parameter : The IR main count is '4'.
– Parameter : The DR main count is '1'.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
•
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
235
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
www.ti.com
7 Device and Documentation Support
7.1
Device Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the device platform, including tools to evaluate the
performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and
debug software and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically available within
the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
The following products support development of the device applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the device, visit the Texas Instruments web site
on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For information on pricing
and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
7.2
Documentation Support
The following documents describe the device. Copies of these documents are available on the Internet at
www.ti.com. Tip: Enter the literature number in the search box provided at www.ti.com.
Reference Guides
SPRUGU4 AM1806 ARM Microprocessor System Reference Guide
SPRUFU0
236
AM17x/AM18x ARM Microprocessor Peripherals Overview Reference Guide
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
AM1806
www.ti.com
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
8 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
This section describes the device orderable part numbers, packaging options, materials, thermal and
mechanical parameters.
8.1
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
AM1xxx processors and support tools. Each commercial AM1xxx platform member has one of three
prefixes: X, P, or null (no prefix). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators
for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product
development from engineering prototypes (TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMDS).
X
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications.
P
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification.
NULL
Fully-qualified production device.
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product.
X and P devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
NULL devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (X or P) have a greater failure rate than the standard production
devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system
because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be
used.
Figure 8-1 provides a legend for reading the complete device.
X
PREFIX
X = Experimental Device
P = Prototype Device
Blank = Production Device
DEVICE
SILICON REVISION
B
AM1806
( )
ZWT
( )
3
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
3 = 375 MHz
4 = 456 MHz
TEMPERATURE RANGE (JUNCTION)
Blank = 0°C to 90°C (Commercial Grade)
D
= -40°C to 90°C (Industrial Grade)
A
= -40°C to 105°C (Extended Grade)
PACKAGE TYPE
ZCE = 361 Pin Plastic BGA, with Pb-free
Soldered Balls [Green], 0.65-mm Ball Pitch
= Silicon Revision 2.0
ZWT = 361 Pin Plastic BGA, with Pb-free
Soldered Balls [Green]; 0.80-mm Ball Pitch
A.
BGA = Ball Grid Array
Figure 8-1. Device Nomenclature
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
237
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Device development evolutionary flow:
AM1806
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
8.2
www.ti.com
Thermal Data for ZCE Package
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZCE mechanical
package.
Table 8-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZCE]
NO.
°C/W (1)
AIR FLOW (m/s) (2)
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
7.6
N/A
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
11.3
N /A
3
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
23.9
0.00
21.2
0.50
20.3
1.00
19.5
2.00
7
18.6
4.00
8
0.2
0.00
0.3
0.50
0.3
1.00
0.4
2.00
12
0.5
4.00
13
11.2
0.00
14
11.1
0.50
4
5
6
RΘJMA
Junction-to-moving air
9
10
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
ADVANCE INFORMATION
11
15
11.1
1.00
16
11.0
2.00
17
10.9
4.00
(1)
(2)
238
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application.
For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment
Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount
Packages. Power dissipation of 500 mW and ambient temp of 70C assumed. PCB with 2oz (70um) top and bottom copper thickness
and 1.5oz (50um) inner copper thickness
m/s = meters per second
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM1806
www.ti.com
8.3
SPRS658B – FEBRUARY 2010 – REVISED MAY 2010
Thermal Data for ZWT Package
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZWT mechanical
package.
NO.
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
7.3
N/A
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
12.4
N /A
3
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
23.7
0.00
21.0
0.50
20.1
1.00
19.3
2.00
7
18.4
4.00
8
0.2
0.00
0.3
0.50
0.3
1.00
0.4
2.00
12
0.5
4.00
13
12.3
0.00
14
12.2
0.50
5
6
RΘJMA
Junction-to-moving air
9
10
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
11
15
(2)
AIR FLOW (m/s) (2)
1
4
(1)
°C/W (1)
12.1
1.00
16
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
12.0
2.00
17
11.9
4.00
These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application.
For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment
Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount
Packages. Power dissipation of 1W and ambient temp of 70C assumed. PCB with 2oz (70um) top and bottom copper thickness and
1.5oz (50um) inner copper thickness
m/s = meters per second
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM1806
239
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 8-2. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZWT]
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Applications
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
DLP® Products
www.dlp.com
Communications and
Telecom
www.ti.com/communications
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Computers and
Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
Clocks and Timers
www.ti.com/clocks
Consumer Electronics
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
Interface
interface.ti.com
Energy
www.ti.com/energy
Logic
logic.ti.com
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
RFID
www.ti-rfid.com
Space, Avionics &
Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/video
Wireless
www.ti.com/wireless-apps
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated